Home

WinSpec/32 User Manual - R

1. Triggered Mode not checked Continuous Cleans not checked For PI MAX system checked for DG535 for PTG Normal 7 D Pre Open C Full Speed sync unchecked for PTG Delay Time 0 Second Shutter Control Normal for PI MAX SE system Disabled Opened for PTG M WaitFor TTL TTL Line T Pre Open Not checked For PI MAX system check Pre Open for DG535 or ee PT G Acquire Focus Cancel Help Safe Mode selected External Trigger not checked Figure 32 Experiment Setup dialog box Edge Trigger edge Timing tab page Delay time 0 Use Interrupt not checked Note Not all of these parameters are provided for every controller model Ignore parameters that don t apply to your system Chapter 3 Initial Spectroscopic Data Collection 55 On the Data Corrections tab page Experiment Setup Figure 33 all of the correction functions m a eae SE should be OFF Main DataFile ROI Setup Data Corrections On the ADC tab page Figure 34 set the m Arithmetic parameters as they apply to your particular system Parameters that might be listed depending on the controller type include I Flatfield ss Rate ADC rate Only those rates available for your A D converter will be m CCD Blemishes m Cosmic Ray Removal displayed making it necessary to oon designate the A D type first Select the T Remove Pirates maximum speed allowed by the Bem Riles lane
2. Continuous Cleans not checked For latte PI MAX system checked for DG535 Extemal Sync I Continuous Cleans unchecked for PTG Shutter Control Normal For PI MAX m Shutter Control system Disabled Open for PTG Normal I Pre Open Internal Sync PI MAX with PTG only selected C FullSpeed sync Pre Open Not checked For PI MAX system checked for DG535 or PTG Delay Time 0 000 Seconds Safe Mode async selected Wait For TTL TTLLine r External Trigger not checked Edge Trigger edge Edge Trigger ease Delay time 0 Acquire Focus Cancel Help Use Interrupts not checked Figure 42 Timing tab page 4 On the Data Corrections tab page Figure GIZLET 43 all of the correction functions should be oe a eee A OFF Main DataFile ROI Setup Data Corrections m Arithmetic T Flatfield al m CCD Blemishes m Cosmic Ray Removal M Remove OFF Temporal Hemsire Neme c Spatial El Gensitivity 2 50 EF Acquire Focus Cancel Help Figure 43 Data Corrections tab page Chapter 4 Initial Image Data Collection 5 On the ADC tab page Figure 44 set the parameters as they apply to your particular system Parameters that might be listed follow Rate ADC rate Only those rates available for your A D converter will be displayed making it necessary to designate the A D type first Select the maximum s
3. 75 manual ooreis S EE E 75 Mercury Argon spectrum 211 method selection ssesesseereereeeeeeeeeee 75 modes and units 76 proced r Sienen oni 76 Save as Default button ssesseessseeeses 80 Website ics winlivaitidataiieettietiint 248 WinSpec 32 amp WinSpec 16 in same COMPULED aseyi eaa Ei 231 X axis wavelength calibration spectrum 211 Y T Analysis ATCAS i odiis stai o a a eaii 141 CQUAU ONS eene ees 141 OVELVICW asolete a aas 141 proced te sikisen eiae ias 141 UME CUVE n i aA 141 Z Axis Endpoint 0 0 cece eeeeeseeeseeeneeees 103 TAIE E 115
4. cc eeceeecesceeeneeeseeeeeeseeceecaecssecssecsseenseeees 44 Figure 23 Copnect tab pages eneee era ioti E dhe cs EE cored eve tee E ia 45 Figure 24 Comm Settings dialog bOX sseessseesessssseeseseesresresrrsressesrrsserreeseestesresesressesees 45 Figure 25 Gratings tab page Setting the grating parameters seeeeeereereeeeereereeeeesee 46 Figure 26 Move Spectrograph Gratings tab page eseesseeeesessrresresreseesrrsresresressesees 47 Figure 27 Define Spectrograph Slits Mirrors tab page cee eseesseessecsseceseceseeeeeeseeees 48 Figure 28 Slit width and Mirror selection tab pages Move Spectrograph dialog box 48 Figure 29 Entering the Laser Line Define Spectrograph Main tab page 49 Figure 30 Temperature dialog DOX 0 ee eeecesceeeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeneecaaecsaeceaeenaeesseeseeenaeens 52 Figure 31 Experiment Setup dialog box Main tab page left all but PI MAX right PIEMAX e at a a A E OE VE d suede ate See E abe 53 Figure 32 Experiment Setup dialog box Timing tab page eeeessecsseceseceteeeeeees 54 Figure 33 Data Corrections tab page eeessserseseereesesressesrtssersisstestesserriestestrstesresressestes 55 Figure 34 Generic ADC tab p le eeen is aatia EA EE iA i E 55 Fisure 35 ROT dialog DOR koerans erastea a Ene Beas gets aeaiee aiea 56 Fig re 36 Data File dalog boxmeer n aE R es ee A e 56 Figure 37 File Browse dialog DX cece ceeceeeceseceseeeseeeeceeeseeeseeeaeecaae
5. 3101 3102 3103 3183 3263 3311 3319 3320 3321 3402 ORDER of calibration POLYNOM valid calibration data pairs pixel pos of calibration data calibration VALUE at above pos polynom COEFFICIENTS laser wavenumber for relativ WN reserved If set to 200 valid label below Calibration label NULL term d Calibration Expansion area 27 ay Start of Y Calibration Structure double double char char char char char char char char char double double double double char offset factor current unit reserved string 40 reserved2 40 calib valid input_unit polynom unit polynom order calib count pixel position 10 calib value 10 polynom coeff 6 laser position reserved3 unsigned char new calib flag char char calib label 81 expansion 87 3489 3497 3505 3506 3507 3547 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3672 3752 3800 3808 3809 3810 3891 offset for absolute data scaling factor for absolute data scaling selected scaling unit reserved special string for scaling reserved flag if calibration is valid current input units for calib value linear UNIT and used in the polynom coeff ORDER of calibration POLYNOM valid calibration data pairs pixel pos of calibration data calibration VALUE at above pos polynom COEF
6. 0 104 DELAYED TRIGGER OUT 174 Deleting data files eee eeeeeeeneeeneeeteees 74 Demo interface eee eee eeeeeeseeeeeeees 39 Detector pixel Width 0 00 85 DG535 active mode vais Resi 182 bracket pulsing eee eee eeeeeeeees 182 continuous exponential mode 183 continuous linear mode ee 183 Interactive Trigger Setup 0 0 187 Operation Of oo eee eee eee eeeeteeeteeeees 180 port AMALESS 0022 cesesobtetssessteeeesesetebes 181 Pulse Sequence Setup Exponential Increment 00 00 0 0 184 Fast Amplitude parameter 185 Fast decay and Slow decay 184 Fixed Increment eee 184 sequential exponential algorithm 184 Slow Amplitude parameter 185 Time Constant parameter 185 Time Constant cece eeeeeeeees 185 Pulsing tab page oo eee eeeeee eee 182 repetitive gating setup eee 182 sequential gating setup 183 slope threshold amp impedance 181 trigger mode woo ee eee eseeteeeteeeees 181 DG535 Digital Delay Pulse Generator 173 DG535 Pulse Sequence setup number of spectra eects eters 183 pulse delay scossi seisnes 183 PULSE width perereneneiinnnns 183 Index DiSpersion sieic eit aE 90 Dispersion data Sets eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeees 91 Display color control eeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 114 Display tab page eee eee eeeeeeeeereeeees 38 PAD E 38 REVErse isthe stain Bee 38 Rotates roni ie
7. 90 char fastfile 16 fast access file Not used by WinView 106 int asynen Not used by WinView 108 int datatype 0 gt float 4 byte 1 gt long integer 4 byte 2 gt integer 2 byte 3 gt unsigned integer 2 byte 4 gt String char 1 byte 5 gt double 8 bytes Not implemented 6 gt byte 1 byte 7 gt unsigned byte 1 byte 110 float calibnan 10 Not used by WinView 150 int rtanum Not used by WinView 152 int astdiode Not used by WinView 154 int int78 Not used by WinView 156 int int79 Not used by WinView 158 double calibpol 4 Not used by WinView 190 int int96 Not used by WinView 192 int int97 Not used by WinView 194 int int98 Not used by WinView 196 int int99 Not used by WinView 198 int int100 Not used by WinView 200 char exprem 5 80 comments 600 int int301 Not used by WinView 602 char label 16 Not used by WinView 618 int gsize Not used by WinView 620 int lfloat Not used by WinView 213 214 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C 622 char califile 16 calibration file Not used by WinView 638 char bkgdfile 16 background file Not used by WinView 654 int srccmp Not used by WinView 656 int stripe number of stripes per frame 658 int scramble 0 scramble 1 unscramble 660 long lexpos exposure val 3
8. Figure 35 R Experiment Setup OI dialog box ADC Timing Processes Save Load Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections r Data File Name V Enable Curent Name i pe Auto Increment File Name Value fi 0 r Overwrite Append DataType AME v Existing Files M AutoSelect M Confirm before overwriting F o AT z m Auto save and prompts Ask whether to save unsaved files 7 IV Use a new window for each run Acquire Focus Cancel Help Figure 36 Data File dialog box Chapter 3 9 Click on the button to the Initial Spectroscopic Data Collection Run As Data File Name right of the Name field This will open a browse _YT SPE 57 Saveinn Data i H e A c e WA 256strip box Select the directory 1035strip SPE 4G 2stip SF where you want the stored 1Omorestrip SPE AA 300i SPI file to go In the example 10strip SPE AA 3stiip SF illustrated the file name is 16strip SPE 14 Atrames TESTFILEI and it willbe F 1d aust stored in a directory named gt Data If the filename doesn t automatically appear in the browse box type it in The file type should be WinX Data spe File name ftestfilet Save as type winx Data spe x Cancel Z Figure 37 File Browse dialog box 10 Click on the Save button to save the entered information and return to the Experiment Setup dialog box 11 Click on OK
9. 0 0 0 cece 51 Chapter 4 Initial Imaging Data Collection 2 00 00 ceeeeeeereeeeeeeenes 59 Chapter 5 Opening Closing and Saving Data Files 00 00 ee 69 Chapter 6 Wavelength Calibration cecccneeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 75 Chapter 7 Spectrograph Calibration cc cceeseeeeceneeseeeeseteeaeeeenes 83 Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 2 00 00 ccc cceeseeeeeeneeseeeceeeeeseeecseeeaeeeeaes 93 13 14 WinSpec 32 Manual This page intentionally left blank Version 2 5 C Introduction This manual has been written to give new users a step by step guide to collecting storing and processing data from your Roper Scientific system The manual is divided into the following three parts e Part 1 Getting Started is primarily intended for the first time user who is familiar with Windows based applications or for the experienced user who wants to review These chapters lead you through hardware setup experiment setup data collection file handling wavelength calibration spectrograph setup and calibration and data display procedures e Part 2 Advanced Topics goes on to discuss ancillary topics such as cleaning ROIs binning data correction techniques printing gluing spectra Y T analysis processing options pulser operation and customizing the toolbar These chapters are more informational and less procedural than those in Part 1 e Part 3 Reference contains appendices that provide additional useful infor
10. 1992 Software version char UserInfo 1000 1996 2995 user data long WinView_id 2996 Set to 0x01234567L if file was created by WinX Version 2 5 C ey ah 27 ay A 7 7 27 7 Calibration Structures There are three structures for the calibrations e The Area Inside the Calibration Structure below is repeated two times xcalibration ycalibration Start of X Calibration Structure 3000 3488 x axis calibration 3489 3977 y axis calibration double offset 3000 double factor 3008 char current unit 3016 char reserved1 3017 char string 40 3018 char reserved2 40 3058 char calib valid 3098 char input unit 3099 char polynom unit 3100 offset for absolute data scaling factor for absolute data scaling selected scaling unit reserved special string for scaling reserved flag if calibration is valid current input units for calib value linear UNIT and used in the polynom coeff Appendix C char char double double double double char polynom order calib count Data Structure pixel position 10 calib value 10 polynom coeff 6 laser_position reserved3 unsigned char new calib flag char char calib label 81 expansion 87
11. 6 Once the wavelengths have been Calibration Setup HG ARGON SPE 1025X 1X1 X entered for the selected peaks check Calibration Units p Calibration Method oe the selection box to the left of the nm z Linear Polynomial Pixel box for each peak selected Calibration Points Figure 63 A checkmark in the box Pixel Value Pixel Value indicates that the peak is selected Vv 182 895 368 02 a 250 397 Note that wavelength values must be Y por ses 33 r ser 263 363 entered for these peaks before the i Vv selection box can be checked 495 286 548 07 1 2 11 53 E 537 089 E 380 424 7 Click on OK This completes the wavelength calibration and the dialog x 794 059 x 583338 box will close At the same time the l z E s Points Entered 4 Calibration Mode selected in the epee l nim m z Usage dialog box will a t s Points Needed 2 lelp change from Off to Manual Save as Find Default Peaks Note the appearance of the data display The peak find routine display data Figure 63 Setup Calibration screen after selecting arrows and pixel number of each peak peaks and entering calibration wavelengths found does not change The x axis units will however change to reflect the display units v4 HG ARGON SPE 1025 X 1 X 1 Figure 64 Spectrum after Calibration 80 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Save as Default The Save as Default button in the Calibration Setup dialog box determine
12. C Extemal Internal The Timing Generator will create its own trigger signals at the selected frequency ce Help External The Timing Generator will be triggered by trigger signals that originateinan Figure 179 Timing Generator Interactive external piece of equipment Trigger Setup 188 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C This page intentionally left blank Chapter 19 Custom Toolbar Settings Introduction The Custom Toolbar feature of WinSpec 32 allows you one button access to many features or combinations of features available through the software The Custom Toolbar layout and the number of buttons displayed on the Custom Toolbar can easily be changed Displaying the Custom Toolbar 1 To make the Custom Toolbar visible select Toolbars and then Custom on the View menu The Custom Toolbar will appear on the desktop and its default configuration will be as shown in Figure 180 You can change position of the Custom Toolbar its layout and the number of buttons it contains za sy A Figure 180 Default Custom Toolbar Customizing the Toolbar Although the Custom Toolbar defaults with the buttons shown in Figure 180 many additional buttons are in fact available and can be added to the button using the Customize Toolbar dialog box Figure 181 Buttons can be added or removed at any time and the new configuration will be saved when the dialog box is closed Customize Toolbar Available toolbar b
13. ROIs in the regions where extensions of the strips and columns of the defined ROIs intersect Both the defined and computer generated ROIs will be stored and the data for both will be displayed see Figure 121 The side effect ROIs are necessary to accommodate hardware Figure 121 Multiple Imaging ROIs and Resulting Data DEFINED RESULTING DATA Labeled boxes are user defined ROls Those without labels are computer generated limitations Methods of Defining and Storing ROIs A region of interest full width or partial width can be defined by 1 Opening the Easy Bin dialog box and entering the values for a single full chip wide spectroscopy mode ROI 2 Entering values for the Wavelength X and Slit Y parameters from the keyboard 3 Dragging the mouse cursor on a displayed image to define a rectangular region and then clicking the Mouse button Before using this method you must acquire a Full Chip image Otherwise you will get a Size of Image in Active Window is Incompatible with Current Chip Size message when you try to define an ROI Note In Spectroscopy mode ROIs created via the mouse are limited to full chip width like the ones depicted in Figure 118 This is not the case in Imaging mode 128 4 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Defining the region with the mouse and then changing parameter values via the keyboard before storing the pattern This allows you to change a full width ROI creat
14. WinSpec PRINCETON INSTRUMENTS Princeton Instruments Spectroscopic Software 4411 0048 CG Version 2 5C September 24 2003 ROPER SCIENTIFIC OU N OONN O A EYOND IMAGIN Copyright 2001 2003 Roper Scientific Inc 3660 Quakerbridge Rd Trenton NJ 08619 TEL 800 874 9789 609 587 9797 FAX 609 587 1970 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced by any means without the written permission of Roper Scientific Inc Printed in the United States of America Cascade is a trademark of Roper Scientific Inc InSpectrum is a trademark of Acton Research Corporation PVCAM is a registered trademark of Photometrics Ltd Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries The information in this publication is believed to be accurate as of the publication release date However Roper Scientific Inc does not assume any responsibility for any consequences including any damages resulting from the use thereof The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Revision of this publication may be issued to incorporate such change Table of Contents Part 1 Getting Started cccssccsssseeesesseeeseneeseeeseesseseeees LO NATROGUGCHONR EE E E T deandddutbaniecisbaasndvsbauddadseanade 15 Summary of Chapter Information eeeeseseeseeeeeseeseeseessstestssresresressesrisstsrtssresrestesresresseee 15 Online Help deele
15. of strips per skips of min blocks before geo skps calibration coefficients ADC rate ADC type ADC resolution ADC bit adjust gain experiment remarks geometric operations rotate 0x01 reverse 0x02 flip 0x04 Intensity display string cleans number of skips per clean calibration file name CSMA background file name number of source comp diodes y dimension of raw data 0 scrambled 1 unscrambled long exposure in milliseconds used if exposure set to 1 long num of scans used if noscan set to 1 long num of accumulations used if avgexp set to 1 stripe file st130 version amp date 01 000 02 01 90 newl20 Type II 01d120 Type I ST130 ST121 ST138 DC131 PentaMAX ST133 MicroMAX SpectroMax ST135 GPIB VICCD 10 ST116 GPIB 11 OMA3 GPIB 12 OMA4 WODAIHDUOAWNE Set to 1 if flat field was applied reserved Kinetics Trigger Mode EMPTY BLOCK FOR EXPANSION Vert Clock Speed in micro sec set to 1 if accum done by Hardware set to 1 if store sync used set to 1 if blemish removal applied set to 1 if cosmic ray removal done if cosmic ray applied this is type Threshold of cosmic ray removal number of frames in file max intensity of data future min intensity of data future y axis label shutter type shutter compensation time Readout mode full kinetics etc 37 215 WinSpec 32 Manual unsigned int WindowSize 1482 window size for kinetics only
16. shown in Figure 30 Current Temperature Locked ogi Temp 2 Set the Target Temperature to the desired value 0 suggested for initial data nee acquisition 3 Click on the Set Temp button When the Current Temperature Unlocked message changes to Current Temperature Locked temperature lock will have been established Note Both the MicroMAX and the ST 133 additionally have a Temp Lock LED on the panel of the Analog Control module that visually indicates when temperature lock occurs Figure 40 Temperature dialog box Temperature Control for Other Systems ST 121 ST 130 or ST 138 Controller Change the dial setting on the front panel of the Controller PentaMax Set the temperature on the front panel of the Temperature Power Supply unit Micro View Not user settable Temperature is solely under software control Cleans and Skips With some controllers specifically the PentaMAX ST 130 ST 133 and ST 138 there is a Cleans Skips tab page in the Hardware Setup dialog box Cleans are used to reduce charge buildup on the CCD array while waiting to begin data acquisition Skips are used when the Region of Interest ROI is smaller than the full chip they allow binning and quick traversing of the rows that precede and follow the ROI For the procedures that follow load the default values for these parameters by bringing the Cleans Skips tab page to the front and then clicking on Load Defaults followed by Yes
17. Exception With a PI MAX camera Cleans should be set to 1 and Strips per Clean to 4 Chapter 4 Initial Image Data Collection 61 Experiment Setup Procedure all controllers 1 Open the Experiment Setup dialog box Figure 41 from the Acquisition menu ADC Timing Processes Save Load ADC Timing Processes Save Load Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections m Exposure Time m Exposure Time fa sec x 0 000 sec z Number of Images fi Number of Images j1 CCD Readout 7 CCD Readout Use Full Chip Use Region Of Interest Use FullChip Use Region Of Interest Readout Dimensions 653 Y 492 m Accumulations Readout Dimensions x 512 Y 512 m Accumulations Number jo Number fi Amplifier High Capacity C Low Noise parene High Wapacity low Noice m Avalanche Gain intensifier E AE Gain 0 I Enable C Shutter Cw Mode Gain 128 La Gate Mode Safe Mode Acquire Focus OK Cancel Hep Acquire Focus OK Cancel Help _ Figure 41 Experiment Setup Main tab page left all but PI MAX right PI MAX 2 On the Main tab page set the following parameters Exposure time 0 1 seconds For PI MAX system using PTG enter 0 sec Number of Spectra Images 1 Use Full Chip selected Accumulations 1 Gain PI MAX only 128 Ampli
18. Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 ix Offset Spectrum for Zero order Measurement seesseseeeereereerereerereesre 88 Adjust dialog DOR srete ate terea E sae EREE A ea ee 89 Calibration Adjust Spectrum sesessesssesssseesseseresessessessossetssesesesessresessessesses 89 Dispersion dialog DOK ceee a i aiii 90 Image display of 256 data strips eeeeeseeeeeseeseeesesreesrsressesrrssersresresresressesresss 93 3D Image display of 10 data strips eeesseeeeseeeeeesssreesesrrssesrrssersresresresressesreses 93 3D graph with two data Strips cecescessecsseceseceseceeceseesseeeseeeeseeeaeeeaaeenaees 94 3D graph with five data Strips cee eescessecsseceseceeceseceseeeeeeeseeeeaeeeneeeaaeenaees 95 Open dialog DOX 2a sisi ya ears taint Hees AE Era ene Stee act eset 95 Display Layout dialog DOX cece eeeeceseceseceseceseeeseeeeneesaeeeaeessaecsaecaeseaaeenaes 96 Hid lamp spe 3 D Graphs na ko
19. Installing from the FTP Site If you aren t sure how to access the FTP site contact Roper Scientific s Technical Support Department for assistance Contact information follows Roper Scientific 3660 Quakerbridge Road Trenton NJ 08619 USA Tel 800 874 9789 609 587 9797 Fax 609 587 1970 Tech Support E mail techsupport roperscientific com For technical support and service outside the United States see our web page at www roperscientific com An up to date list of addresses telephone numbers and e mail addresses of Roper Scientific s overseas offices and representatives is maintained on the web page 1 Log onto the FTP site and go to the Software Official Current directory 2 Execute the program WinSpec exe and follow the instructions on your screen You can abort the installation at any time by clicking on Cancel and following the instructions Custom Installation Choices Application Files Loads the actual WinSpec 32 files Help Files Loads the Help System both general and context sensitive Help PCI Interface Loads the drivers for the PCI Interface card Sample SPE Data Files Creates a directory Data containing sample SPE files This directory is located beneath the one containing the WinSpec 32 files Diagnostic Program Loads the diagnostics program pidiag32 exe It is located in the directory containing the WinSpec 32 application files and can be executed by double clicking on pidiag32 exe via the
20. unsigned int clkspd 1484 clock speed for kinetics amp frame transfer unsigned int interface type 1486 computer interface isa taxi pei eisa etc unsigned long ioAdd1 1488 I O address of interface card unsigned long ioAdd2 1492 if more than one address for card unsigned long ioAdd3 1496 unsigned int intLevel 1500 interrupt level interface card unsigned int GPIBadd 1502 GPIB address if used unsigned int ControlAdd 1504 GPIB controller address if used unsigned int controllerNum 1506 if multiple controller system will have controller data came from Future Item unsigned int SWmade 1508 Software which created this file int NumROI 1510 number of ROIs used if 0 assume 1 1512 1630 ROI information struct ROIinfo unsigned int startx left x start value unsigned int endx right x value unsigned int groupx amount x is binned grouped in hw unsigned int starty top y start value unsigned int endy bottom y value unsigned int groupy amount y is binned grouped in hw ROTinfob1k 10 ROI Starting Offsets ROI 1 1512 ROI 2 1524 ROI 3 1536 ROI 4 1548 ROI 5 1560 ROI 6 1572 ROI 7 1584 ROI 8 1596 ROI 9 1608 ROI 10 1620 char FlatField 120 1632 Flat field file name char background 120 1752 Background sub file name char blemish 120 1872 Blemish file name float software _ver
21. This information is displayed at the lower left of the Calibration Setup dialog box The lower Points value is the number of peaks required The upper points value is the number available for calibration A peak is available if it has been found its known value has been entered and the adjacent checkbox has been checked 82 WinSpec 32 Manual This page intentionally left blank Version 2 5 C Chapter 7 Spectrograph Calibration Introduction You can calibrate the WinSpec 32 software by either using the spectrograph stepper motor position Spectrograph calibration or by manual wavelength calibration Spectrograph calibration is achieved using the Calibrate selection on the Spectrograph menu and is described in detail in this chapter Wavelength calibration which is only good for one position of the grating is explained in Chapter 6 The spectrograph calibration routine requires you to enter certain default values into a series of dialogs You are also required to have a known source such as a mercury lamp placed near the entrance slit of the spectrograph Once you have completed the following calibration procedure any movement of the spectrograph will be accounted for in the display of spectral information Notes 1 The spectrograph MUST be focused and aligned properly before a good calibration can be achieved Spectrograph focusing and alignment is an art onto itself and is beyond the scope of this manual Basically it consi
22. be able to save the file with any extension The file however will be saved in the SPE file type format Only the data is saved This could have some unexpected effects For example if you save a graph as a eps file and then open the file with an image editor you will see the data presented as a single strip image not as a graph Figure 55 Save As Data Types 4 Click on OK to save the file or Cancel to close the Data File Save As dialog without saving the file Chapter 5 Opening Closing and Saving Data Files 73 Data File tab page Experiment Setup The Data File tab page provides you with ADC Timing Processes Save Load additional control and flexibility in naming and Main DataFile ROI Setup Data Corrections saving newly collected data Because the m Data File Name settings on this tab page are applied to data Nme o acquisition not post processing make your entries before acquiring data The auto save a TER TE E auto name and auto increment features allow V Enable Curent Value p a you to acquire data and save it according to the filename template you define Also you can eee eee take advantage of the multiple open windows AMEE Evisina Fies AutoSelect functionality and specify that each new data run E EN Float z opens a new window on the display window m uto save and prompts Ask whether to save unsaved files 7 IV Use a new window for each run Acquire F
23. box before you click on OK Moving the box however requires that you position the mouse very near the edge of the box because further in the Edit box will capture the mouse Resizing is done in the usual way with the ROI box handles If the ROI box is accidentally erased just redraw a new one in the desired location and the Edit box will reappear The Edit box wraps lines at the end of the box and the Label function will display the label as it appears in the box Figure 92 Figure 92 Edit box with line wrapped label and finished label with same line wraps 108 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C To correct the line wrapping simply resize the ROI as shown in Figure 93 LPLEL EEL LEE T LEE E EEE E TEE PPLE L EEE PETE EEE rA ann r ot HA label that is too long for the edit box H A label that is too long for the edit box H 7 PPP PRA A 4 Desa taET TELL ELETELTESTEETEOLTEENTELTERTTESTEETEOETOETEETEEEEEEED Figure 93 ROI resized to correct Line wrapping The font can be changed after the label is printed on the display Hg argon spe 1025 X 1 X 1 This is the label Hg Argon Figure 94 Display after changing Font Selection To change the background or color the label must be erased and reprinted it can only be altered inside the edit box Data Displayed as an Image WinSpec 32 can display data as an image as a two dimensional graph or as a 3 D Graph multiple strips from the same graph or the same
24. free runs or External in a FARTS mi which it is triggered from an external source Threshold fi Volts If operating in the Internal Slope Sener trigger mode set the Trigger C Positive C High Extemal asi ran Frequency in Hz Consult the Negative 50 Ghms DG535 Manual to determine the maximum Trigger Frequency that can be used in your application If operating in the External faiscer mode apecity the Cancel _ Downoad ToDG535 Hep Slope Threshold and Termination appropriate for the trigger source Figure 172 DG535 Triggers tab page 182 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C 12 Click on the Gating tab to bring the Gating tab page to the Triggers Gating Comm Pot front Mode Bracket Pulsing C ON OFF 13 Select Bracket Pulsing On e or Off C Sequential Note Bracket pulsing is only useful in low duty factor gated measurements in the UV with the PI MAX camera See your PI MAX manual for detailed information 14 Select Repetitive or Sequential and then click on the adjacent Setup button Cancel Download To Desa Help Figure 173 DG535 Gating tab page Repetitive Mode If Repetitive is selected the Gate Width Gate Delay Repetitive Gating setup dialog box will appear Figure 174 In this nsec 1000 nsec 7 mode the Gate Width and Gate Software Accumulations Delay remain constant over the Repeat Width Dela
25. from Setup Hardware run the Hardware Wizard When the PVCAM dialog box Figure 198 is displayed click in the Yes radio button click on Next and continue through the Wizard After the Wizard is finished the Controller Camera tab card will be displayed with the Use PVCAM checkbox selected You should now be able to set up experiments and acquire data Appendix H Troubleshooting USB 2 0 PYCAM x Are you using a PYCAM supported camera Nes C No cme ee Figure 198 Hardware Wizard PVCAM dialog box 237 Demo High Speed PCI and PCI Timer are Choices on Hardware Wizard Interface dialog If there is an installed Roper Scientific high speed card in the host computer and you want to operate a camera using the USB 2 0 interface the PVCAM_INI file created by RSConfig exe must exist and the USB 2 0 supported camera must be Camera_1 PVCAM INI which contains information required to identify the interface camera is referenced by the Hardware Wizard when you are setting up WinSpec 32 with USB for the first time If the Wizard did not find a PVCAM INI file or if RSConfig exe was run but the USB 2 0 camera is Camera_2 in the PVCAM_INI file Demo High Speed PCI and PCI Timer will be selectable from the Wizard s Interface dialog box Interface xj Select the type of interface your system has Demo ha Demo High Speed PCI PCI Timer cot tee Figure 199 Hardware Wizard Interface dialog
26. pixels in the input file that are outside the wavelength range of the output file are discarded For cases where the intermediate data overlaps the output data the data from the two files are gradually blended over the overlap region The most common overlap case for step and glue will be where the intermediate file starts after the output file has data but before the output data has ended Output file X X XIX XF S Intermediate file EEEE yy YY YYYYYYYY There are five points in the above overlap region and the result of the blending would be left to right overlap point number blending result 1 5 6 x 1 6 y 2 4 6 x 2 6 y 3 3 6 x 3 6 y 4 2 6 x 4 6 y 5 1 6 x 5 6 y If there is only 1 point in the overlap region then it would have 1 2 x 1 2 y Another case occurs when the intermediate file starts before the output and ends after the output file has data In this case also the data is blended across the overlap region Since the glue is a general algorithm there will be cases such as the following Output file x X X Intermediate file Output file OOO00K x x x X x x 0000000 Intermediate file Flats 4 yyyyy In these cases the composition of the result will be 50 Intermediate and 50 Output or One of the effects of the above rules is that multiple copies of the same file can be glued and the result will be the same as if only one copy had been used The ble
27. s sssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 138 Auto Select at least three strips 00 0 eee 70 eleven or more StLIPS eee 70 CWO SIPS iiie a a 70 Auto Select algorithm eee 70 at least three Strips 00 0 93 eleven Or MOTE SUPIPS ee eee eee 93 SIN Gl SUHAP ses ss eskees webetans Noes este eesees eee 94 WOS IPS iire aa aaa 94 Auto Select Image Graph or 3D Graph 69 Auto Spectro See Spectrograph Calibration AUX DLY D TRIG OUT 174 Avalanche gain 54 61 243 AXiS labeling snena iao 114 Background subtraction 131 132 acquiring background files 131 AULOMALIC hrat ie poe EA geste ates 132 Binary math operations eee 138 Binning constraints with PCI card 124 243 244 Hard War Gy oe e E E E 124 IN SpECtTOSCODY sceesceeeseeeeseeeeeneeeeeees 124 Post Process rarere ere E 166 SoftWare oinensis 124 125 Binning and Skipping POSt processing sesesseeseeeseerereersereeeee 166 Procedures nei a aR 166 restrictions and liminations 167 Bitwise math operations AND irrg a 138 complement eseeeseseeerserrerserrsrereere 138 exclusive OR eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 138 OR ey aaan E N deat Gas 138 Block Size ei aaa 42 C Calibration MEDU ios na e nE EE E a EEEE 76 Calibration cont Method 14 ri e a a 81 OUD E EE sidtess sedis 75 reference lines eeri n eii 211 Setup dialog eee eee eeeeeeeeeeees 77 SUIUCTULES 00 0 ineno 216 220 Cautions calibrat
28. spe in the current Figure 95 Open dialog box directory are listed in the box below the directory name The WinSpec 32 data type is WinXData spe Note The directory can be changed by changing the selection in the Look In box The next time the Open dialog box is opened the new folder name will appear in the box and its contents will be shown If the Auto Select checkbox is checked deselect it Then select Image From the data directory select the image EAIC ERES file called CIRCUIT SPE Click on the OK button A window of the appropriate dimensions should appear immediately The image display Figure 96 may take a few seconds depending on the speed of the computer Figure 96 Circuit spe Image Changing the Brightness Range 1 Click on 5 95 located beneath the displayed image as shown in Figure 96 You will observe a moderate brightening of the image as it autoscales on the central 90 of the image histogram The brightest pixels with high dark charge and the darkest pixels pixels with low response are ignored 2 Click on the ES Autoscale button restoring the image to its initial appearance 110 WinSpec 32 Manual Brightness Contrast Control Select Palette on the Display menu This will open the Brightness Contrast dialog a box Figure 97 Note that the window ree a ae includes a plot of display brightness Y Ae oS eer ao axis versus data value X axis As settings 50 E are changed the
29. 1 75494351e to 3 402823466 e Display Result This checkbox appears on the C page only If checked the output Operations image will be displayed as soon as the processing is complete On the Operation tab page the math operations are listed as either Linear or Non Linear The operand s for math operations can be a single file a file and a constant or two files In addition to allowing you to perform these operations on entire files WinSpec also allows you to specify the frames if multi frame and a region of interest ROD When working with a single file the specified operation is performed on each pixel value of A and the result is written to the corresponding pixel of the Output File C The operations available are grouped under the Non Linear heading Log10 Absolute Value Natural Log Bitwise Complement Square Root Binary NOT Squared When working with a single file and a constant the operation will be performed on each pixel value of A using the constant specified on the B tab page and the result is written to the corresponding pixel of the Output File C The operations available are grouped under the Linear heading Addition Min Subtraction Max Multiplication Bitwise AND Division Bitwise OR Bitwise Exclusive OR When working with two files corresponding pixels from the two files A and B are operated on and the result is written to the corresponding pixel of the Output File C The operations that can b
30. 83 linear calibration equation 0 0 0 88 MANUAL v 25 raain 75 Offset reason for sssensonesssssseeee0sseesee 86 p rameterS nimas nen iaia 84 peak finder function 0 00 eee 86 Preparation fOP eee eee eeees 83 SEQUENCE 8s viiisccieciesccsvevcvuvtacsevedasvssuyevesess 86 Use for Auto Spectro Calibration Checkbox 2 28icsei sett ceihesndeheieiees dts 44 Spectroscopy data collection Initial 51 Experiment Setup procedure steps common to all controller types 53 procedure for all controllers 57 Skips and Cleans 00 eee eeeeeeeeeeees 52 temperature control eee eee 52 Spectroscopy MOde eee eee eters 123 SPEX spectrometer installation 22 Splash Screen ovis siveceiessiecsedess Medes sdettelecvenss 27 Square Root math operation 137 Squared math operation 137 Status Bar messages s s s 18 Step and Glue Pile OVerlapiz ccessesisedecch inerea 146 file requirement 0 0 0 0 cece eeeeeeeeee 146 file starting and ending values 147 incremental files 0 00 eee eects 147 overwriting incremental files 147 SET and RUN es isssc scssisescsdeeseypeostessiie 147 Strip selection Shift End key combination 0 101 Shift Home key combination 101 via Custom Toolbat eee 101 Subtraction math operation 137 T V Target Wavelength 0 ee eeeeeeees 91 254 WinSpec 32 Manual Technical support eee eee ee
31. Chip tab page 0 0 0 eee 193 Custom filter procedure ee 158 Custom Timing tab page 194 250 WinSpec 32 Manual Custom Toolbar adding a button ee eeeeeeeee 190 CUSTOMIZATION Of eee eeseeeeeeeeeneeeenees 189 displayer ei out iets a 189 removing a button eee eee 190 SENES e ea EE 189 Custom Toolbar dialog box Addcn senen ana esives 190 Available Buttons sseeseeeseeseeeeeeees 190 EE E E EST 190 Helper na nn naa 190 Move DOWN ou ceeeceeesceesseeeetreeeeeeeaes 191 Move Up iriiri ispisiri asaini eroi 191 RemoVen eo i ro naas 190 Resetear naana a ds ante 190 Toolbar Buttons seseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 190 D Darks charge osioon e a 132 Data collection Initial PentaMAX LOCUSING ioir ii iaioe 67 Data correction techniques 0 06 131 Data display types eee eeseeseeeseeereeeees 93 Data displayed as 3D graph 95 Data displayed as graph 5 95 display range eee 97 brightness contrast control 0 110 context WINdOW eeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeneees 104 CULSOL seoses raeas sabuts is evaaa k Eaa eie iraa 100 Cursor CUVE Ea 102 CULSOF FUNCTIONS eee eeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 100 displaying one Strip eee eee 100 hidden surfaces cceeseeeeseeeeseeeenes 103 Information DOX eeeeeeseeeeneeeeneeees 99 Marker CUVE iii ina 102 multiple Strips sssseeseeseeeseeseerserrereresse 101 ROL sro penaoa tai aens ae 98 Strip Selection nsii isni 101 Undo All
32. Color Axes 3D Layout Image Layout Cursor additional information on p Range Axes and Cross Sections amp 667 a to eet Units Pixel Click on the Range tab to re ia move the Range tab page Figure 101 to the front Initial Autoscale and Set to Save as Default OK E Hel Full Range should be z peer Eee selected The Frame number should be 1 T Set to Full Range Initial Full Range Figure 101 Range tab page Click on the OK button The Display Layout dialog box will close jew Acquisition Calibration T Click on the y Autoscale button at the bottom of the x ae image window Then select the large cursor by clicking on 4 Status Bar Cursor on the View menu and then on Large as shown in Figure 102 si v Axes The display should now appear as shown in Figure 103 v Cross Sections The axes will be labeled in image pixels and strips with bs respect to the CCD chip used to acquire the image The slag vertical image intensity profile at the cursor position will be displayed to the left and the horizontal image intensity Figure 102 Selecting the profile at the bottom The minimum and maximum values Large Cursor for each profile are indicated Note that you can use the mouse and drag the axes and profile boundaries to change the size of the profile display regions To change the cursor location simply click the mouse at the new spot The cross sectional g
33. Corresponding pixel value in B 000000111111 63 Result written to C 000000010101 21 OR A bitwise OR operation is performed on the binary representation of each pixel of the A file and each pixel of the B file with the result written to the C file An eight bit example follows Bits Decimal Value Pixel value in A 010101010101 1365 Corresponding pixel value in B 000000111111 63 Result written to C 010101111111 1407 Exclusive OR A bitwise Exclusive OR operation is performed on the binary representation of each pixel of the A file and each pixel of the B file with the result written to the C file An eight bit example follows Bits Decimal Value Pixel value in A 010101010101 1365 Corresponding pixel value in B 000000111111 63 Result written to C 010101101010 1386 Complement For each pixel value n in the A file the corresponding value in the output file C is set to 1 n Otherwise stated each 0 becomes a 1 and each 1 a 0 Binary Operations NOT For each pixel in the A file all non zero values yield a zero and all zero values only yield a one The resulting values are written to the corresponding point of the C file Chapter 12 Procedure 1 2 Spectra Math 139 Select the operation to be performed on the Operation tab page Enter the first input filename on the A tab page If the operation involves two files or one file and a constant enter the second file name on the B tab page or enter the value of the constant on
34. If this isn t done although you will be able to Calibrate install the spectrograph it will not be possible to establish Figure 20 Spectrograph menu communications and an error message will result Select Define on the Spectrograph menu Figure 20 This will open the Define Spectrograph dialog box Figure 21 On the Main tab page note the Active Spectrograph text entry box If spectrographs have previously been installed the active one will be indicated If no spectrograph has been previously installed the box will be blank Note there is a checkbox that allows you to designate a particular spectrograph as the one that will be used for doing an Auto Spectro Calibration Define Spectrograph x Main Achye Spectroaraph z I Use for Auto Spectro Calibration D Grossing lasenlime Figure 21 Define Spectrograph dialog box WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C 6 Click on Install Remove Spectrograph This will open the Install Remove EEE Spectrographs dialog box Figure 22 The Acton SP300i on COMI lower window lists the supported Spectrographs The upper window lists those installed To install a spectrograph select it from the list in the lower window select the Communications Port Auto COM 1 COM8 or DEMO and click Remove Selected Spectrograph on Install Selected Spectrograph The installed spectrograph will then appear in the pe eatea pecitooanh upper window In t
35. Info The information box should appear as shown in Figure 81 The first line reports the intensity and pixel number at the cursor position The second line reports the frame number strip number and the pixel number The intensity in A D counts is reported at the X and Y position corresponding to the cursor position If a region is defined by dragging the mouse cursor the region coordinates length and height will also be reported You may have to lengthen the Information box for all this information to appear spe 701 X 40x1 E3 Pixel 310 Intensity 540243 00 point 310 strip 28 frame 1 Figure 81 Graphical Display with Information box Note When you open the information box it becomes the active window To perform operations in the data display window such as changing the selected strip you must again make the data display window active by clicking the mouse cursor anywhere in the data box The data window title bar will become highlighted indicating that it is the active window and the cursor positioning functions will become operative again The data displayed in the information box will continue to be updated automatically 100 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Sp ayy a Single Strip Open the Display Layout dialog box by selecting Layout on the Display menu 2 On the General tab page with Auto Select unselected click on the Display Type Graph radio button and then on OK The single data curve for the strip on which the c
36. Instruction can be used with the External Sync timing mode The readout of ROI information is enhanced by the Vertical Skips feature With Version 5 of the ST 133 Controller continuous cleans for Kinetics is also supported All of these cleaning features and their interrelationships are described in the sections that follow Clean Cycles The basic cleaning function is implemented by clean cycles These cycles start when you turn the controller on and a clean pattern is programmed into the controller Their purpose is to remove charge that accumulates on the array while the camera not acquiring data i e exposing and reading out the array The timing diagram below is for an experiment set up to acquire three 3 spectra in Freerun timing mode with normal shutter operation selected In this diagram clean cycles occur before the first exposure and after the last readout period Note The start of the exposure is signaled by NOTSCAN going high but will not occur until the current clean cycle has finished Shutter Normal Open Close Open Close Open Close I l Il l i w NOTSCANS E AR L Read Read Read a l pR i l texp itor tR i l l l fi l l i Data Second Data Last Data First exposure stored exposure stored exposure stored Figure 109 Clean Cycles in Freerun Operation 119 120 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C The configuration of clean cycle
37. Mercury After these steps WinSpec 32 then tries to find the combination of Focal Length Inclusion Angle and Detector Angle that minimizes the error Note Some CCDs have very little response at 253 652 If this is the case for your detector it will be necessary to use a peak having a longer wavelength as the low value For mercury the 435 833 line should prove suitable 1 Click on the Dispersion button to open the Dispersion dialog box If you have never calculated the Dispersion before click on the Default button This provides standard values for Focal Length Inclusion Angle and Detector Angle based on the manufacturer s data for the active spectrograph If you have already run the Dispersion calculation before and it provided satisfactory values they will be displayed and should be used as your starting values Enter the Lower and Higher Reference Wavelengths For the mercury spectrum use 253 652 low and 579 066 high Again if your CCD doesn t have sufficient response to calibrate at 253 652 it will be necessary to use a different peak It isn t necessary to enter a Target Wavelength It will be calculated during the procedure Selected Grating 1200 Geometrics Focal Length mm fi 150 Load 49 32 e a Defaults Inclusion ngle Detector Angle Dispersion Calibration Lower Reference Wavelength 253 652 Higher Reference Wavelength 579 066 Next Target Wavelength 266 777
38. Min Max Message Displayed m Increment Type Fixed Width Increment o nsec Delay Increment 4 98594 nsec best Decay Glow Decay inne Leoristeri fi 4 usec z Time Constant jo z fusec 7 Amnpitude fp Amplitude fio View Width Delay Sequence le Setup File m On CCD Accumulations Software Accumulations Gates Per Exposure Repeat Width Delay for hz hz Exposure s Exponential Cancel Help Figure 168 Sequential Gating Setup box Sequential Mode If Sequential is selected the Sequential Gating Setup dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 168 In the Sequential Gating mode the Gate Width and Gate Delay do not remain constant but change either linearly Fixed or exponentially as the measurement progresses Fixed is suited to sweeping over a time interval to locate and recover an event that takes place at the same time with each iteration Exponential is well suited to fluorescence decay experiments where the effect under study changes rapidly at the start of an experiment and then slower and slower following a logarithmic curve as 180 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C the experiment progresses Refer to the online help for a detailed discussion of the Sequential Gating setup parameters In any case if the measurement is to be done in the sequential gating mode set the gating parameters as appropriate for your intended measurement and click on O
39. Program manager and start WinSpec 32 by clicking on WinSpec32 in the Roper Scientific folder see Figure 3 Note You can start WinSpec 32 even if you have not installed the interface card or if you have not turned on the controller If there is no interface card WinSpec 32 will run in Demo mode This mode allows you to look at and post process previously stored data such as the sample data installed with the software and to become familiar with experiment setup and data acquisition Some features will not be available because the program looks for information from the controller and camera while WinSpec 32 is loading and initializing Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 27 MStar 2 Exploring My Computer Figure 3 Opening WinSpec 32 from the Program Manager WinSpec 32 follows the Windows 95 graphical interface conventions While the software is booting a splash screen such as the one shown in Figure 4 is displayed until the software has finished loading and initializing Then the Main Menu appears as shown in Figure 5 From there you can access the program s functions through menu selection tid WinS pec 32 File Edit View Acquisition Calibration Tools Display Spectrograph Process Setup Window Help GORA sjel eie eee ejes a a For Help press F1 I I pe a ea ee Figure 4 Splash screen WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Title Bar leplar ef atla a si WinSpec 32 Logo i
40. ROI autoscaling on the region inside the ROI and zooming in to the ROI region plus three new actions Label Display which allows user labels to be placed on the display Erase Labels which removes ALL user labels from the display and Close ROI which erases the ROI with no other action it doesn t move the cursor The Label Display action brings up a dialog box and opens an Edit box Inside the ROI as shown in Figure 88 106 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Label Hg argon spe 1025 X 1 X 1 x Load Load File comment number E F Save Label in File comment number E Cancel l Remove existing labels Settings Help Figure 88 Label Display action The dialog box allows loading a previously saved label from one on the SPE file s 5 comment fields alternatively you can type the label into the edit box The label can be saved into a file s comment field when OK is clicked The source comment field and the destination comment field can be different Clicking Remove existing labels will erase all previous labels from the display before adding the current label The Settings button brings up a dialog box with options for the label itself 3 Figure 89 The Display Label Settings EET co zi dialog box allows you to change the color a Direction R OK of the label text to choose between an E a yates Conca opaque white background and a Background transparent background and choose I Re
41. Ready After a Start Acquisition command this output changes state on completion of the array cleaning cycles that precede the first exposure Initially high it goes low to mark the beginning of the first exposure In free run operation it remains low until the system is halted If a specific number of frames have been programmed it remains low until all have been taken then returns high Not Scan Reports when the controller is finished reading out the CCD array NOTSCAN is high when the CCD array is not being scanned then drops low when readout begins returning to high when the process is finished Shutter This signal is low when the shutter is closed and goes high when the shutter is activated dropping low again after the shutter closes In Gated operation SHUTTER is the correct choice and the signal should be applied to the inhibit input of the pulser to prevent pulsing during readout Shutter Comp Time Pre Delays the acquisition until the shutter if present is fully open The setting range is 0 to 30 ms For single strip spectroscopic measurements a setting of 0 is recommended RS170 Type Selections are NTSC US video standard and PAL European Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 37 User Defined Chip Advanced feature See Custom Chip discussion on page 193 User Defined Timing Advanced feature See Custom Timing discussion on page 194 Anti Blooming THM 1024x1024FT CCD array Checking this box activates this CCD
42. Repos tion arget Instructions Click Start Procedure to move Lower Reference avelength to Left of View Area Messages A OK Cancel Help Figure 71 Dispersion dialog box Chapter 7 Spectrograph Calibration 91 Note In the following steps four data sets will be taken each initiated by you The Start Procedure button initiates the first and the same button named Continue once the first data set has been taken is used to initiate each of the other three After each data set is taken you have the option of adjusting the cursor position on the peak However as previously explained this will not be required or advisable in most instances See the Peak Finder discussion in the Calibration Offset procedure The data sets are taken in the following order 1 Low peak 253 652 at the left of the display 2 Low peak 253 652 at the right of the display 3 High peak 579 066 at the left of the display 4 High peak 579 066 at the right of the display 3 Click on the Start Procedure button e WinSpec 32 will acquire the first data set and display it It will also calculate the Target Wavelength so that the Lower Reference Wavelength peak appears near the left edge of the display The Target Wavelength is the wavelength the spectrograph must move to in order for the reference wavelength to be properly located near the edge of the display e Ifthe peak is outside the display you should enter a Tar
43. Sequential Gating Setup DOX essesesesessssressesressesrrssesrisseesessrestesresesressessee 179 Camera State dialog DOK vesi oen serieen ieran anar tiare et peoi een ei 180 Table of Contents Tables Figure 170 Figure 171 Figure 172 Figure 173 Figure 174 Figure 175 Figure 176 Figure 177 Figure 178 Figure 179 Figure 180 Figure 181 Figure 182 Figure 183 Figure 184 Figure 185 Figure 186 Figure 187 Figure 188 Figure 185 Figure 186 Figure 187 DG535 dialog DOK 245 wet ee eane eet aed eee nae nt eee 180 DG535 Comm Port tab page 0 0 ce eeeceseceseceseceseceseeeeeeesneeeneeeseeesaeenaeenaees 181 DG535 Triggers tab page 2c sen cene rien ieee heat eee ae ees 181 DG535 Gating tab page visti ces diein eeta i i eatet tecnica 182 Repetitive Gating Setup i 6 dicu esa een silane ied weet 182 Sequential Gating Setup dialog DOX 2 eee ee eeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeeaeeeneeeaeeenaee 183 Range Limits Exceeded Warning ces ceesceseceseceseceeeceeeeeeneeeneeeneeenaeenaees 184 Gate Width Delay Sequence dialog bOX 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeneeenaees 186 Sequence Values File dialog DOX eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeenaeenaees 186 Timing Generator Interactive Trigger Setup ce ceseeseceseceseeeteeeeseees 187 Default Custom Toolbar is su coisssitestesrcs ete eecn eipieest shite aitan e 189 Customize Toolbar dialog bOX 0 0 eee eeseesseceseceseceseceseeeseeeseeeeneeeneesaaesnaees 189 Custom Ch
44. This will close the Experiment Setup dialog box Data Collection WARNING Acquisition Calibration Toc Experiment Setup The following data collection procedure works for all controllers YT Setup e An underlying assumption is that a suitable light source is Acquire available Although fluorescent room lighting may be adequate it Focus will probably prove more instructive to use a standard lamp such a pee as a mercury argon lamp that provided the spectrum illustrated in aces en Figure 39 Easy Bin Step and Glue Intensified Cameras If working with an intensified Resuaut Tine camera the room light should be subdued Intensified cameras Acquire Background a are quite susceptible to damage from light overload in Shutter Acquire Flat Field mode operation and particularly subject to damage from light overload in gated operation with high intensity pulsed light sources See your manual for detailed information Video Figure 38 Acquisition menu 1 Ifrunning a PI MAX system turn the room light down or off and switch the Camera State to Shutter mode on the Acquisition Experiment Setup Main tab page 2 Select Focus from the Acquisition menu Figure 38 to begin collecting data An acquisition can also be started by clicking on the Focus button in the Experiment Setup dialog box or by clicking on the Focus button on the Custom Toolbar Data will be continuously acquired and displayed 3 While observi
45. View Width Delay Sequence IV Save Sequence Values To File Setup File Software Accumulations ean al Not supported with full speed sync data collection Cancel Help Figure 162 Sequential Gating Setup dialog box 1 Click on the Gating tab 2 Select Gating Mode HV Pulsing Enabled to start gating the intensifier Be sure you have followed all intensifier precautions stated in the hardware manuals before making this selection 3 Click the Apply Changed Settings button This writes all changed parameters to the PG200 It may take several seconds depending on the number of parameters that have been changed To set all of the parameters click on the Apply All Settings button 4 Click on OK to close the dialog box Chapter 18 Pulser Operation 177 Programmable Timing Generator PTG Unlike the PG200 and the DG535 the PTG is not a free standing instrument but rather a plug in module designed for installation in a special version of the ST 133 Controller This novel and highly integrated approach to timing generator design with its advanced high speed electronics low insertion delay and programmable functions achieves superior performance as the ultimate gate controller for the PI MAX Intensified Camera Basic PTG operation is reviewed in the following procedure The individual tab page selections are discussed in detail in the online Help topics Note The gate functions of the PI MAX camera
46. WinSpec still open you then open the FITS exe program by opening it at its directory location or by opening it from the Execute Macro dialog box if the Macro option has been installed When you click on Run Experiment on the FITS dialog box the experiment will begin At completion of the experiment the data will be displayed in WinSpec and a FITS file will automatically be generated and saved Note When this option is installed the FITS exe file is placed in the same directory as the Winspec exe file Chapter 20 Software Options 195 ig WinX 32 FITS File Converter OL xi re FITS Header Format Standard OoOO O C Custom Run Experiment Display FITS File Primary Data Wink 32 Data Convert SPE File s Save Header to File Keyword Value Comment Value Type None g Add Pimern Data Ada Wires 22 Date Add FITS File Header Figure 184 FITS dialog box Macro Record WXmacrec opt Macro Record is a convenient method to automate routines and repetitive data acquisition and analysis tasks A macro is created automatically whenever a sequence of operations is performed in WinSpec The recorded macro generates a VBScript file that can be edited to provide maximum flexibility For more information refer to the WinSpec 32 online help and the PDF of the WinX32 Programming for Macro Record manual provided as part of the option package Typically the manual is stored in the WinSpec32 Doc
47. Zoom Ih eee eeeeeneeeeeeeees 98 ZOOM Me iee EE E eaS 98 Data displayed as image autoranging ROI seee 113 axes and Cross sections 0 0 eeeeeeeeeee 112 axes labente en irea iae 114 brightness osiris oani 109 color of axes and labels 0 00000000000 114 context WINdOW ssesseeseeeeerseeeeeeseseesee 104 CULSOF FUNCTIONS 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 100 Display Layout dialog box 0 112 Display Layout Range tab page 115 Information DOX eceeeeeeesteeeeteeeeeees 113 ROL aa anata adenteye 111 Data file compatibility ee 69 Data File tab page 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeees 73 Version 2 5 C Data files CIOSING ses AE thes 73 file window control box 73 closing via Close All Window menu 73 closing via Control menu 73 closing via Ctrl F4 keys oe 73 closing via file Menu ee 73 delen Enmen Shia seve tie 74 via File Menu 0 eee eeeeeeee eters 74 deleting multiple files eee 74 ICOMIZIN Siina i aeei 73 Ope giere err o an E i 69 reducing tO ICOM ee eee eee eeeteees 73 DAVE ea alae el 72 Save All o sccccscsi tegsks tusctasd scene deedecssas 72 DAVE AS assist a ene asa Siete ss 72 SAVING sercisociesscc avesatgeeldssauastessavoneaghests 72 Data files temporary saving e e 72 Data starts sist riiseni seniai 222 Data structure Ver 143 nriran naai 213 Ver 1 6 and 32 bit versions 214 Data Type Save AS 72 Data Window Context menu
48. and blooming spilling charge into adjacent pixels If you want to use hardware binning you define the binning parameters on the Experiment Setup ROI tab page These settings will be used for acquiring data until you change the ROI size or the amount of binning Note If you have a PCI card and your controller is other than a MicroMAX or PentaMAX you must ensure that the number of pixels to be read out is always an even number A warning will appear if this is not the case If you are doing binning the number of pixels digitized after hardware binning is complete must be an even number Chapter 10 ROI Definition amp Binning 125 Software Binning If blooming is an issue you can use software binning instead of hardware binning Software binning is activated by checking Use Software Binning on the ROI Setup tab page While software binning will prevent saturation of the CCD chip shift register pixels it is not as fast as hardware binning Note The binning that is set up on the ROI Setup tab page occurs while data is being acquired You can also perform post acquisition binning on previously acquired data For more information see Binning and Skipping page 166 Spectroscopy Mode X axis binning can be used in spectroscopy mode to improve the signal to noise ratio However in many instances a longer exposure time higher light level or use of an intensified system may prove to be better ways of improving the signal to noi
49. and or WinView 32 can be installed on the same computer without conflicts you should not run more than one version at any one time The manner in which Roper Scientific software allocates memory for data collection precludes collecting data using two software packages at once It is also possible to install both 16 bit and 32 bit versions of the software in the same computer However keep in mind that WinSpec 32 will not operate under Windows 3 1 or 3 11 Similarly the device drivers for the 16 bit version of WinSpec will not function properly under Win 95 or NT PIHWDEF INI amp SESSION DAT WinSpec 16 and PIHWDEF INI The hardware initialization file PIHWDEF INI is included with 76 bit versions of WinSpec software The file contains all of the hardware settings necessary to get started and is read the first time WinSpec is executed At the end of the first operating session the settings in effect are written to SESSION DAT which is read the next time WinSpec software is operated so that the new session will begin with the same settings that were in effect at the end of the previous one WinSpec 32 and the Windows Registry WinSpec 32 doesn t need PIHWDEF INI or SESSION DAT because it automatically stores the settings in the registry at the end of each operating session However WinSpec 32 will read the WinSpec 16 PIHWDEF INI or SESSION DAT if they are copied to the directory containing the WinSpec 32 software This allows users wh
50. array s anti blooming feature Load Defaults From Controller Pops up the Load Factory Defaults From NVRAM dialog box so you can repopulate the fields and selections with the values stored in the controller s non volatile RAM 38 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Entering the Data Orientation Hardware Setup T133 bs i Hardware Setup 1121 Figure 16 Display tab page left graphic applies to all controllers except ST 121 right graphic applies to ST 121 only With the exception of the ST 121 the Display tab page is the same for all controllers Three display options Rotate Reverse and Flip are provided This feature allows you to compensate for CCD array or camera orientation Before and after thumbnail illustrations show the effect of each selection If no option is selected the thumbnails will be the same Any orientation can be achieved with the proper combination of Rotate Reverse and Flip In the case of the ST 121 only Reverse is provided Rotate Rotates the image 90 counterclockwise Reverse Reverses the image horizontally Flip Flips the image vertically Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 39 Entering the Interface Communication Parameters The Interface tab page allows you to specify LECZEENTE SS the interface card installed in your computer S ttolev200 _ DisslayIneface Ceans Skps and to enter the I O addresses if required This functionality is particularly useful if you ard Num
51. as hardware binning Cancel button Exits a dialog box without performing any processing Any changes to the dialog are lost Close button Closes the dialog box or window with no action taken Dark current 1 The charge accumulated within a well in the absence of light 2 The background current that flows in a charge coupled device or image intensifier of a camera system Cooling the photodetector s primary imaging surface i e the CCD s photoconductor or the image intensifier s photocathode can reduce or eliminate dark current Also called thermally generated charge Dark current can be subtracted from an image Gating In an intensified detector system the application of a voltage that switches the image intensifier on and off in very short intervals Gating improves temporal resolution Gating can be controlled by the programmed exposure time Shutter Mode or is determined by the Pulser settings Gate Mode Help button Opens the context sensitive help for the active tab page or dialog box Host computer The primary or controlling computer for a detector Mouse button Allows you to specify a region to be processed using the mouse Simply drag a box in the data region of the active window and then click on Mouse The Frame and Range parameters will assume the values of the defined region Note that the Mouse button is only active when the Input tab page is selected MPP Multi pinned phase operation A mode that reduces the r
52. begin In time critical experiments the number of rows per clean set on the Hardware Setup Controller Camera tab page should be 1 or 2 to minimize the delay 122 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Continuous Cleans Instruction If the controller and the detector support it a specialized cleaning function can be used when SitoleGamers Disses Interface Cleans Skips continuous cleans is active This function Continuous Cleans Instruction can only be Cleans activated if the checkbox for it is visible on the z 5 Number of Cleans fo Hardware Setup Cleans Skips tab page see Figure 11 4 Number of Strips per Clean 40 Clean Mode Continuous cleans instruction does horizontal Clear Pre Exposure 7 shifts while doing vertical shifts for a faster T Use Continuous Cleans Instruction continuous clean With this instruction the me S r Vertical Skips delay between an External Sync trigger and C e the start of exposure is minimized Number of Blocks 288 i m Continuous cleans instruction will be used in place of the standard continuous cleans if both Use Continuous Cleans Instruction on the Cleans Skips tab page and Continuous Cleans on the Experiment e Lee Le Setup Timing tab page are checked Figure 114 Cleans Skips tab page Continuous Cleans Instruction ROIs and Cleaning An ROL is a user defined subsection of the array As with full frames the defined clean cycles are used to keep char
53. box At this point you will need to run the RSConfig exe program 1 If you have not already done so close WinSpec 32 2 Make sure the ST 133A is connected to the host computer and that it is turned on 3 Run RSConfig from the Windows Start Programs Roper Scientific menu or from the directory where you installed WinSpec 4 When the RSConfig dialog box Figure 197 appears you can change the camera name to one that is more specific or you can keep the default name Camera2 When you have finished click on the Done button You will next edit the generated PVCAM_INI file 238 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C RSContfig 2 6 x r Names Style Camera 1 Camerat Princeton Style Camera 2 Camera2 Princeton Style USB2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Camera 8 Figure 200 RSConfig dialog box Two Camera Styles 5 Using Notepad or a similar text editor open PVCAM INI which is located in the Windows directory C WINNT for example If the contents of the file look like Change the headings so the contents now look like Camera_1 gt Camera_2 Type 1 Name Cameral Driver rspipci sys Type 1 Name Cameral Driver rspipci sys Port 0 Port 0 Camera_2 _ gt Camera_1 Type 1 Type 1 Name Camera2 Name Camera2 Driver apausb sys Driver apausb sys Port 0 Port 0 Note The Camera_ must be changed so the camera supported by the US
54. can enhance edges sharpen or smooth features or erode or dilate an image How these images are processed is briefly described below Input Filter Matrix Output Cell Information Row a Column E Value fo l Filter Size 5 5 ilter Sum 7 5 A mask is an n x n matrix n is 5 7 9 or Figure 145 Filter Matrix tab page 11 that is placed over every n x n subsection of the image Each parameter in the mask is multiplied by the corresponding value of the image The results are summed and placed in the central position in the output file Users can specify the Filter Size 5x5 7x7 9x9 or 11x11 The Filter Sum is displayed in the adjacent box The Load Defaults button sets the matrix parameters to their factory default values When you click on this button you will see a warning message Will erase Data for ALL Filter Sizes Continue with Yes No Yes will erase ALL filter data before loading the factory default values Custom Filter Procedure Use the following procedure to apply a custom filter to an image 1 Select Custom Filter from the Process menu 2 Enter the Input Image and Output Image names 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed 4 If you want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and cli
55. considerations for intensified cameras are more complex than for unintensified cameras Again read your manual Temperature Control Before continuing the array temperature should be set to some easily achieved value in the operating range and Temperature lock should be established The way this is done depends on the controller Temperature Control for a system using an ST 133 or a MicroMAX 1 Open the WinSpec 32 Setup menu and click Detector Temperature x on Detector Temperature This will cause f the Temperature dialog box to appear as eee shown in Figure 30 Current Temperature Locked Read Temp 2 Set the Target Temperature to the desired value 0 suggested for initial data _oK _Lancel He acquisition 3 Click on the Set Temp button When the Current Temperature Unlocked message changes to Current Temperature Locked temperature lock will have been established Note Both the MicroMAX and the ST 133 additionally have a Temp Lock LED on the Analog Control module at the rear of the controller that visually indicates when temperature lock occurs Figure 30 Temperature dialog box Temperature Control for Other Systems ST 121 ST 130 or ST 138 Controller Change the dial setting on the front panel of the Controller PentaMax Set the temperature on the front panel of the Temperature Power Supply unit MicroView Not user settable Temperature is solely under software control Cleans and
56. data on which the operation is to be performed 4 Ifyou want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values 5 Load the LUT LUT files must be of the type TXT The file name can be entered directly or selected by using the browser clicking on the button at the end of the field opens the browser 6 Click on the Create Binary LUT button to convert the text LUT to binary 7 Click on Apply to begin convert the input data values to the output values specified per the LUT 160 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Look Up Table Formats The contents of a look up table text file are entered using an ASCII text editor and the file is saved with a TXT extension The format used within the file depends on the type of remapping one to one remapping of intensity levels or a user defined selection of input to output values Format 1 This format is for a one to one mapping of intensity levels Imin and Imax the minimum and maximum input levels inclusive are supplied in the first line with a comma delimiter The subsequent values are supplied one output value per line The mapping assumes that all of the input intensities in the specified range are represented by an output value Therefore the number of output values in the text file must cover the range imax Imi
57. determine the best one 6 To set a specialized 3 x 3 mask select User Defined and change the Kernal parameters to their new values 7 Click on Apply to begin processing 156 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Morphological Functions Parameters tab page Morphological operations are also accomplished by Input Parameters Output mask operations in this case parameters entered on the Morphological Parameters tab page There are Mask Type Mark Operation two basic morphological mask operations Erode and C User defined Erode C Dilate Dilate The effect of the Erode process is to reduce Block Open the size of a white region while Dilation increases it b ee The number of iterations is user settable All the o dagonal Iterations options except for Block and User Defined perform C diagonal the operation in a specific direction only Block ae performs the operation in all directions Two other E nmn mo choices are Open and Close Open is simply a a number of erodes specified by Iterations followed a by the same number of dilates Close performs the dilates first and then the erodes Examples of some morphological operations follow me aw s e References are found at the end of this chapter In each case the same binary image is shown to the left and the morphologically processed image is shown to the right Qi L R Figure 142 Original Image left and Dilated Image right Re Figure 143 Orig
58. eee Eee a ARa ede e ara a E a E EA 17 Tool Tips and Status Bar Messages eeeseeeessseseeerssrseresresresressesrrsserrrestesresseereeseeseeste 18 Additional Documentation cei eeen ein EE EE EE e E a aE 18 Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 sssssnnsennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 19 System R q irementS sarrera i e E A T N T ia 19 Your System Components soir an a Ra a ia a eedaedee 20 Installing WinSpec 3 2n ii E a T E vain T 22 Installing the PCI Card Drivere ccnnnrinnncnniinrsni nena a a aa 24 Installing the USB 2 0 Card Driver cece cee ccecceseesseeeseesseeeseeseeeeeaeeeseeeaaecaaecaesnaeeaeen 25 Changing Installed Components Repairing or Uninstalling Reinstalling WinSpec 32 26 Starting WinSpec 32 sw Leeds cee aiii iieii a ii catenin i iii 26 Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setul ssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 29 Initroductions paeen t a ie tee ete eerie Gees bee dente pe ate ae 29 Basic Hardware OVerview v2 03 stessesitecni snide eee eee tenets 29 Hardware Setup Wizard asome oresonn ene ssueee ses pace seystons oor sh eat NAE sdone eres Reet ieess 31 Entering Controller and Detector Characteristics escesceessecssecssecesecessecsseesseeeseenseeees 34 Entering the Data Orientation cele eeceseeseeeseeeseeeeseseneesaeesseeeneecaaecaaecaecaeesaeenseeees 38 Entering the Interface Communication Parameters cc eseeseeseecseceseceseceseeeeecnseenaeens 39 Enteri
59. eee eee eeeereeee 72 Saving temporary data files 72 SCAN signalisieren 36 Screen capture printing 172 SESSION DAT eee eeeerseeeceeneeseeenees 231 Setup CUSLOMD A EEEE ETETE 22 Standard PCT sa taie ii 22 Setup Program eee eee eee eeeeeeeseeneees 22 Sharpening p ram terS ioni a attests seacenteteanes 154 PLOCedUre sisiceach eal 154 SHUTTER signal sesser 36 Shutter typer einne a terete 35 Smoothing p rameterS ssnin ne s 155 PrOCEdUTE i053 cists seed oniro 155 Sobel edge detection eee 153 Software Accumulations 0 0 0 0 eee 186 Spectra Math wo ee eeeeseeseeeneeeees 135 253 Spectrograph ACUIVE Bice isy naa ea ei ts 46 Cables iis ailing deelist n na eid ees 84 COM port designation ee 45 Communications parameters 45 grating change warning ee 47 Grating selection and moving 47 grating setup and selection 46 installation procedure eee 43 magnification parameter 85 OVELVICW oes seusseccetessets odsd destetans i 53 slit and port selections eee 48 Spectrograph calibration Linear Adjust eeseeeseeeneeeeneeeeaee 89 Adjust procedure eee eeeeeeeeees 88 Auto Spectro method 44 75 84 146 detector pixel width parameter 85 dispersion pees cstesscienstecepeti Sestesea os 90 dispersion data Sets ee eeeeeeeeees 91 increasing error oo eee eee eee eeeeeeeeteees 84 introduction tO eee eee eee eseeteeeeeees
60. file could then be copied to a graphics editing program for further processing and then printed Chapter 18 Pulser Operation Introduction Three different pulser timing generators are CT 8 Ssi i I available for use with WinSpec 32 To be TAE available pulser support must have been installed C PG200 as described in the Installation chapter Pulser C DG535 support is then accessed by selecting Pulsers on Bie _SeupPT _ the Setup menu and then selecting the pulser to be used with the system Available selections include the Princeton Instruments brand PG200 Pulser the Princeton Instruments brand Programmable Timing Generator PTG plug in oa module for the ST 133 high power ver 3 and the Stanford Research Systems DG535 Digital Figure 157 Pulsers dialog box Delay Pulse Generator with Inhibit Option The Model PG200 is available for all Princeton Instruments intensified detectors except the PI MAX Intensified CCD Camera which requires the PTG or DG535 All three pulser timing generators are programmable from WinSpec 32 Consult the applicable hardware manuals for detailed instructions on setup and connection to other devices PG200 Programmable Pulse Generator The PG200 is programmed via one of the serial ports of the computer such as COM1 or COM2 The choices provided by the tab pages are the same ones that are available using the PG200 front panel Basic PG200 operation is reviewed in the following procedure
61. filename has been specified click on the OK button This saves the flatfield filename for all future data acquisitions or until the Flatfield correction is turned off Each pixel in a new file will be divided by the corresponding pixel in the Flatfield file If both Flatfield and Background are selected the background will be subtracted first before the flatfield correction 134 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C CCD Blemishes Columns specified as bad in the blemish file will be replaced by interpolated data based on the column before and the column after the bad column as data is collected After you click on the Remove checkbox you can select the appropriate blemish file Clicking on the button at the right of the Blemish File Name field opens a browse dialog box so you can locate and select a file If you don t have a blemish file but have determined that there are one or more bad columns you can create one to be used Note CCD Blemishes removal may not be implemented in early releases of the software Creating a Blemish File 1 Open an ASCII text editor CCD Blemish ble Notepad loj x File Edit Format Hel 2 On the first line key in the ee number of columns on the CCD For example you would key in 1024 if the CCD format was 1024 x256 Press Enter 1024 a 4 For each CCD column enter either a 0 no blemish or a 1 blemish and press Enter If there was only one blemish and it was in co
62. focusing gain or other adjustments necessary to fine tune the image Stop running in Focus mode Now click on Acquire 200 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Experimental Timing Triggering can be achieved through the software via the Software Trigger timing mode selectable on the Experiment Setup dialog box Timing Mode tab page or it can be achieved via the Ext Sync input on the rear of the camera Triggering from the Ext Syne input allows you to acquire a single image per TTL pulse If Software Trigger has been selected back to back collection of the requested number of images will be initiated when Acquire is selected no further TTL trigger input is required Tips If mechanical masking is used the mask can be a static one fixed dimensions in which case multiple masks should be made to accommodate a variety of imaging conditions Alternatively a more flexible mask can be manufactured by taking two thin metal sheets with a square hole the size of the exposed region of the CCD cut in the center This would be 512 x 512 pixels at 15 microns per pixel 7 68 mm x mm for the MicroMAX These masks should be anodized black to prevent reflections in the optical system and they should be very flat These two sheets can then be slid relative to one another to achieve any rectangular shape required The sheets should be placed flat in the optical plane and their openings should be centered on the optical axis Ideally they should be able
63. interest ROD so that data is only collected from the specified portion of the CCD array It also describes binning the summing together of charge from several pixels on the array or in software during data acquisition Simple or more advanced binning options can be configured easily with WinSpec 32 Correction Techniques explains correction options such as background subtraction and flatfield correction Spectra Math covers WinSpec 32 s mathematical processing features Y T Analysis provides an overview of how to use the Y T analysis function to track changes in a process with time Gluing Spectra discusses gluing existing files or combining the data acquisition and gluing operations under spectrograph control Post Acquisition Mask Processes describes digital mask operations that can be performed on the acquired data Discussed are Edge Enhancement Sharpening Smoothing Custom Filter and Morphological functions Additional Post Acquisition Processes describes additional operations that can be performed on an acquired data set Functions covered include Threshold and Clipping Cross Section Binning and Skipping and Histogram Printing describes printing features of WinSpec 32 WinSpec 32 can print directly to almost any Windows printer driver Introduction Chapter 18 Chapter 19 Chapter 20 17 Pulser Operation describes the operation of the Pulsers that can be used with WinSpec 32 Custom Toolbar Settings de
64. into account and the final delay value might typically be set to a value on the order of five times the anticipated decay time of the process Amplitude This is the relative amplitude of the fast decay with respect to the slow one For example if you know that the amplitude of the fast decay signal is typically five times the amplitude of the slow decay signal you could enter 5 for the fast decay amplitude and 1 for the slow decay amplitude Keep in mind that it is the ratio that is being expressed For example there is no difference between entering fast and slow amplitude values of 5 and 1 and entering fast and slow amplitude values of 50 and 10 Note that the default values will give satisfactory results in many measurements Slow Decay Time Constant In a two species system enter the decay time of the slower of the two species Note that it is not essential that you enter a value If you have the decay time information you will get better data if the information is entered but acceptable results can be obtained in many situations by using the default If there is only one species or if you want to discard the fast decay process simply enter zero for the fast decay Amplitude Amplitude This is the relative amplitude of the slow decay with respect to the fast one For example if you know that the amplitude of the slow decay signal is typically one fifth the amplitude of the fast decay signal you cou
65. lamp The calibration of the spectrograph for a fixed position is called Wavelength Calibration and is described in this chapter Changing the Calibration Method 1 Select Usage from the Calibration menu The dialog in Figure 58 will be displayed p Calibration Made p Calibration Units i A Auto Spectr Axis 2 Select the desired method of calibration ie pen C Manual e Auto Spectro selects Spectrograph v mast Ele Calibration as described in Chapter 7 A spectrograph supported by WinSpec 32 must be installed for this selection to be available Figure 58 Calibration Usage dialog box e Manual applies the wavelength calibration to the active data The calibration is performed using the Default Calibration Setup dialog box accessed by selecting Setup on the Calibration menu e Off selects uncalibrated operation 75 76 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C 3 Select the desired X Axis units This option is only available if the data set is calibrated If relative wave numbers are selected it will additionally be necessary to enter the wavelength of the laser line 4 Click on OK See the discussion of the Calibration Usage dialog box in the online Help for details concerning the Calibration Usage dialog box selections Calibration Menu The Calibration menu which can be called by clicking on Calibration Toc Calibration in the menu bar is shown in Figure 59 The Setup Calibration menu contains two items Setu
66. nesretna enea saiora eaae aa emer ess 126 Single Partial width ROL sseseseseseeesesressssreesrsressesrrssrerrssresrrsresressresresrese 126 Multiple Full width ROIs cesecesecssecsseceseeeseeeeaeeeaeeesaeeaaeesaeeeneeenaes 126 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145 Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 Figure 159 Figure 160 Figure 161 Figure 162 Figure 163 Figure 164 Figure 165 Figure 166 Figure 167 Figure 168 Figure 169 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Spectroscopy Mode Multiple Partial width ROIs eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 126 Imaging Mode Multiple ROIs with Different Widths eee 126 Multiple Imaging ROIs and Resulting Data eee eseeseeeneceeenaees 127 Easy Bin dialog bOX 2 224 inthe ete de dite dh tet ciel 128 ROI Setup tab page Spectroscopy Mode eee eeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeenseeeneeenees 129 ROI Setup tab page Imaging Mode 0 0 eeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeneeenaes 130 Data Corrections tab page iis srdce enee nt ose teed iieri ai 132 Blemish Pile yc ciccessevec costs eects ttre e
67. on the highest point Figure 67 shows three possible peaks and illustrates the action of the peak finder in each case Chapter 7 Spectrograph Calibration 87 Figure 67 Peak Finder Examples Peak A is perfectly symmetrical As you would expect dividing it into two equal areas and locating the cursor at the intersection of the divider with the peak will put the cursor precisely at the highest point Peak B on the other hand is not symmetrical but rather extends further to the right than to the left As a result the final cursor position is a little to the right of the highest point This is the correct peak location Any attempt to improve it by manually moving the cursor to precisely the highest point will degrade the offset computation Note that moving the cursor immediately changes the reported Error Do not assume that this means the cursor wasn t optimally located Rather it indicates a possible optical problem and the spectrograph may need to be realigned Peak C is like peak A but is accompanied by a number of noise spikes The peak finder is quite sensitive and might well select one of these spikes as the real peak and incorrectly place the cursor on the noise spike as shown in C If this happens the correct action would be to manually adjust the cursor position to the right so that it is on the true peak before going on Doublets are also a problem At any stage of the calibration procedure the peak finder might find the wr
68. on the host computer At bootup Windows will detect the Roper Scientific USB2 Interface hardware i e the USB 2 0 Interface Control module You may be prompted to enter the directory path s for the apausbprop dll and or the apausb sys file s either by keyboard entry or by using the browse function If you selected AUTO PCI during the application software installation WinSpec automatically put the required INF DLL and USB driver file in the Windows directories shown below Refer to the Table 2 below for the file locations Windows USB INF USB Properties DLL USB Device Driver Name Version Filename Located in Located in Located in Windows System32_ Windows System32 Drivers Windows INF directory directory directory Windows rsusb2k inf in apausbprop dll in apausb sys in 2000 and XP WINNT INF WINNT System32 for WINNT System32 Drivers for for example example example The INF directory may be hidden Table 2 USB Driver Files and Locations After the drivers have been installed you will need to create a PVCAM INI file This step is required because cameras using the USB 2 0 interface are considered PVCAM cameras 1 Make sure the ST 133A is connected to the host computer and that it is turned on 2 Run RSConfig from the Windows Start Programs Roper Scientific menu or from the directory where you installed WinSpec 3 When the RSConfig dialog box Figure 1 appears you can ch
69. operating mode This approach will give you operating experience and familiarity that will prove very valuable when you go to make more complex measurements For additional information about the various menus and dialog boxes refer to the online Help topics Underlying assumptions for the following procedure are that the hardware has been installed per the instructions in the hardware manual s and that the hardware setup as discussed in Chapter 2 has been completed A further assumption is that a good imaging subject is available Often a picture or optical target mounted on a wall or lab bench will give good results If initial data collection is to be done using a microscope be sure to read the chapter on microscopy in your system manual before attempting data collection There are two data collection modes Focus and Acquire e InFocus mode operation no frames of data are stored until Start Storage is selected This mode is particularly convenient for familiarization and setting up For ease in focusing the screen refresh rate should be as rapid as possible achieved by operating with axes and cross sections off and with Zoom 1 1 selected e In Acquire mode every frame of data collected is stored This mode would ordinarily be selected during actual data collection One limitation of Acquire mode operation is that if data acquisition continues at too fast a rate for it to be stored data overflow will eventually occur This could only ha
70. output image if the output data type is selected as integer If data to be binned will exceed 32 000 counts select Unint or Long e The maximum binning and skipping size is the size of the input image When the maximum is reached to increase the binning size you must first decrease the skipping size then increase the binning size 168 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Histogram Calculation Introduction Two types of histograms are available for graphing the distribution of intensities of an image The Histogram operation groups pixels of a similar intensity together The X axis indicates the intensity and the Y axis displays the number of pixels in that intensity range The Cumulative Histogram operation groups pixels of a similar intensity together once again using the X axis to show intensity This time however the Y axis indicates the total number of pixels with intensity less than or equal to the range Thus the Cumulative Histogram is always an increasing function Histogram X Procedure 1 Select Histogram from the Process menu Input Parameters Output 2 On the Input tab page if the correct input Operation image does not appear in the Input Image box enter the complete file name or search for a file using the browser accessed by the button Cumulative Histogram to the right of the field Values i 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame 7 i containing the data on which the operation is L
71. tab pages are described below The Parameters tab pages are described in the appropriate sections Edge Enhancement xi Geese x Input Parameters Output Input Parameters Output Input Image Output Image Moond spe H DOO B D Wink Data Files IV Display Result Frame mo er F4 wf 4 1to1 L xRane ETARA S m aere a Ta f Rane w GE i La Datatype UINT16 YP Datatype FLOAT 7 Apply Close Help Mouse Apply Close Help Figure 134 Input tab page Figure 135 Output tab page Input tab page The Input tab page Figure 134 selects the data to be operated on You can specify the data file the frames within the file and the X and Y range on the CCD The input data type is reported Note that the Mouse button at the bottom of the window allows you to use the mouse to specify the region to be processed Simply drag a box in the data region of the active window and then click on Mouse The Frame and Range parameters will assume the values of the defined region The Mouse button is only active when the Input tab page is selected Output tab page The Output tab page Figure 135 allows you to name the output file It additionally allows you to select whether the modified data is to be displayed and to select the data type The frame and X Y range are reported information only 151 152 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Edge Enhancement Parameters
72. the B tab page If you want to process only part of the input images change the Frame X Range and Y Range values on the A tab page and also on the B tab page if two files are involved Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values Enter the name of the output file on the C tab page If you want to restrict the output data range change the Frame X Range and Y Range values as appropriate Select the output file datatype If you want the output file to be displayed as soon as the processing is complete check the Display Result box Click on OK to begin processing or Cancel to cancel the operation 140 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C This page intentionally left blank Chapter 13 Y T Analysis Introduction Y T Analysis allows you to easily monitor and study the way spectral data changes as a function of time This is particularly useful in characterizing time dependent processes Y T Analysis provides for defining areas on the data where each area is a region bounded by a starting and ending wavelength and containing a certain number of pixels whose wavelength values lie within the region The value of an area is the sum of the intensities of the pixels in the area If a process study produces spectral lines that change with time it may be useful to define a separate area for each line of interest where each line is precisel
73. the grating The nm pixel can be approximated by picking the difference in the location of the two peaks while in pixel mode and dividing the difference reported in calibration units in the calibration mode Note The absolute value of the peak is reported in the Info box If it is not already open open it by selecting Info on the View menu 90 Dispersion WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Press Continue to initiate another Adjust computation cycle The reported error should decrease Repeat the cycle two or three times until no further reduction in the error can be achieved The final error value achieved may wander a bit with each cycle repetition reflecting the noise content of the spectrum Click OK to close the Adjust dialog box and return you to the Spectrograph Calibrate dialog box Now that Offset and Adjust are complete the spectrograph can move a target peak very close to the center of the display The final step is to calibrate the wavelength scaling so that peaks on the far left or the far right in the window are also accurately calibrated This is called the Dispersion calculation and again it is automated in WinSpec 32 To adjust the Dispersion calculation you will make two measurements in the lower spectral range 253 652 for Mercury one measurement with the peak at the left edge of the display and one with the peak at the right edge Then you will make two measurements in the upper spectral range 579 066 for
74. the name of the Output file on the Output tab page In later editions of the software it will additionally be possible to specify an output frame and data range 8 Click on Apply to begin processing Binning and Skipping Introduction Selecting Binning on the Process menu opens the Binning and Skipping window which allows binning to be accomplished in software after the data has been collected The Parameters tab page allows the bin size to be set independently in the X and Y directions The Skipping parameter allows you to define the interval between binned regions The Skipping parameter size can be independently set for X and Y There is also provision for either averaging or summing the binned data points If Average is selected each output data value will be the average of the binned data values in each region If Average is unselected each output data value will be the sum of the binned data values The procedure follows Procedure Binning and Skipping x Input Parameters l Output Binning x Dimension Y Dimension F Average Skipping x Dimension Y Dimension al Mouse Apply Close Help Figure 152 Postprocessing Binning and Skipping Parameters tab page 1 Select Binning and Skipping from the Process menu 2 On the Input tab page if the correct input image does not appear in the Input Image box enter the complete file name or search for a file using t
75. three Laplacian masks on the Edge Enhancement dialog box operate just as described above Since the sum of the mask coefficients of the Laplacians sum to zero the result of a Laplacian operation on a region of uniform density is zero Boundary features are enhanced by varying degrees Sobel Edge Detection The Sobel edge detection method is more involved but produces greatly enhanced features Number the squares of the subregion of the image as follows Ag Ay Ag A7 A3 As A A The replacement for the center cell called R is R X2 Y3 where X A 2A3 Ay Ag 2A7 Ag Y Ap 2A Ad Ag 2A5 Ay Figure 137 illustrates the effect of edge detection on an image k Figure 137 Original Image left and Edge detected Image right Edge Enhancement Procedure Use the following procedure to perform Edge Enhancement on an image 1 Select Edge Enhancement from the Process menu 2 Enter the Input Image and Output Image names 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed Pratt William K Digital Image Processing John Wiley amp Sons New York 1978 pp 487 488 154 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C 4 If you want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom o
76. to digital unit A number representing a CCD s output The relationship between the ADUs generated and the number of electrons acquired on the CCD is defined by the system gain Intensities given in ADUs provide a convenient method for comparing images and data generated by different detectors Also referred to as count and digital number Anti blooming Blooming is caused by saturation of one or more CCD pixels This can occur if the incoming light is too bright or when extensive serial and parallel binning is being performed When this saturation happens the excess charge overflows into the adjacent pixels and results in a streak or a blob appearing on the image Anti blooming is traditionally controlled by specific CCD architecture designs that drain the excess charge Avalanche Gain Also called on chip multiplication gain A technology that enables multiplication of charge i e electrons collected in each pixel of the CCD s active array Secondary electrons are generated via an impact ionization process that is initiated and sustained when higher than typical voltages are applied to an extended portion of the CCD s serial register Multiplying the signal above the read noise of the output amplifier enables ultra low light detection at high operation speeds Some CCD cameras with on chip multiplication gain utilize two output amplifiers an on chip multiplication gain amplifier that allows the camera to be used for low light
77. to move with an accuracy of 2 3 pixels per step 30 45 microns in the X and Y directions Consult the factory for off the shelf optical masking accessories Running the camera in Free Run mode with 0 0 msec exposure time will result in the fastest acquisition time Under these conditions the acquisition time is limited by the readout time of the ROI exposure time 0 readout time When you return the system to Normal chip mode radio button on Virtual Chip dialog box you should also open the Experiment Setup dialog box at the ROI Setup tab card and click on the ClearAll button to clear the ROI setup downloaded for Virtual Chip operation If frame acquisition appears to be slow in Focus mode check the Frames Interrupt value on the Environment dialog box and reset the value to 1 if it is greater than 1 When processing large stacks of data you may want to use a third party scientific image processing package Due to CCD design you may see some edge artifacts when acquiring data from the entire virtual chip Crop these artifacts by defining an ROI that is slightly smaller than the virtual chip dimensions Part 3 Reference Appendix A System and Camera Nomenclature cccceeeee 203 Appendix B Calibration Lines oo ccc cccesseseeeeecneeseeeceeneeseeecaeeeeaeees 211 Appendix C Data Structure 20 ccccesessescseeseeeecseeseeceeneeaeeecnenetaeees 213 Appendix D Auto Spectro Wavelength Calibration 00
78. where the decay is slow the gate pulses are further apart but much wider to accommodate the lower signal amplitude The result is output data that is relatively constant in intensity over the decay time This data can be easily normalized by dividing each point by the exposure time and then using a spline fit to recover the curve The logarithm base e can then be taken to obtain a straight line or two lines successive line segments each with a different slope for two species Tangents can be fitted to each segment to determine the rate constant for each species Chapter 18 Pulser Operation 185 Fast Decay Time Constant In a two species system enter the decay time of the faster of the two species Note that it is not essential that you enter a value If you have the decay time information you will get better data if the information is entered but acceptable results can be obtained in many situations by using the default If there is only one species or if you want to discard the fast decay process simply enter zero for the Amplitude Note that the Gate Width and Gate Delay values need to be selected with some care in fluorescence decay experiments Typically the starting gate width will be very narrow perhaps 2 ns and the final gate width should be wider by about the ratio of the anticipated signal amplitude decrease over the course of the measurement timebase Similarly the starting gate delay has to take the various insertion delays
79. y axis label ShutterType 1474 shutter type shutterComp 1476 shutter compensation time 220 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C WORD readoutMode 1480 readout mode full kinetics etc WORD WindowSize 1482 window size for kinetics only WORD clkspd 1484 clock speed for kinetics amp frame transfer WORD interface type 1486 computer interface isa taxi pci eisa etc SHORT NumROIsInExperiment 1488 May be more than the 10 allowed in this header if 0 assume 1 char Spare 5 16 1490 WORD controllerNum 1506 if multiple controller system will have controller number data came from This is a future item WORD SWmade 1508 Which software package created this file SHORT NumROI 1510 number of ROIs used if 0 assume 1 1512 1630 ROI information struct ROIinfo unsigned int startx left x start value unsigned int endx right x value unsigned int groupx amount x is binned grouped in hw unsigned int starty top y start value unsigned int endy bottom y value unsigned int groupy amount y is binned grouped in hw ROIinfoblk ROIMAX char FlatField HDRNAMEMAX char background HDRNAMEMAX char blemish HDRNAMEMAX float file header_ver char YT_Info 1000 LONG WinView id ROI Starting Offsets 1632 1752 1872 1992 1996 2996 ROI 1 1512 ROI 2 1524 ROI 3 1536 ROI 4 1548 ROI 5 1560 ROI 6 1572 ROI 7 1584 ROI 8 1596 ROI 9 1608 ROI 10 1620 Flat field file name background sub fil
80. 00 223 Appendix E CD ROM Failure Workarounds 0 0 cc cecceeeteeeereeeeeees 227 Appendix F WinSpec 32 Repair and Maintenance ce 229 Appendix G USB 2 0 Limitations 200 00 ceneeseeeceeteeeeeeseeeeaeees 233 Appendix H Troubleshooting USB 2 00 00 ccccceeeteeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeees 235 Appendix l Glossary jaca adie omen womens 243 201 202 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C This page intentionally left blank Appendix A System and Camera Nomenclature System Controller Type and Camera Type Cross Reference Use the cross reference table below if you need to determine the controller type and or camera CCD type used by your system This table is based on the Princeton Instruments brand systems that are currently being sold by Roper Scientific Inc Many of these systems incorporate non volatile RAM NVRAM that has been factory programmed with the default hardware setup parameters for the controller camera and CCD array included in your system If you know the controller type used by your system you should be able to download these default parameters However if this functionality is not available for your system you will need to manually enter the information Controller Type Camera CCD Type I PentaMAX Gen II or Gen HI PentaMAXx EEV 512x512FT MicroMAX 512EBFT ST 133 EEV 512x512FT CCD57 MicroMAX 782Y ST 133 PID 582x782 MicroMAX 782YHS MicroMAX 5 MHz PID 582x782 MicroMAX 1024B ST 133 EEV 1
81. 024x1024 CCD 47_10 MicroMAX 1300B ST 133 EEV 1300x1340B MicroMAX 1300Y ST 133 PID1030x1300 MicroMAX 1300YHS MicroMAX 5 MHz PID1030x1300 MicroMAX 1300YHS DIF MicroMAX 5 MHz PID 1030x1300 OMA V InGaAs 256 ST 133 InGaAs 1x256 OMA V InGaAs 512 ST 133 InGaAs 1x512 OMA V InGaAs 1024 ST 133 InGaAs 1x1024 PI LCX 400 ST 133 EEV 400x1340F Does not support NVRAM function 203 204 Version 2 5 C WinSpec 32 Manual i a es 576x384 3 ph LD a S C o o I a e eee ee fee ee Appendix A System and Camera Nomenclature 205 Spec 10 256B ST 133 BEV 256x1024B CCD30 a Sees ees er ieee peerage ec ee eeeeenneees 206 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C System and System Component Descriptions The following information briefly describes Princeton Instruments brand systems and the system components For more information contact your Roper Scientific representative or Customer Support Systems MicroMAX Name used for some ST 133 based imaging systems usually with an RTE head MicroMAX 5 MHz 5 MHz controller characterized by duplex head cable OMA V Cryogenically cooled Photodiode array PDA based system for spectroscopy applications PDA Low cost spectroscopy system uses ST 121 controller PentaMAX A D electronics are in the head so no controller is necessary Runs with PCI card only Both unintensified and intensified versions are available PI LCX High performance photon counting system Me
82. 1 Make sure the PG200 is connected to one of the serial ports of the computer Later you will tell WinSpec 32 the name of this port COM1 COM2 etc The software cannot automatically detect the location of the PG200 2 Following the intensifier precautions listed in the hardware manuals turn on the PG200 Pulser and wait for it to initialize If the PG200 isn t turned on the WinSpec 32 software cannot program it 3 Select Setup then Pulsers then PG200 Then click on the Setup PG200 button to open the PG200 dialog If PG200 is grayed out on the Pulsers dialog box PG200 pulser support has not been installed 4 Click on the Comm Port tab Select the Comm Port type Serial or Demo Serial must be selected to control the PG200 173 174 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C 6 Select the PG200 Comm Port Generally the mouse is Triggers Gating Comm Pott connected to COM1 and the Pulser is connected to COM2 COM ports 1 through 8 can be selected Port Type Serial 7 7 Once you have selected the COM Port 2 correct port click on Initialize Port which will cause the software to search for the pulser If it can t find the pulser on the specified port such as would occur if the pulser were not turned on or if it were connected to a different port you will get an error message If this happens Apply All Settings check the cable connections check that the pulser is powered OK Cancel Help or t
83. 157 48 H Steps mm specifying which mirror to move P a P is accomplished via additional oa P Required M Steps je tab pages provided in the Move i Controllable Mirrors Spectrograph dialog box as ontrollable Mirrors o aG shown in Figure 28 Once the Entrance V Front Axial 7 selections are made simply press OK to execute them Exit M Front Axia gt coos tee Figure 27 Define Spectrograph Slits Mirrors tab page Move Spectrograph xi Move Spectrograph X Gratings Slits l Mirrors Gratings Slits Mirrors Front Axial Entrance 0 06350 mm Side Lateral Entrance 0 06250 mm Entrance Front Axial Front Axial Exit 0 06350 mm Exit Front Axial 7 Side Lateral Exit 0 06350 mm Cancel Help Cancel Help Figure 28 Slit width and Mirror selection tab pages Move Spectrograph dialog box Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 49 Entering Laser Excitation Information WARNING If you want to be warned if the laser will shine directly on the CCD you Main Gratings Slits Mirrors Connect need to enter the Laser Wavelength Active Spectrograph This is done via the Main tab page Acton SP30 on COM2 z in the Define Spectrograph dialog box as shown in Figure 29 The Warn When Crossing Laser Do Hardware Initialize Line selection tells WinSpec 32 to IV Use for Auto Spectro Calibration display a message whenever the m Excitation grating is move
84. 2 bits when exposure 1 664 long lnoscan no of scan 32 bits when noscan 1 668 long lavgexp no of accum 32 bits when avgexp 1 672 char stripfil 16 strip file Not used by WinView 688 char version 16 SW version amp date 01 000 02 01 90 704 int controller type 1 new st120 2 old st120 3 st130 type 1 4 st130 type 2 5 st138 6 DC131 and ST133 YT FILE HEADER The YT variables are not used by WinView 706 int yt_file defined set TRUE for YT data file 708 int yt_fh calib mode calibration type 710 int yt_fh calib type time unit calibration type 712 int yt_fh element 12 element number 736 double yt_fh calib data 12 data 832 float yt_fh time factor time factor 836 float yt_fh start_time start time 840 int reverse flag set to 1 if data should be reversed 0 don t reverse y Version 1 6 Header All WinView WinSpec files version 1 6 and WinView 32 and WinSpec 32 data files must begin with the following 4100 byte header Data files created under previous versions of WinView WinSpec can still be read correctly However files created under the new versions 1 6 and higher cannot be read by previous versions of WinView WinSpec Header Structure Listing Decimal Byte offset unsigned int dioden O0 num of physical pixels X axis int avgexp 2 number of accumulations per scan if
85. 29 PCI cardidriyet iesenii ini 24 USB 2 0 driver isaonisioinnnnneasrass 25 Installing WinSpec 32 osses 19 Intensifier gain effect on dark charge 132 Interface tab page eee eeeeseeeteees 39 interrupt level eee eeeeeeeeeeee 39 A o e ETE EAN caterer E 39 DEMO aeea aaarnas ana aa 39 high speed PCT oo eee 39 PCL TIMET eiea aseiden 39 Interrupt level enereiscsnennnia 39 Interrupt tab page VOaddresSSin karorni ana 39 T O address 2 and 3 sssr 39 Introduction to manual ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 KAMetiCs cece cccccccccececceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeess 35 122 L M Labeling graphs and images 104 Laser XCitation cnor aiii a 49 Jaser Tine rs eeror e a REER 76 WinSpec 32 Manual Least Squares Fit calibration method 81 Linear math operations eee 137 Log10 math operation eee 137 Logic 0 PentaMAX output 36 Logic 1 PentaMAX output 36 Look Up Table fOr AtS a esaerari iiien 160 PIOCEUUIG nrienennr a ai 159 Magnification seseseeeeseeeseerrerrerrsrsrerrese 85 Main Menu sareno si 28 Manual wavelength calibration 75 Math A B and C tab pages oo eee 135 data types Dyt ironiaa aaria s 136 float nra Bei obs a EE 136 int136 lONG ei eae eee 136 UHN enirn e aa i E EEE 136 file tab pages ssesse seesaw a iea 135 operations Single Tes siete n totes 136 single file and constant 136 Parameters data type gen sie ssecieistetesnctren 136 display result eee ee
86. 32 The Ending Pulse Delay Of 13 Is Less Than The Minimum Of 21 Do You Want To Reset This Value To The Minimum Figure 176 Range Limits Exceeded Warning Fixed Increment Type With this selection the increment or change in Gate Width and Gate Delay is the same from shot to shot The actual increments depend on the specified starting and ending values and on the Number of Spectra The increment values are calculated and reported in the associated fields Exponential Increment Type With this selection the increment or change in Gate Width and Gate Delay changes from shot to shot The precise delay and width of each shot with respect to Tp is determined by the values entered for the Fast Decay and Slow Decay Time Constant and Amplitude parameters In fluorescent decay experiments for example there will typically be two species contributing to the output data one of which decays much faster than the other For example there might be a fast fluorophor with a decay time of at most a few nanoseconds and a slower one with a decay time of perhaps a hundred nanoseconds By sweeping both the delay and the width and making provision for entering time constant and amplitude information for two species the sequential exponential algorithm is ideally suited to making this type of measurement At the start of the decay where the amplitude is high but the decay is rapid the gate pulses are narrow and close together Towards the end of the decay
87. 664 Number of scans Early Winx lavgexp 668 Number of Accumulations ReadoutTime 672 Experiment readout time TriggeredModeFlag 676 T F Triggered Timing Option Spare_2 10 678 sw_version FILEVERMAX 688 Version of SW creating this file type 704 1 newl20 Type II 2 01d120 Type I 3 ST130 4 T121 5 ST138 6 DC131 PentaMax 7 ST133 MicroMax SpectroMax 8 ST135 GPIB 9 VICCD 10 ST116 GPIB 11 OMA3 GPIB 12 OMA4 flatFieldApplied 706 1 if flat field was applied Spare 3 16 708 kin trig_mode 724 Kinetics Trigger Mode dlabel LABELMAX 726 Data label Spare 4 436 742 PulseFileName HDRNAMEMAX 1178 Name of Pulser File with Pulse Widths Delays for Z Slice AbsorbFileName HDRNAMEMAX 1298 Name of Absorbance File if File Mode NumExpRepeats 1418 Number of Times experiment repeated NumExpAccums 1422 Number of Time experiment accumulated YT_Flag 1426 Set to 1 if this file contains YT data clkspd_us 1428 Vert Clock Speed in micro sec HWaccumFlag 1432 set to 1 if accum done by Hardware StoreSync 1434 set to 1 if store sync used BlemishApplied 1436 set to 1 if blemish removal applied CosmicApplied 1438 set to 1 if cosmic ray removal applied CosmicType 1440 if cosmic ray applied this is type CosmicThreshold 1442 Threshold of cosmic ray removal NumFrames 1446 number of frames in file MaxIntensity 1450 max intensity of data future MinIntensity 1454 min intensity of data future ylabel LABELMAX 1458
88. 8 Acquisition menu Data Collection Procedures Controller Specific MicroMAX or ST 133 The procedure that follows for these controllers is in two parts Video Focusing and Data Collection In focusing images are displayed on the video monitor not the computer monitor and no data is collected This allows rapid and easy adjustment of the system optics Once the settings have been optimized data collection begun can begin Focusing This procedure applies for a MicroMAX or ST 133 system that includes a video monitor connected to the Video port BNC connector on the controller If your system doesn t include a video monitor go to the Data Collection All Controllers section which begins on page 68 1 Select Video from the Acquisition menu This will allow live data to be displayed on your video monitor 66 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C 2 Select Video Focus from the Acquisition Interactive Camera Operation x Pattern Menu The Interactive Camera dialog box p Exposure Time Figure 49 will open 1 000 Seconds Zoom Gen 12 28 d4 fo Click on the RUN button in the Interactive Fcc eee Camera dialog box The camera will begin EE Sore g RS170 Intensity Scaling oH acquiring pictures at the fastest possible rate will Dircies Courts B and the image will be displayed on the video y ESS 3 monitor Note that the image will not be displayed Offset Non Linear Units on the computer mon
89. Alternatively if you already have an image open this image and New Patter fil Number Stored 0 display it on screen Imaging Mode Spectroscopy Mode 2 Next click on the Use Region of Interest radio button Main tab page Then click on snag oF the ROI Setup tab to display the ROI Setup stat a tab page If there are already regions stored End 3 End 4 you will now see them displayed as Gia rectangles on the displayed image 3 Click on the spin button to the right of the Mouse Full Clear Clear all A New Edit Pattern field until the field label says New Pattern instead of Edit Pattern Cancel Changes Biei 4 Use the mouse to drag an ROI box over the desired region in the image display Acquire Focus Cancel Help 5 Click on Mouse ROI tab page to enter the ROI information Once this information is displayed on the tab page you edit it Figure 124 ROI Setup tab page Imaging Mode 6 Click on Store to save the new pattern Chapter 11 Correction Techniques Introduction Advanced data collection includes background subtraction flatfield correction CCD blemishes removal and Cosmic Ray removal The skillful use of these techniques can significantly enhance measurement capabilities Note that not all of these techniques will be available in early releases of the software Background Subtraction Princeton Instruments systems are adjusted so that data have a sma
90. Ave an converter If the camera is a PI MAX a el E with a Thomson 512 CCD select oe FAST ST 130 owners must confirm that the internal hardware jumpers of their controller are properly set for the PR z 7 aul na desired speed See the ST 130 manual emito _Foou ancel _ Hep for details Figure 33 Data Corrections tab page Type For systems having more than one Experiment Setup A D converter both FAST and SLOW Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections will be available Make this selection ADC Timing Processes SaverLoad before selecting the rate or resolution Rate 100KHe Controller Gain PentaMAX only Set z to Gain 3 Type stow x Resolution Number of bits Choices limited by A D type selection XZ Bit Adjust ST 138 only Set to No Clip Resolution i5pits ADC Offset 5MHz MicroMAX only BitAdust Cip1LsB z Use the default setting i Z Analog Gain ST 133 Medium ADC Ofset 50 Ei Analog Gain Low 7 Acquire Focus Cancel Help Figure 34 Generic ADC tab page Note Not all of these parameters are provided for every controller model Ignore parameters that don t apply to your system 56 WinSpec 32 Manual On the ROI tab page select Spectroscopy Mode as shown in Figure 35 The Use Full Chip selection on the Main tab page overrides any ROI settings that may be present Note The choice of Spectroscopy or Imaging is only pro
91. B interface will be recognized the USB driver is apausb sys For consistency you may also want to change the camera names Save the file With the ST 133A connected and on open WinSpec 32 7 Run the Hardware Wizard When the PVCAM dialog box Figure 198 is displayed click in the Yes radio button click on Next and continue through the Wizard After the Wizard is finished the Controller Camera tab card will be displayed with the Use PVCAM checkbox selected You should now be able to acquire data PY CAM Are you using a P CAM supported camera Yes C No Figure 201 Hardware Wizard PVCAM dialog box Appendix H Troubleshooting USB 2 0 239 Detector Temperature Acquire and Focus are Grayed Out These functions and others will be deactivated if you have installed a camera being run under USB 2 0 and have opened WinSpec 32 without having first turned on the ST 133A They will also be deactivated if you have installed a camera being run under USB 2 0 and a Princeton Instruments high speed PCI card was also detected when RSConfig exe was run 1 Check to see if the ST 133A is connected to the host computer and is turned on If it is not connected or is connected but not turned on go to Step 2 If it is connected and on go to Step 3 Close WinSpec verify that the ST 133A is connected to the host computer turn on the ST 133A and reopen WinSpec The formerly grayed out functions should now be available If t
92. Capacity If this is a reported only parameter set it by selecting FAST on the ADC tab page Camera State PI MAX only Safe the photocathode is biased OFF Avalanche Gain Cascade 512 or Cascade 650 only Set to 0 initially and disabled Enable and increase the gain for low light level spectra WARNING Intensified Cameras If working with an intensified camera the room light should be subdued so as to allow safe Shutter mode operation of the camera Intensified cameras are quite susceptible to damage from light overload in Shutter mode operation and particularly subject to damage from light overload in Gated mode operation with high intensity pulsed light sources See your camera or system manual for detailed information Also take particular care that your intensified camera is connected properly for Shutter mode operation Cabling and peripheral considerations for intensified cameras are more complex than for unintensified cameras Again read your camera or system manual 3 On the Timing tab page Figure 32 set the BISOUS following parameters Main DataFile ROI Setup Data Corrections Timin Note Not all of these parameters are ADE 9 Processes SavezLoad provided for every controller model Ignore Timing Mode parameters that don t apply to your system at extemal S I Continuous CI Timing Mode Free Run For PI MAX pauu AENEID system Ext Sync for DG535 Int Sync pocco co 0 a
93. Chapter 5 Opening Closing and Saving Data Files Introduction This chapter discusses how to open close and save existing data files to disk Options for saving and deleting files will be explained Data files created with temporary file names should be saved to disk periodically Files should be closed completely to conserve RAM for data collection Data files can be deleted directly from WinSpec 32 without using the File Manager or any other file utility Note WinSpec 32 can read data files acquired with earlier versions of WinSpec Versions of WinSpec prior to 1 6 cannot read WinSpec 32 data files Neither can versions prior to 1 6 read data files that were collected with earlier versions and then opened modified and saved using WinSpec 32 This should be considered carefully before modifying and saving old data files with WinSpec 32 Opening Data Files In WinSpec 32 files are opened according to Win 95 conventions as eee Look in Data x E follows mis _YT SPE yA 256strip SPE 1035strip SPE md 2strip SPE 1 Select Open from the File menu 10morestrip SPE yA 3001 SPE The File Open dialog box will 10stip SPE Pd 3stip SPE appear Figure 52 16strip SPE WA adjust SPE 1strip SPE Argon spe 2 Open the directory containing the data files Clicking on the button at the right of the Look In field F ezame f opens a browser function Files oftype Winx Daat se O H Cancel allowing you to quickly
94. Controller Selection Note The Controller Type for PVCAM supported detectors is automatically Select the type of controller that your system is running determined from the entry in the PVCAM INI file For Princeton Instruments detectors using the TAXI PCI ee the wizard mm _ e checks to see if NVRAM is installed in the controller or detector NVRAM contains detailed information about your system s controller and detector Note that some controllers and detectors do not contain NVRAM so you will have to select the appropriate entries See Appendix A for a cross reference table for systems controllers and CCD arrays Figure 13 Controller Type dialog box If the wizard finds NVRAM the wizard reads the controller and detector information and inserts that information into the Controller Type and Detector Camera CCD dialog boxes If it does not find NVRAM it enters ST 133 as the default controller If you have an ST 121 ST 130 or ST 138 controller you will have to select it from the dropdown list The Controller Type selection is critical because it determines the nature and type of the other selections that will be available including the detector type display orientation options cleans amp skips and user defined chip parameters No single controller provides all possible selections and only the ones applicable to the selected controller are listed on the Hardware Setup dialog box tab pages 5 Detector Ca
95. Copies 2 Select the number of copies C Al Number of copies f and pages if a file contains Pages from fi tafi multiple frames each will be C Seedin pi elk printed as a separate page 3 Click on OK to initiate the print Cancel Figure 155 Print dialog box Notes 1 Once the Print Setup is properly configured you can print the active window simply by selecting Print from the File menu shortcut Alt F P or by clicking on the Print button in the standard toolbar 2 Color mapping to the printer may differ from that shown on the screen To obtain the desired output color mapping you may wish to do a screen capture and then paste the image into a graphics program for final adjustment before printing Print Preview The Print Preview function gives you a quick idea of how the printed image will look It produces an on screen print that looks as closely as possible like a real print allowing changes in the printer setup to be made quickly and conveniently Figure 156 illustrates the Print Preview window Chapter 17 Printing 171 s4 WinSpec 32 Hid lamp spe ojx i He Rage Prey Page Two Page LZoomin_ Zoom Out Close 8 a x St xu g i Zo o x Figure 156 Print Preview window The button functions are as follows Print Opens the Print screen so a print can be initiated Next Page If the file contains multiple frames each one will occupy a different pa
96. CtHONS serenor etesen Goan del steers E aeS Ea dae eee 155 Morphological FUNCTIONS ee eeeeesecsecsseceseceseceseceseceseesseeseaeecaeeeseesaeesaaecsaeceaeeesaeenaes 156 Custom Falter creea a nen ah eet eve is chet wins ie a 158 LOOK Up Table sci stecsiasteeevi detente sect asistencia ets aerate 159 Format aasenso hoc eile Gen reais neces Mast Guna Gh erates 160 Format 2 osier cesa entertain teas EE tia Wess irene ndess tte wee 161 References aenema e Aled ates a eea aa aes ha ete een ee eS le Ee 161 Chapter 16 Additional Post Acquisition Processes ssseeeeee 163 Introduction 4 42 sc ea e dart heed eet cle evets tole R cath a tisteesbr ace ae E a 163 Whresholdvand Clipping sce ssf desssctiets shebeslesadestecssetelietgucdesccuaderbaciaaeesdevactevateledessadeeteeasct 164 CrOSS SECHON 2 2 Zev Ale eetcs Laoite kena Meee dt cestode felts eA eee a Reet ds 165 Binning and Skipping ccrecssseeclel slices aeeoa ee ee i RE ECE NEEE EAEE 166 Histogram Calculati omiran enan e e a i a eea a e a etai 168 vi WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Chapter 17 Printing cad 5 sees ets aa aA 2a eae dt 169 Introduction esenea ee eer ao haat N Wickens hoe See een tee ad 169 Setting up the Printer smiir elton date ia eal 169 Printing Directly from WinSpec 32 000 eeeeeeesceeseecnseceseeeaeecaeceaecaecsaeesseeeseesseeeseeeeaes 170 Print PLEVICW esos cu cassebes ciieons cageteseianntss cadsecsunth tes E TE GR TE i A a EAE iaa 170 Pr
97. D 840 821 _ 842 465 2 852 145 006 912 297 922 450 965 778 ayeys Apeays ye paureyqo saul ANUN dn Burusem sem due ajlym peureyqo saul uoy 3JON OOOL Figure 189 Wavelength Calibration Spectrum Appendix C Data Structure Version 1 43 Header All WinView or WinSpec files version 1 43 must begin with the following 4100 byte header typedef WINXHEAD 0 int dioden CCD X dimension 2 int avgexp Not used by WinView 4 int exposure exposure if 1 see lexpos 6 int datarange Not used by WinView 8 int mode Not used by WinView 10 float wexsy Not used by WinView 14 int asyavg Not used by WinView 16 int asyseq Not used by WinView 18 int linefreq Not used by WinView 20 int date0 Not used by WinView 22 int datel Not used by WinView 24 int date2 Not used by WinView 26 int date3 Not used by WinView 28 int date4 Not used by WinView 30 int ehour Not used by WinView 32 int eminute Not used by WinView 34 int noscan of stripes collected if 1 see lnoscan 36 int fastacc Not used by WinView 38 int avgtime Not used by WinView 40 int dmatotal Not used by WinView 42 int faccount X dimension Actual dim of image 44 int stdiode Not used by WinView 46 float nanox Not used by WinView 50 float calibdio 10 Not used by WinView
98. Detector Temperature Acquire and Focus are Grayed Out eee eeeessecsseceneeeneeenees 239 Error Creating Controller message cescesceseceseceseceseceseesseeesaeesseesaeeseaeeeneesaeeenaeenaes 240 No CCD Named in the Hardware Wizard CCD dialog cee eesceseceseceseceseeeeeeeeneeeaee 241 OrangeUSB USB 2 0 Driver Update 0 0 eee eeeeseeseeeneecnseceseceseceaeeeseeeeseaeeeneeenaeenaees 241 Appendix I Glossary 22sec esta i 243 Warranty amp Serviti aiaa tates ate cnet ieee 245 Limited Warranty Roper Scientific Analytical Instrumentation ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 245 Contact Information esenea a aee a ects tena eet este th devia eet EEA 248 NINO X a r sce cesnaciacecestca chaste ee caideactegck seneeasedensleSck deccassavaceachasauecucasadeachuearescsasaceacsacs 249 Figures Figure 1 RSConfig dialog DX aeaea era E EE E eoa E EEEN 26 Figure 2 Hardware Wizard PVCAM dialog bOX sssesseseeeeseeeesesresersresresrrsrersresresresee 26 Figure 3 Opening WinSpec 32 from the Program Managert eseseeesereerrerrerrereesre 21 Pigure 4 Splash Sereen niee eee i a Meade cea E a Minette eel ge 27 Figure 5 Main WinSpec 32 windoW esessseeseseseseessesessresresresressesrreserrensresrrsresresressesees 28 Fig re 6 Setup MENW en ier eneee a E a e a E a a aeea E alates Nees 29 Figure 7 Possible System Configurations eessseeessereesesreerrsressesrreserrreseesresreeresressesees 30 Figure 8 Liquid or Air Cooled System Diagram cece eseese
99. E Region Of Interest x Start 1 Y Start 1 f End 10 m YEnd f1 m x Group 1 Y Group 1 RO ASIII SIILI ILEILE LA Load Default Values 8 U a NNN eI n Wor Recetas NOSE ee et LLL Se eM RRR AZZ Nital Chip Mask VY YS ZA Shutter NENZA r p a CLL BASANA SS SSS SAPS PLSD PON ee oo Close gt mA h a a a A a enema E E A E E A E E A E A E E E A a Figure 188 Virtual Chip dialog box Figure 187 Virtual Chip Functional diagram Virtual Chip Setup The following procedure covers the basic hardware and software setup for Virtual Chip operation Equipment Suitable Princeton Instruments detector with 512x512FT or other frame transfer CCD array Suitable ST 133A PCI Interface Card and High Speed Serial TAXTI cable Suitable Host Computer Software WinSpec 32 version 2 4 or higher WXvchip opt installed in the same directory as the executable WinSpec 32 program Assumptions e You are familiar with the WinSpec 32 software and have read the hardware manuals e Masking is for a 47x47 pixel Virtual Chip with its origin at 1 1 Procedure 1 Verify that the power is OFF for ALL system components including the host computer 2 Verify that the correct line voltages have been selected and that the correct fuses have been installed in the ST 133A 3 Connect the TAXI cable to the interface card at the host computer and to the Serial Com connector at the rear of the Controller Tighten down the locking screws 4 Con
100. ENTION Not all computers are able to satisfy the software and data transfer WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C performance requirements of Roper Scientific systems If you purchased a computer through Roper Scientific it will have already been tested for proper operation with a Princeton Instruments system and will have the Interface card installed e Super VGA monitor and graphics card supporting at least 256 colors with at least 1 Mbyte of memory Memory required will depend on desired display resolution e Two button Microsoft compatible serial mouse or Logitech three button serial bus mouse e Host Computer USB 2 0 Protocol e AT compatible computer with Pentium 3 or better processor that runs at 1 GHz or better e Native USB 2 0 support on the motherboard or USB Interface Card Orange Micro 70USB90011 USB2 0 PCI is recommended for desktop computers and the SIIG Inc USB 2 0 PC Card Model US2246 is recommended for laptop computers e Minimum of 256 Mb of RAM e CD ROM drive e Hard disk with a minimum of 80 Mbytes available A complete installation of the program files takes about 17 Mbytes and the remainder is required for data storage depending on the number and size of spectra collected Disk level compression programs are not recommended e Super VGA monitor and graphics card supporting at least 256 colors with at least 1 Mbyte of memory Memory requirement is dependent on desired display resolution e Two but
101. Enter the desired number of images Use Region of Interest Accumulations 1 ADC tab card Type FAST ROI Setup tab card Make no changes to the settings on this tab card unless you have re enabled Normal Operating Mode ROI setup for Virtual Chip High Speed Mode is performed through the Virtual Chip dialog box 10 From the Setup menu select Virtual Chip and enter the following settings High Speed Mode Enabled Virtual Chip Definition The settings below assume a 47x47 pixel virtual chip The X and Y dimensions are established by the external mask The virtual chip is fully flexible in the X direction However the set of choices for the Y dimension has been pre selected for optimal Chapter 20 Software Options 199 performance Note that the origin point that Roper Scientific uses for a CCD array is 1 1 Chip Y Dimension 47 Select this dimension from the drop down list Chip X Dimension 47 Enter this dimension manually 11 Click on the Load Default Values button This enters the default ROI values These values are Start pixels of 1 1 End pixels based on the Chip Y and Chip X dimensions and Groups of 1 Region of Interest The settings below assume a 47x47 pixel ROI i e the entire virtual chip An ROI that is a subset of the virtual chip can be defined X Start 1 Y Start 1 X End 47 Y End 47 X Group 1 Y Group 1 Click on the Download Virtual Chip Definition button This will download the definition set up t
102. FICIENTS laser wavenumber for relativ WN reserved If set to 200 valid label below Calibration label NULL term d Calibration Expansion area End of Calibration Structures char char int Istring 40 empty3 80 lastvalue Version 2 5 Header 9 18 02 The current data file used for WINX files consists of a 4100 1004 Hex byte header 3978 4018 special Intensity scaling string empty block to reach 4100 bytes 7 4098 Always the LAST value in the header 217 followed by the data Beginning with Version 2 5 many more items were added to the header to make it a complete as possible record of the data collection This includes spectrograph and pulser information Many of these additions were accomplished by recycling old information that had not been used in previous versions All data files created under previous 2 x versions of WinView WinSpec CAN still be read correctly HOWEVER files created under the new versions 2 5 and higher CANNOT be read by previous versions of WinView WinSpec OR by the CSMA software package Header Structure Listing SHORT SHORT ControllerVersion LogicOutput Deci Byte Offs 0 2 mal et Hardware Version Definition of Output BNC 218 WORD WORD SHORT float SHORT SHORT WORD char SHORT char SHO RT float SHORT WORD SHO RT float WORD SHORT WORD SHORT SHORT float SHO RT float SHORT floa
103. K The Repetitive Gating Cancel Help Setup dialog box will close and you will return to the PG200 dialog box Figure 161 Repetitive Gating Setup dialog box Sequential Mode If Sequential is selected the Sequential Gating Setup dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 162 In the Sequential Gating mode the Gate Width and Gate Delay do not remain constant but change either linearly Fixed or exponentially as the measurement progresses Fixed is suited to sweeping over a time interval to locate and recover an event that takes place at the same time with each iteration Exponential is well suited to fluorescence decay experiments where the effect under study changes rapidly at the start of an experiment and then slower and slower following a logarithmic curve as the experiment progresses 176 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C If the measurement is to be done in the sequential gating mode set the pulsing parameters as appropriate for your intended measurement and click on OK The Sequential Gating Setup dialog box will close and you return to the PG200 dialog box Sequential Gating Setup X Gate Width Gate Delay Number of Spectra Start 10000 nsec 7 Start 121 nsec wj End 110000 nsec x End 121 nsec x V Check Gate Width and Delay Min Max Message Displayed Increment Type ona Width Increment fo nsec Delay Increment fo nsec Fast Decay Exponential
104. K The Sequential Gating Setup dialog box will close and you return to the PTG dialog box 12 Click the OK button This writes all of the parameter values to the PTG Note The PTG can also be controlled interactively as data is being collected For more information see the discussion of this feature starting on page 187 DG535 Digital Delay Pulse Generator The DG535 is programmed via the IEEE 488 GPIB port of the computer default GPIB address is 15 The choices provided by the tab pages are the same ones that are available using the DG535 front panel Basic DG535 operation is reviewed in the following procedure The individual tab page selections are discussed in detail in the online Help topics Note The DG535 is used to control the PI MAX gate functions If the system is equipped Camera Has Been Set To Safe Mode with a PI MAX camera the Camera State dialog Select The Desired Action box Figure 169 will appear when the software PEPOT EAE is started Although the software always initially l places the PI MAX in Safe mode you have the option of restarting with the last setting Shutter Mode or Gate Mode C Restore To Last Setting Figure 169 Camera State dialog box 1 Make sure the DG535 is connected to the computer s Triggers Gating Comm Patt TEEE 488 GPIB port Later you will tell WinSpec 32 the eooo DG535 s GPIB address The Internal Frequency MI Hz default sett
105. Opt sasso eee eeeeesceeneecseecnsecnseecaeecsaecaecaecnaeesseeseeeseeeeeeeeaes 194 PETS CRIT Si X6 E E A E EA aee tees 194 Macro Record WXMAaACcrec Opt eeeceessceceececseececsaeceeaeeceeeeeesaeeeesaecseaeeceeeeeesaecseaaeeeeeees 195 Spex Spectrograph Control WSSpex Opt 0 ce cesceseceseceseceseeeseeeeneesaeeeaeesnaeeeseeeneeenaes 196 Vartual Chip CW XVCHIp Opt kenter ne aoo eea a elertstedebeceseetacssawencedaresetestedesbataeeetatots 196 Part 3 Reference cccscececececececececececccucucecucecucecacneneasas QO Appendix A System and Camera Nomenclature cccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 203 System Controller Type and Camera Type Cross Reference eeeceeseeseeseeeseeeneees 203 System and System Component Descriptions 00 0 0 cee eeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeaeeenaeenaees 206 CED Array Designators ccseteec seta ete eee E chen cent E hana seated doce 208 Appendix B Calibration Lines ccccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 211 Appendix C Data Structure ccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeesesseseseeeeseeeseeeseeeeess 213 Version 1 43 Header omen decedec econ e a aa a hate a a i ETa 213 Merson O Heade tiie aroas nn nene a ea eren e a ni ashen oeae aa Spia 214 Version 2 5 Header 9 18 02 eerror a TEA E AA REIA TE NE 217 Start OF Data ane Loree oe a r haat e A E aiae Ace dein ere RN 222 Appendix D Auto Spectro Wavelength Calibration ccccccceeeeeeseee
106. Post Acquisition Processes 0 c ee 163 Chapter 17 Printing 5 incicwancsiecensi mine taaua andigaancmusintnammnnacmanns 169 Chapter 18 Pulser Operation ccecseeeeteeeeseeseeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeaes 173 Chapter 19 Custom Toolbar Settings 2 00 0 cc cceceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 189 Chapter 20 Software Options 200 0000 ccc ceeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeneeaeeecseneeaeeeeaes 193 117 118 WinSpec 32 Manual This page intentionally left blank Version 2 5 C Chapter 9 Cleaning Introduction An acquisition is made up of an exposure period and a readout period For the rest of the time the camera is waiting to be told to acquire spectra or images During this waiting period charge generated from different sources builds up on the array unless some kind of cleaning process is ongoing Cleaning minimizes the impact of the unwanted signal noise by row shifting the accumulated charge to the output register and then discarding it Depending on your system WinSpec 32 will provide you with up to five cleaning features The most common cleaning feature is Clean Cycles which occur until Acquire is selected and may continue up to the entered number of cleans before exposure begins If External Synchronization is being used to control exposure a feature called continuous cleans may be used in addition to the standard clean cycles Where the detector and controller support it a specialized version of continuous cleans Continuous Cleans
107. Skips With some controllers specifically the PentaMAX ST 130 ST 133 and ST 138 there is a Cleans Skips tab page in the Hardware Setup dialog box Cleans are used to reduce charge buildup on the CCD array while waiting to begin data acquisition refer to Chapter 9 for more information Skips are used when the Region of Interest ROD is smaller than the full chip they allow binning and quick traversing of the rows that precede and follow the ROI For the procedures that follow load the default values for Chapter 3 Initial Spectroscopic Data Collection 53 these parameters by bringing the Cleans Skips tab page to the front and then clicking on Load Defaults followed by Yes Exception With a PI MAX camera Cleans should be set to 1 and Strips per Clean to 4 Spectrograph Before a spectrum can be acquired it is necessary that the spectrograph be powered and properly installed as described in Chapter 2 It is not necessary to calibrate the spectrograph The default settings will be close enough for initial familiarization purposes However it will be necessary to install the spectrograph This is the procedure whereby the WinSpec 32 software is informed of the spectrograph model communications port selected gratings slit width and mirror selections if applicable It is also necessary to establish successful communications between the host computer and the spectrograph These considerations are all discussed in Chapter 2 Additional inform
108. Start Height and Group if in Imaging Mode values e Spectroscopy Mode Height controls the Y axis binning 1 indicates no binning higher values indicate the number of pixels being binned to generate the strip of data Do not overlap Slit values e Imaging Mode Height is the height of the image and Group determines the Y axis binning Image ROIs can overlap c Click on Store to store the newly created ROI The Number Stored will be updated Repeat this process until you have finished adding ROIs 5 To edit an existing pattern click on the spin buttons until the pattern number is displayed in the Edit Pattern field 6 Then make your changes TIP If you are changing the Wavelength X axis values in Spectroscopy Mode select the first pattern and enter your changes there 130 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C 7 Click on Store to store the changed ROI pattern Note To scan the full CCD chip at any time simply select the Use Full Chip radio button on the Main tab page and begin acquisition Defining ROIs by Mouse Input Often you can easily identify a region of interest by visually inspecting the full chip image When this can be done it is very easy to define the ROI graphically as follows 1 First click on the Use Full Chip radio Experiment Setup button Experimental Setup Main tab page mE LE hice enn so that a full chip image will be acquired Main DataFile ROI Setup Data Corrections Then click on Run
109. Tablenmerisren eet E eens A E EA EAT 159 Input tab pge serierne heehee tyne Ea EEE iat ae eed 163 Output tab pag sserrniop e a iat 163 Threshold and Clipping Parameters tab page eesseeesereseeereerrsreersrrsse 164 Example Cross Sections of an ROL eseeseeseeeeeseeresrrrresresrrsreeresreererreesen 165 Cross Section Parameters tab page eeessseeseseereeresreeresrresrrsresresreesesreses 165 Postprocessing Binning and Skipping Parameters tab page eee 166 Postprocessing Histogram Parameter tab page eseeseeseeeseecsseeeneeenees 168 Print Setup dialog DOX moenie n EE S ES s 169 Print dialog DOR sc aes ene aesae taaa latent eat aaa 170 Print Preview WIndOW siecrencnaciceenrrei nii A 171 Piler dd OZ f OA tia en ae eg a ee ial 173 PG200 Comm Port tab page cecesecsseceseceseceseeeeeeeeneeeaeeeneeeneeesaeenaees 174 PG200 Triggers tab page ce cesceeceseceseeesseceseesseeeseeseneseseeeseeeneeeaaeenaees 174 PG200 Gating tab page eee e a S E E E NTE i 175 Repetitive Gating Setup dialog bOX ssssesseseeseereesesseeseesresresrrsresresreesesresss 175 Sequential Gating Setup dialog DOX ssseeeseseeesesesreerssreesrsseesrrsresresressesreses 176 Camera State dialog DOX cane iina nie iranien eee EEE EiS 177 Pulsers dialog boxon veces ciate nce E A E E 177 PTG Triggers tab page miesien eee tea tet we T a eaa 178 PTG Gating tab page miin meae EE E e E SEEE 178 Repetitive Gatmg Setup isc ieiet ieaie arrie a aa non 179
110. The A file is compared pixel by pixel with the B file and the smaller of the two values written to the C file It is also possible to compare each pixel of the A file with a constant entered on the B tab page with the smaller of the two values written to the C file MAX The A file is compared pixel by pixel with the B file and the larger of the two values written to the C file It is also possible to compare each pixel of the A file with a constant entered on the B tab page with the larger of the two values written to the C file Non Linear Operations Log10 The Log10 of the A file is computed pixel by pixel and the results written to the C file Natural Log The natural log of the A file is computed pixel by pixel and the results written to the C file Square Root The square root of each point in the A file is computed and the result written to the corresponding point of the C file Squared Each point in the A file is squared and the result written to the corresponding point of the C file 138 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Absolute The absolute value of each point in the A file is computed and the result written to the corresponding point of the C file Bitwise Operations AND A bitwise AND operation is performed on the binary representation of each pixel of the A file and each pixel of the B file with the result written to the C file A twelve bit example follows Bits Decimal Value Pixel value in A 010101010101 1365
111. This saves the background filename for all future data acquisitions or until the Background is turned off The filename entered in the Background box will be subtracted from each new file before it is displayed or stored If both Flatfield and Background are selected the background will be subtracted first before the flatfield correction Background Subtraction with Intensified Detectors To properly perform background subtraction with an intensified detector a new background must be acquired whenever the intensifier gain setting is changed This is necessary because changing the intensifier gain also affects the dark charge of the intensifier EBI Chapter 11 Correction Techniques 133 Flatfield Correction Flatfield correction allows you to divide out small nonuniformities in gain from pixel to pixel The instructions below set the flatfield correction to be performed before data are saved to RAM or disk Acquiring a Flatfield File This operation is similar to normal data acquisition 1 Use exactly the same temperature setting as will be used in data collection Wait at least 30 minutes after the detector has reached operating temperature to ensure stability 2 Set the same binning parameters and ROL If you plan to use a background file with data collection on the Experiment Setup dialog select Background and enter the name of the background file This background file will be subtracted from the flatfield file before it is save
112. Windows Explorer Spectrograph Support Loads drivers for Acton and or Spex spectrographs Pulser Support Loads the pulser drivers Currently supported pulsers include the PTG the PG200 and the DG535 Timing Generator drives the PI MAX pulsing circuits 24 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Snap Ins Loads the selected Snap In files When a Snap In is installed its button will be added to the Snap In toolbar PI Screen Saver Loads the PI Screen Saver PI Shell Extension Provides additional SPE file properties pages Right click on SPE file name and select Properties With PI Shell Extension deselected only the standard Windows 95 file property page will appear With PI Shell Extension selected additional property pages will appear Visual Basic User Interface Allows DLLs programmed using Visual Basic 5 or higher to be executed from WinSpec 32 Options Allows you to install or uninstall the Imaging option Installing the PCI Card Driver Administrator privileges are required under Windows NT 2000 and XP to install software and hardware Before installing the PCI card in your computer turn the computer off Follow the instructions supplied with your computer for installing an internal card and install the PCI card After you have secured the card in the computer and replaced the cover turn the computer on When Windows boots it will try to install the new hardware If it cannot locate the driver you will be pro
113. Y 1 Z 1 l 4709 Figure 150 Example Cross Sections of an ROI Procedure 1 Select Cross Section from the Process Input Parameters Output menu m Mathmatical Type 2 On the Input tab page if the correct input image does not appear in the Input Image box enter the complete file name or search for a file using the browser accessed by the button to the right of the field C Sum m Cross Sectional Type 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed C Cross Section Cross Section 4 If you want to process only part of the Input CRN Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively draw an ROI in the active window using the mouse and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog Mouse Apply Close Help box to enter those values Figure 151 Cross Section Parameters 5 On the Parameters tab page select either tab page Sum or Average If Sum is selected all pixel values in the X Y or Z direction according to whether X Cross Section Y Cross Section or Z Cross Section is selected will be summed to generate the output If Average is selected the average of all of the pixel values in the X Y or Z direction will be summed to produce the output 166 WinSpec 32 Manual Cross Section whichever is wanted Version 2 5 C On the Parameters tab page select X Cross Section Y Cross Section or Z Enter
114. acquire a background with the shutter open or if the Acquire Background feature is too restrictive in some other way a background file can be collected as a normal data file Once the file is collected and stored enter the filename in the Background Subtract filename box on the Experiment Setup Data Corrections tab page see Figure 125 131 132 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Setting Automatic Background Subtraction These steps instruct the software to Experiment Setup automatically subtract a previously stored DE oe eee background file from each new data Main DataFile ROI Setup Data Corrections acquisition e p Arithmetic 1 Select Experiment Setup from the Acquisition menu This will open the Experiment Setup dialog box I Flatfield S14 2 Click on the Data Corrections tab The Data Corrections tab page will be selected Figure 125 r CCD Blemishes iF pie Ray Removal OFF 3 Click on the Background checkbox to turn Boo Temporal on background subtraction Type in the Blemish Meme Spatial name of a background file if it is in the Ei sanctity current directory Alternatively click on jo 4 the button at the end of the entry window to open the file browser to select the background file if it is in a different Acquire HER Cancel Help directory Figure 125 Data Corrections tab page 4 Once the Background filename has been entered click on the OK button
115. ailure to satisfy this prerequisite will generate an error message Chapter 14 Gluing Spectra 147 The glued data will be collected as a M Glued Output Data File Name p Raw Data Files Setup series of TT incremental files Starting Incremental File Name These files will then be used to create a r Gluing Parameters single glued data Starting Value 4 File Names Template file Enter the name of the File Name Ending Value T Template such as ihi c File Increment Value p Minimum Overlap m EXP in the File a I Names Template Final Resolution aie box There is Units Paoint eset After Each Run I Always Use Default provision for setting the starting File ee aN fun a cance J p As each incremental file is taken the File Figure 133 Step and Glue Setup dialog box Increment Value will increment by one If the Reset After Each Run box is checked the File Increment Value will reset to one and the subsequent set of incremental files will overwrite the first If the Reset After Each Run box is unchecked the File Increment Values assigned to the next and subsequent runs will start with the next digit after the last one used No files will be overwritten Enter the Starting Value the Ending Value and the Minimum Overlap in the units selected A good overlap would be about ten times the coverage of a single pixel To determine the coverage o
116. aintenance Note When WinSpec 32 is installed it modifies the Windows Registry file If for any reason you reinstall Windows the Registry file may be replaced and WinSpec 32 may not run correctly Reinstall WinSpec 32 to correct this problem Install Uninstall WinSpec 32 Components at a Later Time After you have installed WinSpec 32 you may want to install additional WinSpec 32 files or to uninstall selected files To do so 1 Start the installation program and on the WinSpec WinView WinXTest Selection dialog box Figure 192 select Install WinSpec 32 for Windows ROPER SCIENTIFIC BEYOND IMAGING Software Installation CD instali WinSpec 32 for Windows install WinView 32 for Windows W install WinxTest for Windows BACK W Exit installation CD Copyright 2000 Roper Scientific Inc Trenton NJ USA Figure 192 WinSpec WinView or WinXTest Selection dialog box 2 Because WinSpec 32 was previously installed the WinSpec Maintenance dialog box Figure 193 will be displayed 229 230 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C WinS pec 32 for Windows Setup Welcome Modify repair or remove the program 9 Figure 193 Maintenance dialog box 3 Select the Modify radio button and click on Next WinS pec 32 for Windows Setup Media Password Enter your password Iistallotela Figure 194 Media Password dialog box 4 On the Media Password dialog box enter the passw
117. and l easily access the correct folder i or As shown in Figure 52 the data Image C Graph C 3D Graph files will be listed below 3 Ifyou want the software to Figure 52 Open dialog box control how the data will be displayed when the file is opened check Auto Select Leave Auto Select unchecked if you want to retain control over whether the data will be displayed as an Image Graph or 3D Graph Display Layout 69 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Auto Select is the factory default selection In addition one of the three radio buttons Image Graph or 3D Graph will be selected but grayed out if Auto Select is checked If Auto Select is unchecked the grayed out selection will become active and govern how the file is opened e When Auto Select is checked the way the data is displayed depends on the number of data strips it contains gt If there are eleven or more strips of data they will be displayed as a normal image such as that shown in Figure 96 page 109 gt If there are at least three data strips but less than eleven the data will be plotted as a 3D Graph as shown in Figure 75 page 95 gt If there are only two strips of data they will be displayed as graphs stacked in a two dimensional plot the same as for a 3D Graph of two strips See page 94 gt A single strip will always be plotted as a simple X vs Y plot Note that from two to ten strips the intensity Y axis scale shift
118. ange the camera name to one that is more specific or you can keep the default name Cameral When you have finished click on the Done button Note If the first camera in the list is not the Princeton Style USB2 you will need to edit the PVCAM INI file created by RSConfig See the instructions in Demo High Speed PCI and PCI Timer are Choices on Hardware Wizard Interface dialog page 237 26 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C RSConfig 2 6 x m Names Style Camera 1 Camerat Princeton Style USB2 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Camera 8 Figure 1 RSConfig dialog box Open WinSpec and from Setup Hardware run the Hardware Wizard When the PVCAM dialog box Figure 2 is displayed click in the Yes radio button click on Next and continue through the Wizard After the Wizard is finished the Controller Camera tab card will be displayed with the Use PVCAM checkbox selected You should now be able to set up experiments and acquire data PVCAM x Are you using a PYCAM supported camera Yes C No coc e Figure 2 Hardware Wizard PVCAM dialog box Changing Installed Components Repairing or Uninstalling Reinstalling WinSpec 32 Refer to Appendix F Starting WinSpec 32 Before starting WinSpec 32 follow the hardware interconnection and power up instructions in the hardware manuals supplied with your system Then open the Windows
119. are controlled by the PTG If the Cameratise Deen Seuneucele Medel system is equipped with a PI MAX camera Select The Desired Action the Camera State dialog box Figure 163 aly is will appear when the software is started Although the software always initially Restore To Last Setting places the PI MAX in Safe mode you have the option of restarting with the last setting Shutter Mode or Gate Mode Figure 163 Camera State dialog box 1 Following the intensifier precautions stated ENS in the hardware manuals turn on the a Caen arhte PIRAS Controller PTG installed Zf the C PG200 Controller isn t turned on the WinSpec 32 C DGS software won t be able to control the PTG pas Setup PTG 2 On the Setup menu select Pulsers to open the Pulsers dialog box roe 3 Select PTG Then click on the Setup oe Pulser button The PTG dialog box Figure Hep 165 will open If PTG is grayed out on the Pulsers dialog box PTG support has not Figure 164 Pulsers dialog box been installed 178 10 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Select the Trigger mode either HE x Internal in which the PTG free runs or External in which it is m Input Trigger Mode if nternal Frequency n00 gt Internal TEGUENGY 1000 He Triggers Gating Aux Trig Out If operating in the Internal trigger mode set the trigger Frequency in Hz Threshold 4 gt Volts If operating in the External Slope Co
120. arting a data collection A prompt will still be issued if you close the file explicitly and it has not been saved since being collected Use a New Window for each run Leave unchecked Chapter 4 Initial Image Data Collection 65 9 Click onthe button to the SESS egree 2 x right of the Name field Towern apa deade This will open a browse yA 256strip box Select the directory 1035strip SPE LA 2sttip SF where you want the stored 10morestrip SPE AA 3001 SPI file to go In the example 10strip SPE PA 3stiip SF illustrated the file name is 16strip SPE 2 strames TESTFILE1 and it will be li AG adiusts stored in a directory named gt Data If the file name doesn t automatically Filename testiet appear in the browse box Save as type winx Data spe 7 Cancel i type it in The file type should be WinX Data Figure 47 File Browse dialog box spe 10 Click on the Save button to save the entered information Acquistion Calbnation Toc and return to the Experiment Setup dialog box ERS an 11 Click on OK This will close the Experiment Setup Uz dialog box Epes Focus 12 Once again click on Acquisition in the Menu bar Video Focus Again the Acquisition menu will appear as shown in Sees Fi 48 Exposure Intensity gure i Easy Bin Step and Glue Readout lime Acquire Background Acquire Flat Field Video Pose leounter Stop cauisition Start Storage Figure 4
121. ate of dark current generation by a factor of 20 or more relaxing CCD cooling requirements to the level where a thermoelectric cooler is sufficient for most applications Also called inverted operation NVRAM Non Volatile Random Access Memory NVRAM contains factory programmed information about the controller and in many cases the camera detector Process button Causes the specified operation or process to be performed The process is performed on the data specified on the Input tab page and saved using the file name and data type specified on the Output tab page PVCAM Programmable Virtual Camera Access Method An exclusive Roper Scientific universal programming interface A set of software library routines that implements a detector or camera s operations in a hardware independent platform independent or virtual suite of function calls Once an application has been written to control one PVCAM enabled camera all PYCAM enabled cameras are then compatible with that application ROI Region of interest A user defined rectangular area a square is common on a CCD that is exposed and processed as an image Shutter Compensation Time The time it takes for a mechanical shutter to open or close This time needs to be accounted for during hardware setup so the software can allow enough time for the shutter to open before starting data acquisition and allow enough time for it to close before reading out the array Warranty amp S
122. aters deen ph eerie ecb cee ots 134 Math dialoy DOX sseni soree nene ere atest hasseets er iere ia eiaa 135 Operation tab page sonsonen ioten rae e A eee eee 137 Y T Area and Equation Setup dialog DOX oe eee eeeeseeseecneeenreeeeeeeeensees 142 Processes tab Pagesa iere ei aa i the E aet ieia 142 YT Setupdidlog boR ve asa e ee eg a r ee aia renie n teases 143 Post Process Glue dialog DOX cece cesccssecsseceseceseeeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeneesnaeenaees 145 Step and Glue Setup dialog DOX wo eee eeseceseceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeneeenaeenaees 147 Input tab page isei sesiiasceeeealevvseacecesctacees iol ses ieee A EE e E a 151 Output tab page co cc sheet ea iia eet eae eta 151 Edge Enhancement Parameters tab page ceeceeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeseeeeeensees 152 Original Image left and Edge detected Image right eee eeeeee 153 Sharpening Parameters tab page 0 0 ce sceeceeccseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeneeeneeeneeenaees 154 Original Image left and Smoothed Image right 155 Smoothing Parameters tab page ces ceecesceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeenaeenaees 155 Morphological Parameters tab page eeeeeseeseeeseeeseecseeeeeeeneeeaaeenaees 156 Original Image left and Dilated Image right eee esee cere eeeeee 156 Original Image left and Eroded Image right eee eee eesecereeneeee 156 Original Image left and Opened Image with Three Iterations right 157 Filter Matrix tab pade eaei antirino te ae ti otera stupas teres 158 Look Up
123. ation for the individual spectrometer setup and dialog boxes is provided in the online Help Experiment Setup Procedure 1 Open the Experiment Setup dialog box Figure 31 from the Acquisition menu ADC Timing Processes Save Load ADC Timing Processes Save Load Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections m Exposure Time r Exposure Time fa sec 7 o o00 sec z 1 C Number of Spectra fi Number of Images f1 m CCD Readout m CCD Readout Use FullChip Use Region Of Interest Use FullChip Use Region Of Interest Readout Dimensions X 653 Y 492 Readout Dimensions X 512 Y 512 Accumulations Accumulations Number 0 Number fi Amplifier ifi High Capacity Low Noise O High Capacity Low Noise m Avalanche Gain m Intensifier Gain 0 J Enable C Shutter Cw Mode Gain 1128 C Gate Mode Safe Mode Acquire Focus OK Cancel Help Acquire Focus OK Cancel Hep Figure 31 Experiment Setup dialog box Main tab page left all but PI MAX right PI MAX 2 On the Main tab page set the following parameters Exposure time 0 1 seconds For PI MAX system using PTG enter 0 sec Number of Spectra 1 Use Full Chip selected Accumulations 1 Gain PI MAX only 128 54 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Amplifier if available High
124. be acquired Using Easy Bin select a single strip of several rows near the center of the CCD and an exposure time between 0 1 and 0 5 seconds A filename should have been entered for the test acquisitions using the Data File tab page Experiment Setup dialog box Also Overwrite Confirmation should be turned off so you won t see warning messages about overwriting data files Exit the Experiment Setup dialog box by clicking on the OK button Acquire some data and display the data as a graph Next position and size the data window We suggest locating it at the upper left and sizing it so that it doesn t extend more than half way across the screen Then select Keep Window Placement on the Display Layout General tab page followed clicking on OK This operation assures that all data windows will fall in precisely the same spot and will be precisely the same size a configuration that conveys a significant convenience advantage when calibrating Notes 1 You must use the supplied cable to control the spectrograph Do not use a standard 9 pin serial cable even if it worked with an earlier version of WinSpec If the spectrograph does not move or you get an error message such as Communication Error with Spectrograph the spectrograph setup is probably incorrect Check the power on the spectrograph the cable connections and the settings in the Spectrograph dialog Also try turning off and back on the spectrograph then closing and reo
125. be opened with any ASCII text editor WinX_readme doc This is a read me file that contains the latest information on new features fixed problems and work arounds for issues not yet solved WinX32 Automation 3 X for Visual Basic pdf This file is stored in the directory when the Visual Basic User Interface component is selected during installation It describes how to create your own Snap Ins by using Visual Basic Professional Edition and the WinX32 Automation files Requires Adobe Acrobat Reader WinX32 Programming for Macro Record pdf This file is stored in the directory when the Macro option is installed It provides detailed information on how to create and edit macro programs for WinSpec 32 Requires Adobe Acrobat Reader The Macro option is not supplied with the standard WinSpec 32 program Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 To ensure that the computer you have can operate the Princeton Instruments equipment please first read the system requirements below carefully WinSpec 32 s requirements differ from those of previous versions of WinSpec After confirming that your computer meets all hardware and software requirements install WinSpec 32 according to the instructions in this chapter Do not attempt to run the software until you have read Chapters 2 3 and 4 which discuss important hardware setup and data acquisition issues Also it is recommended that you install the Princeton Instruments interface board in your comp
126. ber c have multiple PCI cards installed in the host couo W computer Figure 15 shows all of the fields es and checkboxes that exist on the Interface MO Address tab page WinSpec 32 will display and hide 1 0 Address 2 features based on the interface card installed in the host computer All of the features are described in the text that follows 1 0 Address 3 Type Select the communications type that will be used to transmit data from the controller to the computer All communications types are not available for all controllers and computers The Demo selection Cancel Help which allows the software to be exercised but which doesn t support Figure 17 Interface tab page data transfer to the computer would not ordinarily be used in the field High Speed PCI Select if a PI PCI high speed serial Interface card is installed in your computer and you want data transfer to be interrupt driven This choice would give the highest performance in most situations PCI Timer Allows data transfer to be controlled by a polling timer if using PCI high speed serial Interface card Useful for troubleshooting possible interrupt problems computer crashes or system fails to return data Note that data transfer is slower in PCI Timer mode and data overrun more likely Also PCI Timer cannot be used to continuously acquire small Regions of Interest in asynchronous operation PCI Timer isn t compatible with Use Interrupts operation a t
127. box Figure 122 click on re pases the appropriate radio button uena Start Pixel End Pixel Center 1 Establishes an ROI one pixel high fi Av fre Center 10 Establishes an ROI 10 pixel high Aiea lls aI as Center 100 Establishes an ROI 100 pixel high SEU ok Cancel Hel All Selects the full chip height Lek ceea Hee User Defined Allows you to set the Slit Y axis Figure 122 Easy Bin dialog box Start and End pixels If you have a full chip image displayed you can use the mouse cursor to create the bounding box for the ROI Since all Easy Bin ROIs are full chip width only the box s height parameters will be used 3 Ifyou have selected User Defined enter the start and end pixels This allows you to create an ROI that is not centered vertically on the chip 4 Click on OK when you have finished To define multiple ROIs ROIs that are not full chip width and or ROIs that are not centered vertically on the chip use the ROI Setup functions accessible from the Experiment Setup dialog box Chapter 10 ROI Definition amp Binning 129 Defining ROIs by Keyboard entry 1 Open the Experiment Setup dialog and Experiment Setup click on the ROI Setup tab to open the ROI DE avg ees e Setup tab page Figure 123 Main DataFile ROI Setup Data Corrections 2 Select the appropriate mode Imaging or Nea Ponca ir Number Stacad 0 Spectroscopy If you don t have the Imaging option the Imaging Mode and Spectrosc
128. button The view will change so that only the selected region is displayed as shown in Figure 99 Note The Display Layout Cursor tab page allows you to change how the ROI region is displayed Clickon the Mill Wado Zoom tn Button The original view will be restored 4 5 Q Q Afq 1 111 s4 Circuit spe 268 X 248 X 1 on b POLST EET or Y A a UY nm 7 ai 75 Z A Figure 98 Circuit spe with Region Selected for Viewing Figure 99 Circuit spe Expanded to show Defined Region 112 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Opening the Display Layout dialog box With the image still open select Layout from the Display menu The Display Layout dialog box General Range Color Axes 3D Layout Image Layout Cursor Display Type Axes Cross Sections Tukonen tigi 100 noe aes T Auto Select M Horizontal I Horizontal you can also access the Display ee Layout dialog box by clicking on C Image ud baited i x nA the Display Layout button of the BHE Maiba Open dialog box Figure 100 Display Layout dialog box Viewing Axes and Cross Sections 1 Still in the Display Layout Default Display Layout x dialog box select Axes Horizontal Axes Vertical e E Cross Sections Horizontal and Mi 3 J7 Live Auto All Scans z l Cross Sections Vertical Refer From E a jas fess to the online Help for General Range
129. c Shutter Active Between Images These modes are in addition to Free Run mode MPP This checkbox may appear if the CCD array is designed for MPP multi pinned phase operation When this box is checked the array will be run in MPP mode Some MPP capable arrays can also be run in Non MPP mode MPP box is unchecked Running in Non MPP mode may result in higher dark current in addition to larger full well capacity Note MPP capability reduces the rate of dark current generation by a factor of 20 or more and thus relaxes CCD cooling requirements to the level where a thermoelectric cooler is sufficient for most applications LOGIC OUT Output The choices for the signal provided at the controller s SCAN Output connector vary based on the selected Controller If the LOGIC OUT field doesn t appear on the tab page the choice of output may be done via an internal jumper for information on how to set the jumper contact factory Tech Support Depending on your system the following choices may appear in the drop down list Cleaning This signal is high when an array Clean cycle is in progress and otherwise low Logic 0 Establishes a TTL logic 0 at the Logic Out connector Logic 1 Establishes a TTL logic 1 at the Logic Out connector Note LOGIC 0 and LOGIC 1 can be used to control an external device using the application software Not FT Image Shift This signal is low when a frame transfer shift is in progress and otherwise high Not
130. cesecnseceeeseeeseeeseeseneeeaes 110 Circuit spe with Region Selected for Viewing ceeecesecsseceseceeeeeeeeee 111 Circuit spe Expanded to show Defined Region ese eeeesseesseceseceteeeeeeees 111 Display Layout dialog OX oieri ieseni 112 Range tab page czocz cc cist wahitecisenees aby etepenie ete eter eee e eee aa 112 Selecting the Large Cursor ccesccssscssscetscecesesonsecetcoeecscereoereceesseetseeees 112 Circuit spe with Axes and Cross Section cceeseceseceseceseceneceseeeseeeeeeee 113 Information DOR nieee aes kee ee aed a insta nine ae 113 AXES TAD PAS isveceues wxhaie cd ve cceabes aa E a a ese ins terns 114 Ponts didog DOX w cssccs fe iteuce soe actin ee bes Relea oe boca etd abe cee 114 Color tab pa enie annarr ten Tee ae e a alti aa 114 Display Layout Color Palette 00 ee eecesceseceseceseeeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeaeesaaeenaees 115 Clean Cycles in Freerun Operation eee eee eeseeeseeeneeeneeeeeeeeseeeseeeneeenaees 119 Cleans Skips tab page neri niensis atre need Gudea teen ote 120 Timing Tab page External Sync with Continuous Cleans Selected 120 External Sync Timing Diagram eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeenaeenaees 121 External Sync with Continuous Cleans Timing Diagram eee 121 Cleans Skips tab page Continuous Cleans Instruction eeeeeeeeeeees 122 Assumed CCD Array Orientation cece eeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeneeeaeeeaaeenaees 123 Single Full width ROL Saoi ae
131. ck the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values 5 Define the filter by entering the appropriate values in the Filter Matrix 6 Click on Apply to begin processing Chapter 15 Post Acquisition Mask Processes 159 Look Up Table Input Look Up Table l Output Look Up Table tab page The Look Up Table function uses an ASCII text file provided by the user to Input LUT Setup File translate pixel intensities from an input file mre H into different intensities in an output file D win Data Files LUT1 txt The input file must be a raw data file Create Binay LUT unsigned 16 bit image since the Look Up Table mapping assumes a 0 65536 range of intensity values in the input file The map file is a previously created text file refer to pages 160 and 161 for descriptions of the LUT formats that must be converted to a binary map file for the actual operation After the text file is selected clicking on the Create Binary LUT button converts the text information to binary format Ee aw ws e Clicking on Apply then remaps the image intensities and redraws the data display window appropriately Figure 146 Look Up Table Look Up Table Procedure Use the following procedure to process data using the LUT 1 Select Look Up Table from the Process menu 2 Using the Input and Output tab pages enter the Input and Output file names 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the
132. click on Delete to delete all of the selected files Chapter 6 Wavelength Calibration Introduction You can calibrate the WinSpec 32 software either by using the spectrograph stepper motor position Spectrograph calibration or by performing a wavelength calibration Spectrograph calibration described in Chapter 7 precisely calibrates the movement of the spectrograph gratings Wavelength Calibration is good for one position of the grating only Once you move the grating by hand or by controlling the stepper motor a different wavelength calibration must be performed for that spectrograph position Note Even after the spectrograph setting is fixed moving the sample refocusing or almost any adjustment of the input optics can have an effect on the wavelength calibration For the most accurate calibration possible Roper Scientific recommends recalibrating the system after any optical adjustment Changing the WinSpec 32 Calibration Method Switching between Wavelength Calibration and Spectrograph Calibration is controlled using the Usage dialog box This dialog box determines whether calibration is turned on or off and which type of calibration is used The display can be calibrated by controlling the stepper motor of the spectrograph called Spectrograph Calibration discussed in Chapter 7 or the display can be calibrated for a fixed spectrograph position by entering the position of known peaks from a known source such as a mercury or neon
133. components for installation by checking and unchecking the boxes associated with the components Allows you to install the drivers for SPEX spectrographs Installing from the CD 1 2 Exit any software currently running This will speed the installation of WinSpec 32 Insert the WinSpec 32 CD into your CD drive Windows will detect the CD and the installation will begin automatically Note If the auto start feature has been disabled on your computer click the desktop Start button select Run key x Setup where x is the letter designating your CD drive and press the Enter key on your keyboard The install sequence will begin Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 23 Caution If your CD drive doesn t support the Windows long filenames attempting the installation causes the filenames to be truncated and the installation fails generating an error message like An error occurred during the move data process 113 Component Application WinXSystem File Group WinXSystem If this should happen see Appendix E for workarounds 3 Click on the program that you want to install If you have clicked on Install WinSpec 32 or WinView 32 you will be given additional choices on the next dialog box 4 After selecting the program follow the instructions provided on the dialog boxes and continue with the installation process You can abort the installation at any time by clicking on Cancel and following the instructions
134. csaecaecaeesseceseenseeees 76 Saye as Default cusses ctsevtcewttas uacereiaetea faa ea eaa ETE SASS eon en E I ETOSAN TES 80 Calibration Display and User Units cece ceecesceeeceseeeseeeeseeeaeeeaeecsaecaecaecsaeenseesseeees 80 Calibration Method sis cise cadeeeh sins Sahel as cad iw Sane estas oe aie 81 Chapter 7 Spectrograph Calibration cccccsseseeeneesseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeseeneeneenees 83 WntrOduct Onis s viigecsveeceen tcl cssstegs tees te ottetba th ieetieed cess ies ecareadn Sata tere ier ates 83 Preparation soannen bat seein Seiad Aen et Gis oud shaun eres 83 Calibration Parameters sannari ioeina abbas R i aae i aE a 84 Offset eaen dane eate eara e sues a a e caw se ar ee aapear a anata eni 86 ACUSUi neoaeae r eaa cee ate E EE TE EE E A T ee 88 Dispersion neier eon e a Gite a e aar tn Rae east Ei 90 Chapter 8 Displaying the Data cccccsssseeneeesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeenseeneeeeeenes 93 IntrOductiOn a n E E AE aA ae A A a UE oe 93 Screen Refresh Rate iero niare r EE conte TE Wane aie Cea cee BOS 94 Data Displayed as a 3D Graphire eeaeee a e aa a eiae ii aiee 95 Data Window Context Menu voycn rieron ai ia e E E ENET E A T 104 Labeling Graphs and Images 2000 00 e iea a i i a aeae aea eean 104 Data Displayed as an Mage Arre nieee aE E EEE A EEE E a E EE 108 Part 2 Advanced TOpics ccccsssccseseesseseeeeneeeseseeseeeeee DET Chapter Se ING zat rnc tre es a trea ret eee 119 TNtrOGUCt
135. csaecaeenseesseenseeees 57 Figure 38 Acquisition MENU i ccsscicc cceetveses orisii e anet i aE REA RTE E e R ia 57 Figure 39 Typical Mercury Argon Spectrum eesssessesesressesrtssesrresrsriestestrsesrisseesreses 58 Figure 40 Temperature dialog DOX essssessssesessseseereseesestessesressesrtesesreestentestesesreeeesee 60 Figure 41 Experiment Setup Main tab page left all but PI MAX right PI MAX 61 Figure 42 Timing tab pagerina eia ala i ie i TE 62 Figure 43 Data Corrections tab page esssersessreesesressesrtssersrsstesressesrieseentrseesesressestes 62 Figure 44 Generic ADC tab P l ereraa eneren iinit e R E EE 63 Figure 45 ROI tab page imaging selected 0 0 ee ee eeseeeseeeneeeeecseecaecaecnseesseenseeess 64 Figure 46 Data File dialog DOX seinors nida a a i iet ia i 64 Figure 47 File Browse dialog DOXsic insite eerten paa eo iee iai ieie a aaa 65 Fig re 48 Acquisition Men 22 e sciccejechevesdtanesteeeceusssdasuscesdeceuteetedesceescededentabescoeevbaercetee 65 Figure 49 MicroMAX or ST 133 Interactive Camera dialog box s es 66 Figure 50 PentaMAX Interactive Operation dialog bOX esessseesseeeesesreereereeresressssre 67 Figure 51 Typical Data Acquisition Image e seeeeseeeeesesresseestesresresresressesressesrieseesresre 68 Figure 52 Open dialog box secs ici ws vate delcinist eae schist dee eet eek EAN 69 Figure 53 High Intensity Lamp Spectrum 00 eee eeeeeseeeseeeseeeseecnseceseceaeceseecsaecnaee
136. ct unsigned int float unsigned int fastfile 16 asynen datatype calibnan 10 BackGrndApplied astdiode minblk numminb1lk calibpol 4 ADCrate ADCtype ADCresolution ADCbitAdjust gain exprem 5 80 geometric xlabel 16 cleans NumSkpPerCln califile 16 bkgdfile 16 srccmp ydim scramble lexpos lnoscan lavgexp stripfil 16 version 16 type flatFieldApplied spare 8 kin_trig_ mode empty 702 clkspd_us HWaccumF lag StoreSync BlemishApplied CosmicApplied CosmicType CosmicThreshold NumF rame s MaxIntensity MinIntensity ylabel LABELMAX ShutterType shutterComp readoutMode Data Structure 90 106 108 110 150 152 154 156 158 190 192 194 196 198 200 600 602 618 620 622 638 654 656 658 660 664 668 672 688 704 706 708 724 726 1428 1432 1434 1436 1438 1440 1442 1446 1450 1454 1458 1474 1476 1480 name of pixel control file asynchron enable flag 0 off experiment data type On FLOATING POINT L LONG INTEGER 2 5 INTEGER 3 UNSIGNED INTEGER calibration nanometer set to 1 if background sub done min
137. d Figure 66 Offset dialog box 5 Figure 68 illustrates a typical Offset data acquisition The reference peak should appear near the center of the display and the cursor should be near or on the highest point of the peak If the peak is saturated cancel lower the exposure time and repeat the operation The display X axis should be calibrated any units other than pixels If the X axis is calibrated in pixels select the desired units as the calibration units on the Usage dialog box opened by selecting Usage from the Calibration menu Peak Finder Before going on you have to make a judgment regarding the location of the cursor on the peak There may be situations where you will need to readjust the cursor position to get it precisely on the correct location Although this should be a relatively uncommon event it could happen and it is important to take a moment to understand how the peak finder works how it may appear to be in error when it in fact it is not and how it could come to be in error and require manual intervention to correct the cursor position The peak finder works by taking the second derivative of the spectrum to find the peaks Each peak found is then divided in two so that the area to the left of the divider equals the area to the right of the divider The cursor is located at precisely the point where the divider intersects the peak Note that depending on the shape of the peak the cursor may or may not end up precisely
138. d grating is incorrect click on the arrow at the right of the selection box to display the available gratings and make the correct selection Be sure the indicated value for the 85 Spectrograph Calibration X Spectrograph To Calibrate f cton SP150 on COM1 7 Grating To Calibrate 600 is Detector Pixel Width 50 El ea Magnification fi Leat Grating Movement Mode Slew Faster i Calibration Procedures Offset Adjust Dispersion Cancel Help Figure 65 Spectrograph Calibration dialog box Detector Pixel Width in microns is correct The default value will depend on the type of CCD chip installed Note that some design factors such as a tapered fiber optic ahead of the chip will change the pixel size seen by the spectrograph and so will have to be taken into account in determining the value to be entered Be sure the indicated Magnification value is correct for your spectrograph This parameter is determined by the geometry of the spectrograph Contact your spectrograph manufacturer if you have any questions about the magnification parameter value Select the Grating Movement Mode Slew or Scan Operation with Slew selected will be significantly faster than with Scan selected 86 Offset Caution WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C You must begin calibration with the Offset procedure and end with the Dispersion procedure Performing the steps in thi
139. d to disk 3 Illuminate the detector uniformly The accuracy of this uniformity will be translated into an accurate flatfield correction 4 Select Acquire Flatfield from the Acquisition menu Figure 48 This will immediately acquire a flatfield file using the Experiment Setup parameters Unlike background subtraction the shutter will open and close normally 5 If background subtraction was selected the background file will be subtracted from the flatfield file before it is saved to disk If the Acquire Flatfield feature is found to be too limiting in some way a flatfield file can be collected as a normal data file Once the file is collected enter the filename in the Flatfield Correction filename box on the Experiment Setup Data Corrections tab page see Figure 125 Automatic Flatfield Correction These steps instruct the software to automatically divide each new data file pixel by pixel by the specified flatfield file 1 Select Experiment Setup from the Acquisition menu This will open the Experiment Setup dialog box 2 Click on the Data Corrections tab to select the Data Corrections tab page Figure 125 3 Click on the Flatfield checkbox to turn on Flatfield correction Type in the name of a flatfield correction file in the current directory Alternatively click on the button at the end of the field to open the file browser to select the flatfield correction file if it is in a different directory 4 Once the Flatfield
140. d to where the laser Laser Wavelength 514 532 nm light would be visible to the MV Wam When Crossing Laser Line detector This is critical for detectors that could be damaged if exposed to Install Z Remove Spectrograph high light levels Also it will be necessary to enter the laser wavelength if you plan to work with units of relative wavenumbers Cancel Help e To allow WinSpec 32 to display Figure 29 Entering the Laser Line in units of relative Define Spectrograph Main tab page wavenumbers enter a Laser Wavelength in nanometers to as many significant digits as desired e Ifyou have a bright laser line check the Warn when Crossing Laser Line box and enter the Laser Wavelength in nm WinSpec 32 will display a warning message whenever the wavelength range viewable by the detector might fall on or pass through the laser line The Warn When Crossing Laser Line is no guarantee that the detector will not be damaged by overexposure The correct display of the warning depends on all calibration parameters being set correctly Changing or moving gratings may cause the laser to shine on the detector Always block the source when moving or changing the grating to avoid damage 50 WinSpec 32 Manual This page intentionally left blank Version 2 5 C Chapter 3 Initial Spectroscopic Data Collection Introduction The procedure in this chapter will enable you to begin collecting real data promptly Minimum requiremen
141. data is read and stored in this order First row read XnYm X2Ym X1Ym Last row read SOY Iy vao RAV Ty ALY X1Y1 X2Y1 Xny X1Y2 X2Y2 Xny2 IP n X1Ym 1 X2Ym 1 XnYm 1 v X1Ym X2Ym Xnym The data is stored as sequential points and the X Y and Frame dimensions are determined by the header The X dimension of the stored data is in xdim Offset 42 The Y dimension of the stored data is in ydim Offset 656 The number of frames of data stored is in NumFrames Offset 1446 Thus modifying the statements above Char header 4100 unsigned int X dimension unsigned int Y_ dimension long Num_frames Note that is now Direct Access of data dimensions X dimension unsigned int header 42 Y_ dimension unsigned int header 664 Num frames long header 1446 Appendix D Auto Spectro Wavelength Calibration Equations used in WinSpec Wavelength Calibration WinSpec 32 wavelength calibration is based on the grating equation for Czerny Turner or Ebert spectrographs see Figure 190 m d A sin amp sin B or A d m sin amp sin B 1 where A wavelength at the center of the image plane m diffraction order d distance between grooves the inverse of grooves per mm and a B angles of the incident and exit beam relative to the grating normal The angles o and B are related to the inclusion angle y and the rotational angle of the gra
142. dgetesel AEEA 134 Chapter 12 Spectra Math cisccciceess eee 135 INtrOdUCt ONY ce sitelcaists SA ies teeta tase eh es ee ast adele eee aise 135 Source Data and Destination Selection 0 0 eee ceseceseceseceeceseceeeesseeeeeeeeneeeaeeeaeeenaeenaees 135 C PCTALIONS scissile shee weed tee ote as ices esa at ate i a eee is 136 Operation DeSCriptiONs i nrinn ei aai E EE E E E S EE s 137 Procedur s ne ct eee is eee eK Se ee Meee 139 Chapter 13 Y T Analysis ccs ccceccestecacetetecectectecadetscceactectacavetaccenddscctacadetetteateetece 141 Introductions i eren ea e e ea oei cede etude E A e EE E a aa 141 Y TAnaAlySiS ProcedUTe s sicdtissactost at cdeetes sogerstnhobtietastetesccsateotes EAEE EEANN 141 Chapter 14 Gluing Spectra ununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 145 Introduction seeni na eaa a a ee dene ee sade 145 Gluing Existing Spectra s 1 20 cis weenie aed a n e ea 145 Steprand Glue sess i25 ici tee ie etidindei see Senile ence daniel eines 146 THOLY essen ee en ee a ee ae Re ee 148 Calibration and ROI Offsets 0 0 ee eecceeseeeseeeneeeeecaecaecesecssecsseecsaecsaeesseeeeesseessneeeaes 150 Chapter 15 Post Acquisition Mask Processes ssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 151 Introduction er thon athentieRa ahs E E ilan aint twa ed aes 151 Edge Enhancement 2 e250 ea e A ee i eects Sie 152 Sharpening PUNCUONS ss sie ec stetie tetra iin eles en ace Heese 154 Smoothing F n
143. displayed curve change to 245 reflect the change in the transfer function See the online Help for a detailed discussion of the palette and transfer function options 1 Change the brightness and contrast settings to obtain the most pleasing image display Note that clicking on the small square above the Brightness scale and above the Contrast scale will restore the default brightness and contrast values 50 Cancel Version 2 5 C Brightness Contrast x m Function Type Linear C Log C Square Histogram C Gaussian m Palette Type Grayscale Color I Inverted I Save As Default Help Figure 97 Brightness Contrast dialog box 2 Try different Function and Palette Type selections to see the effect on the displayed image Note that the displayed curve will also change reflecting the change in the brightness transfer function Until you gain more operating experience we suggest you leave the Function Type set to Linear the Palette to Grayscale and the Brightness and Contrast both to 50 3 Click on OK to close the box Any setting changes will be applied Chapter 8 Displaying the Data Selecting a Region of Interest 1 Using the mouse position the cursor at one corner of the region to be defined depress the left mouse button drag the cursor to the diagonally opposite corner and release the mouse button Refer to Figure 98 Click on the Zoom In
144. dium X ray direct detection PI MAX ICCD design with internal high voltage power and gating Controller is ST 133 and gating timing is provided by a DG535 PTG or other TTL timing source PI MTE Compact high sensitivity digital imaging system designed to deliver scientific performance inside high vacuum chambers over long operation times PI SCX X ray diffraction fiberoptically coupled detector PI SX High sensitivity deep vacuum interface for soft X ray acquisition SPEC 10 High performance spectroscopy system Wide variety of CCD arrays Thermoelectric or cryogenic cooling available SpectroMAX Name used for some ST 133 based spectroscopy systems usually with an RTE head VersArray High performance general purpose imaging system Wide variety of CCD arrays in imaging formats Thermoelectric or cryogenic cooling available VersArray High performance low light imaging system for astronomy MCP readout pressure sensitive paint PSP wind tunnel testing semiconductor failure analysis and streak tube readout applications Deep thermoelectric cooling air Controllers ST 121 Diode array controllers shipped with diode array detectors controlled by a PCI card ST 130 Obsolete controller but still supported in the WinSpec 32 software ST 133 Controller that can run the vast majority of Princeton Instruments brand cameras including MicroMAX PI MAX Spec 10 PI LCX PI MTE PI SCX PI SX OMA V and VersArray Diffe
145. dth Delay for 1 Exposure s Cancel Help Figure 175 Sequential Gating Setup dialog box where the effect under study changes rapidly at the start of an experiment and then slower and slower following a logarithmic curve as the experiment progresses The resulting data points can be spline fitted to generate the complete curve so that the decay constant can be calculated even where the data derives from two decay processes occurring simultaneously If the measurement is to be done in the sequential gating mode set the pulsing parameters as appropriate for your intended measurement and click on OK The Sequential Gating Setup dialog box will close and you return to the DG535 dialog box Parameters Number of Spectra With an Accumulations setting of one Number of Spectra equals the number of exposures each of which is followed by a readout After each exposure the Gate Width and Gate Delay change as programmed before the next exposure occurs If multiple Accumulations are programmed each exposure is repeated n times where n is the number of accumulations specified Every accumulation is processed before the gate delay and width change for the next shot The total number of exposures equals the specified Number of Spectra times the number of Accumulations Accumulations can be set on the DG535 Sequential Gating Setup dialog box and on the Experiment Setup Main tab page The two settings must be the same for proper o
146. dures Controller Specific ccecccccessccesseeceeneeceeeeeceeeeeenaeceeaeeeees 65 iv WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Focusi o sneri tient aaea e E a O ea ee T alate alee 65 Data Collectio trinties ie t A T E AA E E AE A 66 POCUSING 3 000 oin ee a o er a Er E RR E Haast ate dara ede Naa eet ae 67 Data Collections merone anaa E e a Ea i el reed tissu teats TE 68 Data Collection All Controllers sessen eeit aine iee niai Rai 68 Chapter 5 Opening Closing and Saving Data Files 0eeeeeee 69 INtroduetiOm ss ceten hee eect hatch cee c ace ces Eea a a E E Rec E REE 69 Opening Data Biles iiisscscceetes ienten oenen EEO N nae Ee Ea E a Eet 69 Sayma Data FeS oa eA ee e a a lee a r A E ieee E E 72 Closinga Data Fil ciict secre shiecetissieetelakewetoes oree ea E O EA EEE debe de lelgoee otek 73 Deleting Data Biles aian ro ei e ile cise teeeeede E O e e A E A AEE bie 74 Chapter 6 Wavelength Calibration sssunssnunnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne 75 Introd cti n seers ais eE EIE T Satie EEES EEEE EEE E ETA S 75 Changing the WinSpec 32 Calibration Method esseseeeseseeeeesssresresressesressrrsresresressesees 75 Changing the Calibration Method 00 cece eeceeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeseecsaecsaecsaeecaaecnaecsaecsaeenaeenseeees 75 Calibration MeN a sss sient ces sah asst eee ck sas ea ee aetna eve a RS vanes 76 Wavelength Calibration Procedure cece ceecescesecesecesceesseeeseeeseeeaee
147. e 136 Frames ioussi eels nti ni 135 Input Output file name 135 X and Y Range eee 135 Procedu iiiter E 139 Mathematical Models wavelength calibration 81 MAX math operation eee 137 Memory requirement eee eeeeeeees 19 MicroMAX RSTO type seein ainser 36 shutter t pa irisean reia 35 user defined chip eseseesseeseeeesreeeeee 37 user defined timing eee 37 MIN math operation eee eee 137 Morphological ParaMeters wis ieh aes 156 PLOCEGUIS anorni nnii 157 MO SECUTSO Sissies iie aerieni ate 28 Mouse requirement seeeeeeereereererereeee 20 Multiplication math operation 137 N Q Natural Log math operation 0 000 137 Non Linear math operations 0 137 NOT math operation eee 138 NOT READY signal o ae 36 NOTSCAN signalinta 36 NT log on requirements 0 0 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeees 22 Number of Spectra sses 183 Offset Adjust and Dispersion parameters 83 Online Help overview eee 17 Version 2 5 C Opening data files eee eeeeeeee 69 multiple flesse setursins 71 Operations Absolute ee eesse a 137 AddIti N sopiran issaraen aa 137 AND Erre a nera ai 138 Complement ssis iioii 138 Divisions reseno eene n 137 Exclusive OR ssania 138 LoglOtssicsgeteciniainiaianend 137 MAX hi netic ce 137 MUN eare e erneer aueren cde herrerietes 137 Multiplication 137 Natural Lotiri teineiti 137 NOT asiar niestier niina takes 138 ORe
148. e 76 will appear y flash lamp 5 usec width 5 usec ste allowing you to select the FL1 SPE Foot spe image to be opened The Look Fidla spe Ad four stip SPE In box provides a browser HIB SEE 2G Ha argon spe N flash lamp 5 usec width 5 usec step SPE yAHid lamp spe function so that the directory flash lamp 5 usec width 5 usec step2 SPE WA Microbet spe where the images are located can be easily accessed By a default the data directory is a Filename Hidlamp spe subdirectory of the WinSpec Files of type wink Data sp tC Cancel program directory Files of the specified type the WinSpec 32 Open Diepiay s Bae type is e in a Biggio D Display Layout ala OP Sp C Image C Graph 3 ih directory and any subdirectories are listed in the box below the directory name Figure 76 Open dialog box 96 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C The Image Graph and 3D Graph radio buttons at the bottom of the box allow you to select whether the file will be opened and displayed as an image two dimensional graph or as a 3D graph Select 3D Graph Auto Select should not be checked From the data directory select the image file called Hid lamp spe Click on the OK button A window of the appropriate dimensions should appear immediately The graph display may take a few seconds depending on the speed of the computer The initial appearance of the display may vary depending on the initial Display Layout parameter settings Selec
149. e Add Files button opens a browser to facilitate file selection 145 146 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Enter the starting and ending wavelength values for the resulting file If your wavelength range includes values that are not covered by any of the files in your series the resulting spectrum will have some zero values Any area where valid data was available will be used to create the glued data Enter the final resolution you would like the final data file to have This value is in units per data point in the output file so the lower the number the higher the resolution and the more data points the glued file will contain For a 2400 groove per mm grating and a 0 3 m spectrometer a good final resolution would be about 0 1 nm per pixel For a 1200 groove per mm grating this value would be 0 15 to 0 2 nm per pixel The total number of data points in the resulting file cannot exceed 65 535 Enter the Glued Output Data File Name in the field provided The glued data will be contained in a single file If you change your mind about including one or more files in the resulting file highlight those files in the Raw Input Data File Names listing and click on Remove Selected Files When you have finished selecting files click on SET to execute the glue operation Step and Glue If you have spectrometer control through the WinSpec software the easiest way to create a glued spectrum is to let the software control both the data collecti
150. e Card Princeton Instruments PCI Tucson PCI USB 2 0 Many systems use the Princeton Instruments PCI Tucson PCI is required for Photometrics cameras USB 2 is available for newer Princeton Instruments systems System Name Refer to your order and Appendix A Controller ST 121 ST 133 ST 133A ST 138 Refer to your order and Appendix A Controller Serial Number Refer to the serial label Typically this is located on the bottom of the unit Detector Camera and CCD Array Refer to your order and Appendix A Detector Camera Serial Number Refer to the serial label Typically this is located on the back of the unit Shutter Type Small lt 25 mm Large 35mm None Spectrograph Type Acton Spex or Pulser Type DG535 PG200 or PTG PTG is usually associated with the PI MAX camera Pulser Serial Number Refer to serial label typically located on the back of the unit and in the lower left corner 22 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Installing WinSpec 32 Caution Because WinSpec 32 and WinView 32 contain files with the same name but different content do not install WinSpec 32 and WinView 32 software in the same directory Before installing WinSpec 32 e Verify that your computer meets the requirements listed on pages 19 20 e Check to see if the interface card has been installed Note that the interface card is not necessary if the computer wi
151. e Processing W K Pratt John Wiley New York 1978 ISBN 0 471 01888 0 162 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C This page intentionally left blank Chapter 16 Additional Post Acquisition Processes Introduction The processes included in this chapter are accessible from Processes menu These processes all use the same Input and Output tab pages but have unique Parameters tab pages Since the Input and Output functionality is identical for all of these processes the Input and Output tab pages are described below The Parameters tab pages are described in the appropriate sections Input tab page The Input tab page Figure 134 selects the data to be operated on You can specify the data file the frames within the file and the X and Y range on the CCD The input data type is reported Note that the Mouse button at the bottom of the window allows you to use the mouse to specify the region to be processed Simply drag a box in the data region of the active window and then click on Mouse The Frame and Range parameters will assume the values of the defined region The Mouse button is only active when the Input tab page is selected Threshold and Clipping X Threshold and Clipping X Input Parameters Output Input Parameters Output Input Image gt m Output Image Circuit spe bal E D Data Fis V Display Result mm ce x Range XR fi at fps 4 Y Range fi ato fes por Datatype UINT16 i Da
152. e all of the available space they will not be in alignment visually with the cursor The profile shapes will be correct and the point on the profiles intersected by the large cross hair extensions will accurately indicate the cursor position Also the information box will accurately report the pixel number and intensity at the cursor position 5 95 Display Range 1 Click on Eil The data display will shift so that it only fills the 5 to 95 region of the window range Had the data initially extended all the way to the window boundary the data display would have been slightly compressed to fit within the 5 95 range 2 Click on restoring the image to its initial appearance 98 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C 3 Before advancing to the next topic open the View menu Then select the Small cursor and deselect Cross Sections Selecting a Region of Interest 1 Using the mouse drag a rectangular region on the image as shown in Figure 79 Figure 79 Hid lamp spe 3D graph with region selected for viewing 2 Click on al Zoom In The view will change so that only the selected region is displayed as shown in Figure 80 ud Hid lamp spe 701 X 40X 1 PE iji M fT i ey i ll NN IK Figure 80 Hide lamp spe 3D graph expanded to show defined region 3 Click on Ql Undo All Zoom In The original view will be restored Displaying the Data 99 Chapter 8 Information box On the View menu select
153. e back Initially the cursor will be at the lower left Use the up arrow key to move to a higher numbered strip and the right arrow key to move to a higher numbered pixel on the strip Then click the Intensity Autoscale key to scale the Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 97 intensity profiles Note that clicking the mouse button at different points on the display will change the pixel selection but not the strip v4 Hid lamp spe 701 X 40 X 1 ioj x Figure 78 Hid lamp spe 3 D Graph 7 Press the Insert key repeatedly Each time it is pressed the display expands about the cursor position Then press the Delete key repeatedly to contract the display restoring the appearance of the data display 8 Note the cross sectional displays in Figure 78 The vertical cross section profiles the intensity at the same point on each successive strip The horizontal cross section profiles the intensity at each point on the same strip If the large cursor is selected cursor projections will intersect the cross section to show indicate the cursor position These projections may not be visually aligned with the cursor position on the main plot This effect will be particularly noticeable with a long Z axis Because of perspective effects the higher numbered strips will be further away and visually smaller The axes automatically adjust so that they read true for the strip on which the cursor is located However because the cross section profiles expand to us
154. e ei ciutisclsstetens ted tend eaten 171 Zooni Mesieccsectieoasesrestiven aa 171 Index Print Setup dialog box eee eee 169 Printing from WinSpec 32 oe 169 color MAPPING 0 00 ee eee eects eeeeees 170 saving as TIF file before printing 172 Screen Capture 000 eeeeeeeeeceseeeeneeeeeeeees 172 Process Mask operations eee 151 PELELENCES vost oiiaii aaia 161 PTG ACUVE MOE si 2cc ssscss sss eeeceseaseanestnoees 179 bracket pulsing eee eeeerees 178 continuous exponential mode 179 continuous linear mode 179 Interactive Trigger Setup 0 0 0 187 Operation Of 0 eee eeeeeceseeeesteeeeneeeteees 177 repetitive gating setup eee 179 sequential gating setup 179 slope threshold amp impedance 178 trigger Modei el ee eect iis 178 Pulser operation c cee eee eeeeeeeees 173 R S Reference Wavelength 0 eee 89 RESIS Yele ntes ees E ER 231 Registry filesini niinniin 229 Reinstallation of WinSpec 32 eee 232 ROI defining a single region 129 graphical input mouse ee 130 image binning oe eee eee 125 imaging mode ee eee eset eeeeeeee 123 Setup Modenie n 123 SPECTrOSCOpY isitin a 125 spectroscopy MOdE eee eee 123 Roper Scientific USB2 driver installation 25 Save As dialog DOX ee eee eeeeeeeeeees 72 Saye as TYPO ssssesesiesessescssecsstateedissesscssseeas 72 Save Sequence Values to File 186 Saving data files
155. e escent eats 138 Square ROOt ssssscescevesesssaveasisoascasesee 137 Squared nicae ihe Miata 137 Subtraction eee eeeeceesteeeeneeeeneeeeeeeres 137 Options Custom Chip iiccicesccseticetesoctecssesdescssesss 193 Custom Timing 194 FITS nti itis satiudicteaiiaddese 194 Macro Record 0 ceeeeessceeeeeeeeneeeeaees 195 SPEX TRIAX support n se 196 Virtual Chip enaren assinei 196 OR math operation sssssesssesssesersreseeseesee 138 Paper Size and Source eee eee 169 PCI card driver installation eee 24 PCI interface binning constraints 124 243 244 PCI Timer interface wo eee 39 Peak finder function eee eee 86 Peaks Hg Argon spectrum eee 78 PG200 pulser encians 173 continuous exponential mode 175 continuous linear mode eee 175 Operation Of eee eraai e 173 repetitive gating setup eee 175 sequential gating setup 175 PIHWDEBFLINI 000 eeeeeeereeeeee 31 231 PI MAX Intensified CCD Camera 173 Pixels binning or grouping eee 124 Polynomial method of calibration 81 Post processing binning and skipping 166 CTOSS SECTIONS eee eeeeeseeseeeseeeseeees 165 MISTO STAM Sen ses ciee chess dere Te ieee 168 Print Preview ssiis s3 scvserebesvessgeeasteceetacteee 170 Print Preview buttons Close in a K ides 171 Next Page ali pni aaa 171 Prey Pages istcavvestaiiseiniaicuidnnsa 171 PRint a Boctettn bale RE 171 TWO Pagers cis
156. e image to be acquired Binning Group and Height parameters Overview Binning is the process of adding the data from adjacent pixels together to form a single pixel sometimes called a super pixel The combination of pixels can be along the X axis the Y axis or along both axes The combination can occur while data is being shifted into the shift register hardware binning or after the data has been sent to the host computer software binning Both of these types of binning occur during data acquisition Post acquisition binning can be performed on previously acquired data Hardware Binning Hardware binning is performed before the signal is read out by the preamplifier and may be used to improve the signal to noise S N ratio For signal levels that are readout noise limited this method improves S N ratio linearly with the number of pixels grouped together For signals large enough so that the detector is photon shot noise limited and for all fiber coupled ICCD detectors the S N ratio improvement is roughly proportional to the square root of the number of pixels binned Because hardware binning is performed while the signal is shifted into the readout register the readout time and the burden on computer memory are reduced However this time and memory savings are at the expense of resolution Since shift register pixels typically hold only twice as much charge as image pixels hardware binning of large sections may result in saturation
157. e last frame has been exposed and shifted At that point the clean cycles begin again Chapter 10 ROI Definition amp Binning Overview General A Region of Interest ROI may be the entire CCD array or it may be a rectangular subregion of the array For data acquisition the definition of such a region is done either from the Easy Bin dialog box Figure 122 accessed from the Acquisition menu or from the ROI Setup tab page Figure 123 accessible after selecting Experiment Setup from the Acquisition menu Easy Bin is a simple way of a defining a single full chip width ROI ROI Setup allows you to create multiple ROIs with greater flexibility in ROI location and width Each ROI is defined in the X and Y direction by a start pixel an end pixel and a group height binning factor After one or more regions have been defined and stored data acquisition will use these regions to determine which information will be read out and displayed and which information will be discarded When ROIs are used to acquire data the ROI parameter information for the first 10 ROIs is stored in the data file when that data is saved to disk You can review this information for the active data display by using the File Information functionality accessible from the File menu or from the Display Context menu Notes 1 For Flatfield Correction Background Subtraction etc the images must be exactly the same size 2 References to X and Y axes assume
158. e name blemish file name version of this file header 2996 Reserved for YT information 0x01234567L if file created by Winx Calibration Structures There are three structures for the calibrations e The Area Inside the Calibration Structure below is repeated two times xcalibration ycalibration Start of X Calibration Structure 3000 3488 x axis calibration 3489 3977 y axis calibration double offset 3000 offset for absolute data scaling double factor 3008 factor for absolute data scaling char current unit 3016 selected scaling unit char reserved1 3017 reserved char string 40 3018 special string for scaling char reserved2 40 3058 reserved char calib valid 3098 flag if calibration is valid char input_unit 3099 current input units for calib value char polynom unit 3100 linear UNIT and used in the polynom coeff char polynom order 3101 ORDER of calibration POLYNOM char calib count 3102 valid calibration data pairs Appendix C double pixel position 10 double calib value 10 double polynom coeff 6 double laser position char reserved3 unsigned char new calib flag char calib label 81 char expansion 87 Data Structure 3103 3183 3263 3311 3319 3320 3321 3402 pixel pos of calibration data calibration VALUE at above pos polynom COEFFICIENTS
159. e performed are the same as for a Single file and Constant described above Spectra Math 137 Operation Descriptions Linear Operations Circuit spe B C Addition The A file is added pixel by pixel to the B file and the results written to the C file It is also possible to add a A Operation B JC constant entered on the B tab page to LINEAR gt NON LINEAR each point on the A file with the results Addition LogiO written to the C file Subtraction C Natural Log C Multiplication cs P Subtraction The B file is subtracted pixel by Sua z reaot pixel from the A file and the results are ae C MIN C Absolute Value written to the new file It is also ate possible to subtract a constant entered on the B tab page from each point on ees he the A file with the results written to the eo cate C file C Exclusive OR Soa A Sa 8 Egi R BINARY Multiplication The A file is multiplied pixel nag by pixel by the B file and the results written to the C file It is also possible to multiply each pixel of the A file by a constant entered on the B tab page with the results written to the C file Mouse Apply Close Help Figure 128 Operation tab page Division The A file is divided pixel by pixel by the B file and the results written to the C file It is also possible to divide each pixel of the A file by a constant entered on the B tab page with the results written to the C file MIN
160. e to Phosphor and or Photocathode burn physical damage when exposed to high intensity light Roper Scientific warrants with the exception of image intensifier products that are found to have Phosphor and or Photocathode burn damage which carry NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED all image intensifier products for a period of one 1 year after shipment See additional Limited One 1 year Warranty terms and conditions above which apply to this warranty Responsibility for shipping charges is as described above under our Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty X Ray Detector Limited One Year Warranty Roper Scientific warrants with the exception of CCD imaging device and fiber optic assembly damage due to X rays which carry NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED all X ray products for one 1 year after shipment See additional Basic Limited One 1 year Warranty terms and conditions above which apply to this warranty Responsibility for shipping charges is as described above under our Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty Software Limited Warranty Roper Scientific warrants all of our manufactured software discs to be free from substantial defects in materials and or workmanship under normal use for a period of one 1 year from shipment Roper Scientific does not warrant that the function of the software will meet your requirements or that operation will be uninterrupted or error free You assume responsibility for selecting the software to achie
161. e to curve If Highlight Cursor Curve is OFF the cursor can step without updating the entire display If Highlight Cursor Curve is ON the entire display updates with each step a considerably slower operation If the Cursor Curve and Marker Curves don t appear the problem may be with the assigned colors which should be different from the normal graph color and different from the background color On the Display Layout Color tab page it the Active 3D Graphs button that allows the cursor curve color to be set The Marker Graphs button is used to set the marker curves color Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 103 Hidden Surfaces The following procedure shows you how to shift the view to see the hidden or underside of the data 1 Open the Display Layout dialog box and make the following changes Range Change Y so that the range is from 40 to 1 not from 1 to 40 3D Layout Select Show Hidden Surface and deselect Highlight Cursor Curve and Marker Curves On Remove Hidden Lines should be selected Change the Z Axis Endpoint to X 25 and Y 0 The Z Axis Endpoint can be set by entering values up to 80 X either polarity and 80 Y positive only or graphically by using the mouse If you click on Adjust Z Graphically and then on OK the Z Axis Adjust window will appear With the cursor in that window depress the left mouse button and drag the cursor around the WinSpec 32 desktop until you see the desired axis orientation Then re
162. ears continuously after the sequence ends The camera continues clearing until a new exposure is set up or started the abort command is sent the speed entry number is changed or the camera is reset Clear Pre Exposure Post Sequence Clears Number of Cleans times before each exposure and clears continuously after the sequence ends The camera continues clearing until a new exposure is set up or started the abort command is sent the speed entry number is changed or the camera is reset Use Continuous Cleans Instruction This feature is supported by Version 5 and higher ST 133 and MicroMAX controllers and will only appear if the detector camera also supports this feature Continuous cleans instruction does horizontal shifts while doing vertical shifts for a faster continuous clean Check this box if you want to apply the continuous cleans instruction to the continuous cleans function available when External Sync timing mode Experiment Setup Timing tab page is being used to acquire data With this instruction the delay between an External Sync trigger and the start of exposure is minimized Refer to Chapter 9 Cleaning for more information about continuous cleans and continuous cleans instruction Note Older versions of the ST 133 and MicroMAX controllers as well as other controller types and cameras do not support this instruction WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Vertical Skips Vertical skips are associated with regions of interes
163. ed by mouse selection to a partial width ROI like the one in Figure 120 After an ROI is defined its pattern can be stored edited or deleted All defined areas will be indicated on the displayed image after they have been stored If a pattern is being edited its outline will be green and all other patterns will have red outlines In Imaging mode purple outlines will be drawn if two or more patterns are defined that do not have identical Wavelength Start and End points these outlines represent additional data that will be included in the image acquired using the ROI Setup The display of defined regions of interest is automatically updated when patterns are added or cleared Stored patterns are save to disk when you exit the WinSpec 32 and are automatically loaded the next time you start the program Notes 1 Right clicking inside an ROI opens the ROI Context menu which in addition to providing auto scale and zoom functions enables the labeling of image and graphical data The Experiment Setup Save Load tab page allows all experiment set parameters including ROI to be saved in a user designated file for later recall See the discussion of the Save Load tab page in the online Help Defining an ROI via Easy Bin Easy Bin allows you to define of a single full chip r Strips Binned wide ROI peace t ada C Center 10 1 Select Easy Bin from the Acquisition menu C Center 100 2 On the Easy Bin dialog
164. ed instructions on how to configure WinSpec 32 for operation with the hardware detector 15 16 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C controller and spectrograph in your particular system Pulser configuration is discussed in Chapter 18 Initial Spectroscopic Data Collection provides a procedure for initial spectroscopic data collection allowing users to gain some operating familiarity before going on to more complex measurements Initial Imaging Data Collection provides a procedure for initial imaging data collection allowing users to gain some operating familiarity before going on to more complex measurements Opening Closing and Saving Data Files describes how to open close and save data files in WinSpec 32 Wavelength Calibration describes how to calibrate the WinSpec 32 software for one position of the spectrograph grating Spectrograph Calibration discusses how to calibrate the WinSpec 32 software for any position of the spectrograph gratings Displaying the Data describes the data file display options Part 2 Advanced Topics Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Cleaning describes the cleaning features that are used while data acquisition is idle to prevent the buildup of unwanted charge on the array ROI Definition amp Binning describes how to set a region of
165. eeeeeeees 223 Equations used in WinSpec Wavelength Calibration eecesceseceseceseceseeeeeeeeeeenes 223 WinSpec X Axis Auto Calibration 0 0 cee eecceeceesneeeneeeseeeseecnsecesecaecsaeesseeeeeeseeeseeeenes 225 Table of Contents vii Appendix E CD ROM Failure Work AroundS cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 227 Appendix F WinSpec 32 Repair and Maintenance ccccssssssssseeeeeeeeees 229 Install Uninstall WinSpec 32 Components at a Later Time 229 Installing More than One Version of WinSpec 32 sessesseeesseresesreesersrrsresresresserrrssee 231 PIHWDEEINI amp SESSION DAT 000 eee eeceesseesseessecenseesscensescensocerscenseessoeesseessessnsenese 231 Uninstalling and Reinstalling 00 eee eeceeceeeeeseeeeneeeseeeaeecsaecsaecaecnaeenseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaes 232 Appendix G USB 2 0 Limitations ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeees 233 Appendix H Troubleshooting USB 2 0 cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 235 Introductions aeeti ere EEE E hacen A e a desta cytes bon cea e eee COON ite tb eval teats 235 Data Loss or Serial Violation esisiini igersaran tenia ene e aee nE Ea Ehia 235 Data Overr n Messages eoan eA e e E E a ces e a ae ee art oe ea a a 235 Demo is only Choice on Hardware Wizard Interface dialog ee eeeeseeessecsseceeeeeeee 236 Demo High Speed PCI and PCI Timer are Choices on Hardware Wizard Interface CialOS AERE EE E E toned EE E nese eee ee ee 237
166. efined ROI eee Figure 120 Imaging Mode Multiple ROIs with Different Widths Chapter 10 ROI Definition amp Binning 127 Constraints on Defining Multiple Regions of Interest ROIs General You may create more than 10 ROIs but when data is acquired using these ROIs the parameter information for only the first 10 ROIs will be stored when you save the data on Mode ROIs cannot overlap This places restrictions on the Slit Y values that can be specified For example if Pattern 1 has a Slit Start value of 1 and a Slit Height 100 the Start value for the next ROI must be greater than 100 fa Full pattern is selected and stored it overlaps all others causing all data collections to be full chip Figure 118 illustrates multiple full width ROIs 2 Once the first pattern is defined all subsequent patterns are automatically assigned the same X axis starting ending and grouping values The first pattern need not be full width any values in the chip range can be entered but once stored those values will apply as well to subsequently defined patterns The figures below illustrate possible ROI patterns Note the additional functionality available in Imaging Mode Figure 116 Imaging Mode s4 Moon spe 275 X 387 X 1 Of x In this mode ROIs can have varying sizes and degrees of overlap However when you define multiple ROIs like those in Figure 116 the computer automatically generates six side effect
167. el Select System and then System Properties Select the Hardware tab and click on Device Manager button Expand Universal Serial Bus Controllers Right mouse click on OrangeUSB USB 2 0 Host Controller and select Properties Oa Nw e p 9 On the Driver tab click on the Update Driver button You may have to wait a minute or so before you will be allowed to click on the button 242 10 11 12 13 14 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C When the Upgrade Device Driver Wizard appears click on Next Select the Search for a suitable driver radio button On the next screen select the Specify a location checkbox Browse and select the location Click on OK In the Driver Files Search Results window check the Install one of the other drivers checkbox Select the NEC PCI to USB Enhanced Host Controller B1 driver Click on Next and the installation will take place When the Completing the Upgrade Device Driver Wizard window appears click on Finish You will then be given the choice of restarting the computer now or later According to the window text the hardware associated with the driver will not work until you restart the computer Appendix Glossary A D converter Analog to digital converter In a CCD detector system the electronic circuitry that converts the analog information continuous amplitudes acquired by the detector into the digital data quantified discrete steps used for image display ADU Analog
168. election when viewing data as an image Instead they select the first last next and previous frame respectively if the data set contains multiple frames Note When displaying the data as a graph to view data from multiple frames it is necessary to select Same Strip Multi Frame on the 3D Layout tab page of the Display Layout dialog box It might further be noted that these buttons do not appear on the default Custom Toolbar Instead they must be added using the Customize Toolbar dialog box accessed by selecting Custom Toolbar on the Setup menu 102 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Cursor Curve and Marker Curves In analyzing a data display it is often desirable to highlight the cursor curve and to have every nth curve displayed in a different color as a convenient marker WinSpec 32 provides these functions as demonstrated in the following procedure 1 On the 3D Layout tab page select Highlight Cursor Curve and Marker Curves On Then press OK The cursor curve and marker curves should be clearly delineated Note that on a color monitor they would be in contrasting colors and much easier to see than in a black and white print as shown in Figure 83 s4 Hid lamp spe 701 X 40 X 1 Pixel 328 Intensity 460850 00 point 328 strip 17 frame 1 Figure 83 3D Display with Cursor curve and Marker Curves Note that displaying the data with Highlight Cursor Curve displayed affects the time required to step the cursor from curv
169. ells the right mouse button This will open Spray DZpandEMalARGONIzp A Bkgnd SPE ev pore the right click File operations menu SendTo 5 gt as shown in Figure 57 Cut Filename Copy 3 Click on Delete Then answer yes to a EEE Cance the query asking whether you wish to Delete Z n R send the file to the recycling bin The bi file will be deleted and the File akai Operations menu will close Figure 57 Right click File Operations menu Note Click on the Open dialog box Cancel button to exit the dialog box without deleting any files Multiple Files It is also possible to delete multiple files at the same time by using the Win95 Shift Click and Control Click selection features To select a range of contiguously listed files for deleting 1 Hold the Shift key down and click on the first file in the range The file will be selected 2 Then hold the Shift key down again and click on the last file in the range That file and all the files between the two designated files will be selected 3 To select multiple files which are not listed contiguously 4 Hold down the Ctrl key and then click on the first file That file will be selected Then hold down the Ctrl key again and click on the second file That file will also be selected 6 Proceed in similar fashion to select each file to be deleted Once all files to be deleted have been selected right click on a selected file to open the File Operations menu Then
170. en click on the Open button For example with 3D Graph selected double clicking on Hid lamp spe would open that file producing the display shown in Figure 53 Note that there are many different ways of controlling how the image will be displayed as described in Chapter 8 alaale Figure 53 High Intensity Lamp Spectrum Multiple Files It is also possible to open multiple files at the same time by using the Win95 Shift Click and Control Click selection features To select a range of contiguously listed files for opening e Hold the Shift key down and click on the first file in the range The file will be selected e Then hold the Shift key down again and click on the last file in the range That file and all the files between the two designated files will be selected To select multiple files which are not listed contiguously e hold down the Ctrl key and then click on the first file That file will be selected e Then hold down the Ctrl key again and click on the second file That file will also be selected e Proceed in similar fashion to select each file to be opened Once all files to be opened have been selected click on Open or double click on a selected file and all of the selected files will be opened There are a number of additional options and operations that can be performed from the Open dialog box For example clicking the Display Layout button will directly open the Display Layout dialog box d
171. ent TimeUTC TIMEMAX 179 172 Experiment UTC Time as hhmmss 0 Appendix C SHO WORD WORD WORD WORD WOR WORD char WORD char WORD WORD RT D SHORT float SHO RT SHORT SHORT SHORT float SHORT WORD SHORT SHORT SHORT long long float SHORT char char SHO RT SHORT char SHORT char char char char DWORD DWORD SHORT float SHO RT SHORT SHORT SHO RT SHORT float long float float char WORD float Data Structure 219 ExposUnits 186 User Units for Exposure ADCoffset 188 ADC offset ADCrate 190 ADC rate ADCtype 192 ADC type ADCresolution 194 ADC resolution ADCbitAdjust 196 ADC bit adjust gain 198 gain Comments 5 COMMENTMAX 200 File Comments geometric 600 geometric ops rotate 0x01 reverse 0x02 flip 0x04 xlabel LABELMAX 602 intensity display string cleans 618 cleans NumSkpPerCln 620 number of skips per clean SpecMirrorPos 2 622 Spectrograph Mirror Positions SpecSlitPos 4 626 Spectrograph Slit Positions AutoCleansActive 642 T F UseContCleansInst 644 T F AbsorbStripNum 646 Absorbance Strip Number SpecSlitPosUnits 648 Spectrograph Slit Position Units SpecGrooves 650 Spectrograph Grating Grooves srccmp 654 number of source comp diodes ydim 656 y dimension of raw data scramble 658 0 scrambled 1 unscrambled ContinuousCleansFlag 660 T F Continuous Cleans Timing Option ExternalTriggerFlag 662 T F External Trigger Timing Option lnoscan
172. ervice Limited Warranty Roper Scientific Analytical Instrumentation Roper Scientific Inc Roper Scientific us we our makes the following limited warranties These limited warranties extend to the original purchaser You you only and no other purchaser or transferee We have complete control over all warranties and may alter or terminate any or all warranties at any time we deem necessary Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty Roper Scientific warrants this product against substantial defects in materials and or workmanship for a period of up to one 1 year after shipment During this period Roper Scientific will repair the product or at its sole option repair or replace any defective part without charge to you You must deliver the entire product to the Roper Scientific factory or at our option to a factory authorized service center You are responsible for the shipping costs to return the product International customers should contact their local Roper Scientific authorized representative distributor for repair information and assistance or visit our technical support page at www roperscientific com Limited One 1 Year Warranty on Refurbished or Discontinued Products Roper Scientific warrants with the exception of the CCD imaging device which carries NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED this product against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to one 1 year after s
173. es not appear in the Input Image Figure 149 Threshold and Clipping box enter the complete file name or search Parameters tab page for a file using the browser accessed by the button to the right of the field 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed 4 Ifyou want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values 5 On the Parameters tab page if a clipping operation is to be performed select the clipping option as described above For a threshold operation set the threshold level to the desired value 6 Enter the name of the Output Image on the Output tab page Jn later editions of the software it will additionally be possible to specify an output frame and data range 7 Click on Apply to begin processing Chapter 16 Additional Post Acquisition Processes 165 Cross Section Introduction Selecting Cross Section on the Process menu opens the Cross Section window which allows you to aas i E separately display and store M25 v 1 1 l 4975 18 horizontal and vertical cross SAVEA et CTAR sections of an image Figure 150 shows two X axis cross sections based on the same ROI The X 25 Y 1 Z 1 I 54727 upper data is averaged the lower data is summed X 19860
174. escribed in Chapter 8 In addition options for the organization of the Open dialog box itself can be selected by means of the icons to the right of the Look In field or by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the file listing area of the box but not on a file name Right clicking on a file name opens a Windows shortcut menu that provides a number of additional operations including open delete rename print properties and edit operations such as copy and cut 72 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Saving Data Files Data files must be saved to disk before exiting the software It is also recommended that you save periodically when making measurements to minimize the overall risk of data loss If you exit and there are unsaved data files you will be prompted to save them The File menu provides three Save commands as follows 1 Save Saves the active data file using the original file name and type and in the original directory folder 2 Save As The Save As dialog box is used to save the active data file to a user specified file name and directory The file type can be changed 3 Save All Saves all open data files using the original file names and directories folders Sometimes during data collection or processing windows will be opened and display data with an lt untitled gt title These are temporary files and they must be saved to disk if you want to keep them The Save As dialog box performs this function The Save A
175. eseeeseeensecesecsseenseenseeees 30 Figure 9 Cryo Cooled System Diagram eeesseesseeeseeeseeeseecsaecesecnaeenseecsaeceaeenaeens 31 Figure 10 Optional Configuration Disk dialog DOX eee eeeeseceseceseeensecesecnseceseenseeess 32 Figure Ii PVGAM dialog DOK meern te terenon oeoa eneee Ee E OE N EA AOSS 32 Figure 12 Interface dialog BOX cimre eae E E a E e i eieaa 32 Figure 13 Controller Type dialog bOX oe ee ceecceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeecsaecaecaecnsecnseenseeens 33 Figure 14 Detector Camera CCD Setup dialog bOX sssssessseseeesesessreeseereesesrresersresreereses 33 Figure 15 Controller Camera tab page eseeseseseseseeeeeseeeresresrrsressesressesriestesresresresressesees 34 Figure 16 Display tab page left graphic applies to all controllers except ST 121 right graphic applies to ST 121 On y oe cscccsctstecestivocecssaslecenies eet a ena eE EEE AST 38 Figure 17 Interiace tab page wsilste cet Gime eis niete alco elites Mieieen gnc em alee Nees 39 Figure 18 Cleans Skips tab page ceecesccsssessseeeneeeseeeseecaecaecsaecnsecsseessaeenaeenseenseeees 40 Figure 193 Vertical SKIPS tinct chee e e cece aden set aa eee ea a aea 42 viii WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Figure 20 Spectrograph Menu ee eeecesecsseccssecsseceseceseceseceseeeseeseaeeeaeeeaeessaecaecsseeenaes 43 Figure 21 Define Spectrograph dialog DOX cee ceecesceseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseecaeecaaecsaecnaeenaeens 43 Figure 22 Install Remove Spectrographs
176. f a single pixel click on Always Use Default the minimum resolution will be displayed in the Final Resolution edit box the resolution changes as the wavelength changes decreasing at higher wavelengths Enter a Final Resolution for the resulting file Unless you require a certain resolution it is easiest to let the computer calculate the final resolution based on the spectrometer calibration and other known quantities In the resulting file each point does not represent a physical pixel The total number of data points in the resulting file cannot exceed 65 536 Click on SET to store the Step and Glue parameters If the experiment is ready to run click on the RUN to begin collecting data The software will collect one exposure at each spectrometer position It will automatically move the spectrometer to the next position with the correct amount of overlap and collect the next exposure The software will collect as many exposures as needed During data collection individual spectra may or may not be displayed depending on the time between spectra 148 Theory WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C The Glue operation is done in two stages First the data in an input file is converted into an intermediate file with the calibration of the output file and then the converted file is glued onto the output file The algorithm for the file conversion is based on the fact that the pixels have small but finite dimensions this means that each p
177. f the dialog box to enter those values 5 Select one of the Operations Since image features vary widely it is best to simply try the different operations to determine the best one 6 To set a specialized 3 x 3 mask select User Defined and change the Kernal parameters to their new values 7 Click on Apply to begin processing Sharpening Functions Parameters tab page Sharpening is also accomplished by mask operations Input Parameters Output in this case parameters entered on the Sharpening Parameters tab page These masks sometimes called Operation high pass filters enhance regions of high contrast C User defined while not affecting regions of low contrast Sharpening Procedure Use the following procedure to sharpen an image 1 Select Sharpening from the Process menu 2 Enter the Input Image and Output Image names 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed 4 If you want to process only part of the Input A Aw ae Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values Figure 138 Sharpening Parameters tab page 5 Select one of the Operations Since image features vary widely it is best to simply try the different operations to determine the best one 6 To set a specialized 3 x 3
178. factory to Roper Scientific You must notify the Roper Scientific factory service center within 30 days after you have taken delivery of a product or part that you believe to be defective With the exception of customers who claim a technical issue with the operation of the product or part all invoices must be paid in full in accordance with the terms of sale Failure to pay invoices when due may result in the interruption and or cancellation of your one 1 year limited warranty and or any other warranty expressed or implied All warranty service must be made by the Roper Scientific factory or at our option an authorized service center Before products or parts can be returned for service you must contact the Roper Scientific factory and receive a return authorization number RMA Products or parts returned for service without a return authorization evidenced by an RMA will be sent back freight collect These warranties are effective only if purchased from the Roper Scientific factory or one of our authorized manufacturer s representatives or distributors Unless specified in the original purchase agreement Roper Scientific is not responsible for installation setup or disassembly at the customer s location Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited above and do not extend to any product or part which has e been lost or discarded by you e been damaged as a result of misuse improper i
179. fier if available High Capacity If this is a reported only parameter set it by selecting FAST on the ADC tab page Camera State PI MAX only Safe the photocathode is biased OFF Avalanche Gain Cascade 512 or Cascade 650 only Set to 0 initially and disabled Enable and increase the gain for low light level images WARNING Intensified Cameras If working with an intensified camera the room light should be subdued so as to allow safe Shutter mode operation of the camera Intensified cameras are quite susceptible to damage from light overload in Shutter mode operation and particularly subject to damage from light overload in Gated mode operation with high intensity pulsed light sources See your manual for detailed information Also take particular care that your intensified camera is connected properly for Shutter mode operation Cabling and peripheral considerations for intensified cameras are more complex than for unintensified cameras Again read your manual WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C 3 On the Timing tab page Figure 42 set the following parameters Note Not all of these parameters are provided for every controller model Ignore parameters that don t apply to your system Timing Mode Free Run For PI MAX Experiment Setup system Ext Sync for DGS535 Int Synce Main DataFile ROI Setup Data Corrections for PTG ADC Timing l Processes Save Load Triggered Mode not checked
180. g check in the Required box and then enter the number of steps required to correct for the backlash If your spectrograph has more than one turret replace the turret change the Current Turret value and enter the new grating information WinSpec 32 will store and recall the different sets of grating information for each turret Note that there is a checkbox for displaying a warning during a grating change Since the time to change a grating can vary widely depending on the spectrograph this message could be very helpful If two rates are available for your spectrograph you can also choose the rate either faster slew or slower scan The actual rate will depend on the spectrograph Depending on the spectrograph manufacturer and model there may be a difference in wavelength setting accuracy for the two speeds Selecting and Moving the Grating Once the required groove and turret information Gratings Slits Mirrors has been entered on the Define Spectrograph Gratings tab page the next step is to select and Spectrograph To Move move the grating These operations are performed Spex 270M on COM2 M using the Gratings tab page Figure 26 of the Grating fi 200 v Move Spectrograph dialog box The procedure follows Move to fo nm 1 Open the Move Spectrograph dialog box by Speed Min Freq jo Steps sec selecting Move from the Spectrograph menu i i Max Freq jo Steps sec On the Grati
181. g greater than Imax gets mapped the output value of the last In Out pair Any input value not specified in an In Out pair is mapped to zero Imin Imax Imin Imax represents inclusive input range to be remapped Ifirst Ofirst Ofirst is the output value for Ifirst and for any intensity lt Imin 1 0 Lis the input value and O is the output value 1 0 O3 is the output value for I3 1 0 O4 is the output value for 14 Ilast Olast Olast is the output value for last and for any intensity gt Imax Example The following is a custom mapping As stated previously the entries after Imin and Imax represent are input output levels Imin and Imax are 3 and 7 respectively Everything less than 3 gets mapped to 13 the first In Out mapping Everything greater than 7 gets mapped to 12 the last In Out mapping Since input values 3 and 4 are not represented in an In Out pair these intensities will be mapped to 0 3 7 6 13 5 11 7 12 References To explore in further detail the theory and techniques of digital image processing we suggest the following texts 1 Digital Image Processing Gregory A Baxes Cascade Press Denver CO 1984 ISBN 0 945591 00 4 2 Digital Image Processing R C Gonzalez P Wintz Addison Wesley Reading MA 1977 ISBN 0 201 11026 1 3 Digital Picture Processing A Rosenfeld A C Kak Vol 1 amp 2 Academic Press New York 1982 ISBN Vol 1 0 12 1597 301 2 ISBN Vol 2 0 12 597 302 0 4 Digital Imag
182. ge The Next Page button allows you to step forward sequentially through all available pages If the file contains only one image the Next Page button will be grayed out Prev Page Allows you to step backwards sequentially through the pages of a multiple image file Two Page Causes two pages to be displayed at a time in a side by side layout Zoom In Allows you to zoom in on the previewed page allowing a selected area to be examined in detail There are two zoom levels Note that if not at full zoom the cursor becomes a magnifying glass if positioned on the image area Zoom Out Allows you to return to the normal unzoomed preview display Close Closes the Preview window and returns you to the normal WinSpec 32 display 172 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Printing a Screen Capture It is also possible to do a screen capture of the entire WinSpec 32 window This is the best way to capture such information as cross sections scaling and color lookup tables A limitation of screen shots is that the resulting image is based on the resolution of the monitor not the resolution of the image For a 1 million pixel CCD even a 600 x 800 video mode is not enough to show all the pixel information 1 Display the desired image or images in WinSpec 32 Click once on the title bar of WinSpec 32 to make this the active window Press Alt Print Screen This copies the entire contents of the WinSpec 32 window including image or
183. ge from accumulating on the array while it is waiting for a start exposure signal and after the data has been readout of the array The specialized cleaning function for an ROI Vertical Skips is applied when the ROI is read out Vertical Skips parameters are used to shorten the readout discard time for the rows before and after the ROI Minimum Block Size sets the number of invalid rows horizontal lines of the CCD to bin before the valid data Number of Blocks sets the number of these blocks to shift and discard before going to a geometric grouping algorithm Refer to Vertical Skips on page 42 for detailed information about vertical skips and the grouping algorithm Kinetics and Cleaning Kinetics is a special type of operation in which most of the CCD is mechanically or optically masked leaving a small section open to light This section is then shifted under the mask very quickly The defined clean cycles are used to keep charge from accumulating on the array while it is waiting for a start exposure signal and after the data has been readout of the array In addition to clean cycles continuous cleans for kinetics is supported by Version 5 or higher of the ST 133 Controller For kinetics experiments continuous cleans are only applied between the first NOTSCAN low to high transition and the External Sync high to low transition Because of the speed at which the array is then shifted exposed and shifted no further cleaning occurs until th
184. ge functions should magingMode Spectroscopy Mode be selected Wavelength Slit Start 4 Start 4 End End Group a Group Mouse Full Clear Clear All STORE Cancel Changes I Use Software Binning Acquire Focus Cancel Help Figure 45 ROI tab page imaging selected 8 On the Data File tab page make the Experiment Setup following selections ADC Timing Processes Save Load Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections Auto Increment File Name Enable r Data File Name should be OFF Overwrite Append Existing Files Select Overwrite data file will Auto Increment File Name overwrite an existing file having the M Enable Current Value 10 same name r Overwrite Append Data Type Overwrite Confirmation Check this box TRAE Existing Files AutoSelect so that you will be warned that the gt iconimibein cvensting specified file name is already in use If not checked the old data file will be overwritten by the new one No warning FLOAT v m uto save and prompts ask whether to save unsaved files z is provided M Use a new window for each run Data A AutoSelect Should be aaa S zeal ee selected Figure 46 Data File dialog box Auto save and prompts Select Don t auto save or ask to save With this selection you won t receive a prompt when a file is closed as a result of st
185. get Wavelength that might be better and click the Reposition button If the peak is too close to the center of the display you should enter a slightly higher Target Wavelength and click on the Reposition button Once the peak appears near the left edge check and if necessary adjust the cursor position on the peak using the same criteria as for the Offset and Adjust operations Then click on Continue to Step 2 to initiate the second data acquisition e The spectrograph will acquire the second spectrum If the peak is close to the right edge of the display as expected click on Continue to Step 3 to initiate the third data set acquisition If the peak is not in the right position use the Reposition button to move the spectrograph as required to position the low peak near the right edge of the display Then click on Continue to Step 3 to initiate acquisition of the third data set e The spectrograph will acquire the third spectrum this time positioning the cursor on the high peak at 579 066 If the peak is close to the left edge of the display as expected click on Continue to Step 4 to initiate the fourth data set acquisition If the peak is not in the correct position use the Reposition button to move the spectrograph as required to position the high peak near the left edge of the display Then click on Continue to Step 4 to initiate acquisition of the fourth data set e After completion of the fourth data set once again check to be sure the cu
186. graph displays and dialog windows to the clipboard Note Alternatively press Ctrl C or select Copy on the Edit menu to copy an image to the clipboard This function only works on image displays and only on the image itself i e scales and cross section information is not transferred However it has an advantage in that the full resolution of the image is retained Many text editors and graphics programs allow images to be pasted directly from the clipboard Paint Shop Pro a shareware program is one example of an inexpensive program that can edit and save clipboard screen shots 1 2 Open the application Open a new file within that application Select Paste from the Edit menu This will place the contents of the clipboard into the application If the image seems cut off try opening a bigger blank image before pasting the clipboard The image is now an 8 bit color or grayscale image Crop the image if desired This feature is available in almost any image editing program Select Print from the File menu Print the file Save the file if desired TIFF is an excellent image format for either grayscale or color shots Note Screen capture images lose the high dynamic range of the original The Copy function Ctrl C retains the full resolution of the data file Saving as TIF and Printing It is also possible to save an image file directly to the TIFF format by using the Save As function on the File menu The resulting eps
187. gt 32767 set to 1 and see lavgexp below 668 int exposure 4 exposure time in milliseconds if gt 32767 set to 1 and see lexpos below 660 unsigned int xDimDet 6 Detector x dimension of chip int mode 8 timing mode float exp sec 10 alternative exposure in secs int asyavg 14 number of asynchron averages int asyseq 16 number of asynchron sequential unsigned int yDimDet 18 y dimension of CCD or detector char date 10 20 date as MM DD YY int ehour 30 Experiment Time Hours as binary int eminute 32 Experiment Time Minutes as binary int noscan 34 number of multiple scans if noscan 1 use lnoscan int fastacc 36 int seconds 38 Experiment Time Seconds as binary int Det Type 40 CCD DiodeArray type unsigned int xdim 42 actual of pixels on x axis int stdiode 44 trigger diode float nanox 46 float calibdio 10 50 calibration diodes Appendix C char int int float int int unsigned unsigned double unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned char unsigned char unsigned unsigned char char int unsigned int long long long char char int in in in char float int in in in in float long float float char AE SAR a Sak o di o a T in in in in in in in in in in in et ict ch ict ch cht cr ct
188. gular pixels array format is 3072 x 2048 pixels 210 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C This page intentionally left blank Appendix B Calibration Lines MERCURY 184 91 226 22 302 15 404 66 507 30 625 14 730 04 194 17 237 83 312 57 407 78 2x253 65 2x312 57 2x365 02 248 20 313 17 434 75 253 65 334 15 435 84 546 07 626 34 760 95 265 20 365 02 576 96 2x313 17 3x253 65 280 35 365 44 579 07 289 36 366 33 296 73 394 90 404 44 706 72 800 62 415 86 727 29 801 48 416 42 738 40 810 37 418 19 750 39 811 53 419 10 751 46 826 45 420 07 763 51 840 82 425 94 772 38 842 46 427 22 794 82 430 01 433 36 533 08 603 00 534 11 607 43 540 06 609 62 585 25 614 31 588 19 616 36 594 48 621 73 597 55 626 65 630 48 633 44 638 30 640 23 650 65 653 29 659 90 667 83 671 70 692 95 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 Table 4 Wavelength Calibration Lines in nanometers indicates strong line within a wavelength group indicates strongest line for the element indicates 2 or 3 order 211 212 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C INTENSITY o N wo wo A S 8 3 S 3 8 f e fo N O 253 652 es 296 728 QO S 312 567 hme 365 015 404 656 BY O 2 435 833 a 33 2nd 253 652 507 304 z 546 073 gt a 576 960 m 579 066 5 o Eg 2 S 2 m q m fe QL x 696 543 87 706 722 727 294 738 398 750 387 763 510 ao g O gt 826 453
189. has finished The maximum value for this entry depends on the controller For example the range of values for an ST 133 is 0 7 and is 0 255 for an ST 138 Continuous Cleans Clean cycles will always occur but an additional Experimenting cleaning function called Continuous Cleans is provided hat l a l when the start of exposure is tied to an external trigger i e the experiment is being run in External Sync Timina Mode timing mode Extemal Synce IV Continuous Cleans Figure 112 shows the timing diagram for an experiment Shutter Control with External Sync trigger active on the negative edge Nema E Pie open Note that the timing diagram shows two possible setups Bera aE for the shutter In the first setup Normal the shutter is opened when External Sync goes low Because it takes i es time to open a shutter data may be missed while the Dwara Tief shutter is opening In the second setup Preopen the Edge Trigger edae Z shutter is opened when the NOTSCAN signal at the ee ee SCAN BNC on the back of the ST 133 goes high The advantage is that the shutter is fully opened when the Figure 111 Timing Tab page exposure triggered by External Sync begins The External Syne with Continuous disadvantage is that ambient light is no longer being Cleans Selected blocked from the array during the period between NOTSCAN going high and the External Sync going low Continuous cleans provides a
190. he ROI and calculate the readout time Observe the calculated readout time If you need a shorter period change the settings for example enter a smaller Y dimension or use binning in the Y direction and click on the Download Virtual Chip Definition button again Click on Close 12 From the Setup menu select Environment Note When setting up for focusing the number of Frames Interrupt should be left at 1 13 14 15 16 17 DMA Buffer Mb By default the buffer size is 8 Mb Using the following formula calculate the amount of DMA memory required X x Y x Frames x 2 bytes pixel For example the buffer size required for a 47x47 virtual array acquiring 1000 frames would be 47 x 47 x 1000 frames x 2 bytes pixel 4 4 Mb If the calculated value is greater than 8 Mb enter the appropriate size Note This value is not enabled until you restart your computer Frames Interrupt If the number of frames is greater than 256 the preprogrammed slot limit for a PCI card increase the number of Frames Interrupt value Use the formula Frames 256 and round the result to the next highest integer to calculate that value For example 1000 frames 256 will result in 3 9 so enter 4 Note This value should be 1 for Focus mode Click on OK after you have finished entering the Environment settings Place a suitable target in front of the camera and click on Focus to verify that the camera is seeing the target Make any
191. he ROI Offset is used to compensate for this In this example the ROI Offset is 768 5 512 5 256 pixels This offset is converted to the equivalent wavelength at the requested wavelength and subtracted in this case from the requested wavelength before being sent to the Acton Suppose you have calibrated your 1200 g mm grating on the 275 and the calibration offset is 2 2057 nm as reported on the Spectrograph Calibrate Offset menu Using the above ROI when you ask for 0 00 nm the 256 pixel ROI is converted to 20 199 nm and the value sent to the 275 is 0 2 2057 20 199 17 98 nm The ROI Offset pixel to wavelength calculation uses the results of the dispersion calibration So if a spectrograph is being calibrated using an asymmetrical ROI the calibration should be iterated at least once Because the ROI Offset is calculated separately from the Calibration Offset once a spectrograph has been calibrated using one ROI the ROI pattern can be changed without affecting the calibration Chapter 15 Post Acquisition Mask Processes Introduction Several post acquisition mask processes including Edge Enhancement Sharpening Smoothing a Custom Filter and Morphological Erode and Dilation operations are provided in the WinSpec 32 software These processes all use the same Input and Output tab pages but have unique Parameters tab pages Since the Input and Output functionality is identical for all of these processes the Input and Output
192. he ST 133A is connected and on the USB 2 0 camera may not be listed as Camera 1 in the PVCAM_INI file Run RSConfig exe accessible from the Windows Start Programs Roper Scientific menu If the USB 2 0 camera is listed as Camera 2 Princeton Style USB2 in Figure 202 you will have to edit the PVCAM_INI file RSConfig 2 6 x r Names Style Camera 1 Camerat Princeton Style Camera 2 Camera2 Princeton Style USB2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Camera 8 Figure 202 RSConfig dialog box Two Camera Styles 240 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C 5 Using Notepad or a similar text editor open PVCAM INI which is located in the Windows directory C WINNT for example If the contents of the file look like Change the headings so the contents now look like Camera_1 gt Camera_2 Type 1 Type 1 Name Cameral Name Cameral Driver rspipci sys Driver rspipci sys Port 0 Port 0 Camera_2 _ gt Camera_1 Type 1 Type 1 Name Camera2 Name Camera2 Driver apausb sys Driver apausb sys Port 0 Port 0 Note The Camera_ must be changed so the camera supported by the USB interface will be recognized the USB driver is apausb sys For consistency you may also want to change the camera names 6 Save the file With the ST 133A connected and on open WinSpec 32 The formerly grayed out functions should now be available Error Creating C
193. he browser accessed by the button to the right of the field 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed 4 Ifyou want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values 5 On the Parameters tab page set the X and Y bin size 6 On the Parameters tab page select Average if the binned data values are to be averaged If the Average box is left unchecked the binned values will be summed 7 On the Parameters tab page set the Skip X and Y values Data points that fall in the skip zones do not contribute to the output Skip values of zero are allowable that is Chapter 16 Additional Post Acquisition Processes 167 no points will be skipped Leftover points at the end of a strip or column are discarded 8 Enter the name of the Output file on the Output tab page In later editions of the software it will additionally be possible to specify an output frame and data range 9 Click on Apply to begin processing Restrictions and Limitations The following are some restrictions and limitations of the Binning and Skipping function e This function can resize an image down to a minimum of 1 pixel but WinSpec 32 cannot display an image less than 2 x 2 pixels e May cause data overflow in the
194. he case of the example shown in Figure 22 the selected spectrograph is an Acton SP300i Acton SP750 zi Notes 1 When you click on Install Selected Communications Port Auto x Spectrograph to install the spectrograph WinSpec 32 will try to connect the spectrograph to the selected communications port If you select Auto as the port the system will assign the spectrograph to the first available COM port If the spectrograph is not found an error message is displayed Even if communication is not established the spectrograph and its assigned port will be added to the list for example Acton SP300i on COM2 OK Cancel Help Figure 22 Install Remove Spectrographs To install another spectrograph repeat the installation procedure To remove a spectrograph select it in the upper box and click on Remove Selected Spectrograph The spectrograph s name will then disappear from the upper window More than one spectrograph can be assigned to a port However only one spectrograph can be active at a time If you have multiple spectrographs assigned to a port make sure that the active spectrograph refer to the Active Spectrograph field on the Main tab page is the one that is or will be physically connected to the port If you plan to install more than one spectrograph for a COM port it would be a good idea to make sure that the connection preferences are the same for all of the spectrographs assigned to that p
195. he readout Although modest binning may be employed to increase the sensitivity there is a tradeoff in that it adversely affects the image resolution As a result binning when imaging is normally limited to a few pixels vertically and horizontally 126 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Defining ROIs TIP You can acquire a full chip data set without losing your ROI definitions To do so simply click on the Use Full Chip radio button on the Experiment Setup Main tab page As long as Use Full Chip is selected the ROI setup parameters are ignored and data collection will result in full frame data sets To switch back to a defined ROI pattern click on the Use Region of Interest radio button on the Experiment Setup Main tab page Examples of Spectroscopy and Imaging ROIs Figures 116 120 show possible ROI patterns Note that the patterns in Figure 120 demonstrate varying size ROIs a feature of Imaging Mode CCD Chip CCD Chip defined ROI pattern Polpeten Figure 116 Single Full width ROI Figure 117 Single Partial width ROI CCD Chip CCD Chip ROI Pattern 1 ROI Pattern 1 ROI Pattern 2 ROI Pattern 2 ROI Pattern 3 ROI Pattern 3 Figure 118 Multiple Full width ROIs Figure 119 Spectroscopy Mode Multiple Partial width ROIs CCD Chip defined ROI computer ROI computer ROI computer ROI computer ROI d
196. her rights that may vary from state to state and from country to country Some states and countries do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts when an action may be brought or the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above provisions may not apply to you 12 When contacting us for technical support or service assistance please refer to the Roper Scientific factory of purchase contact your authorized Roper Scientific representative or reseller or visit our technical support page at www roperscientific com Contact Information Roper Scientific s manufacturing facility for this product is located at the following address Roper Scientific 3660 Quakerbridge Road Trenton NJ 08619 USA Tel 800 874 9789 609 587 9797 Fax 609 587 1970 Technical Support E mail techsupport roperscientific com For technical support and service outside the United States see our web page at www roperscientific com An up to date list of addresses telephone numbers and e mail addresses of Roper Scientific s overseas offices and representatives is maintained on the web page Index 3D Graph display 0 eee eeeeeeeereees 95 3D Layout tab page Z Axis Endpoint 103 A B Absolute math operation eee 137 Active spectrograph specifying 46 Addition math operation 0 ee 137 Adjust calibration procedure 88 Adjuster Otn ma oa 89 AND math operation
197. high speed applications and a traditional amplifier for wide dynamic range applications Backlash Applied to the movement of gratings or slits this is the amount of play between gears when changing the direction of travel Bias In a CCD detector system the minimum intensity required for each exposure equivalent to performing a zero second exposure with the shutter closed Without adding any light the bias allows charge to be read out on the CCD while raising the intensity level high enough to ensure that the detector does not deliver a negative number to the A D converter The A D converter only works in the set of positive numbers and has no instructions for processing negative numbers The bias may be user settable However it is set at the factory and should remain stable over the lifetime of the detector system Binning Hardware binning is the process of combining the charge from adjacent pixels in a CCD before the signal is read out by the preamplifier A binning of 1 in both directions reads out each pixel at full X axis resolution A binning of 2 in both directions combines four pixels cutting the X axis resolution in half but quadrupling the light collecting area If the CCD chip shift register is being saturated due to hardware binning 243 244 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C you can use software binning instead by checking Use Software Binning on the ROI Setup tab page Note that software binning is not as fast
198. hipment During this period Roper Scientific will repair or replace at its sole option any defective parts without charge to you You must deliver the entire product to the Roper Scientific factory or at our option a factory authorized service center You are responsible for the shipping costs to return the product to Roper Scientific International customers should contact their local Roper Scientific representative distributor for repair information and assistance or visit our technical support page at www roperscientific com Normal Wear Item Disclaimer Roper Scientific does not warrant certain items against defect due to normal wear and tear These items include internal and external shutters cables and connectors These items carry no warranty expressed or implied VersArray XP Vacuum Chamber Limited Lifetime Warranty Roper Scientific warrants that the cooling performance of the system will meet our specifications over the lifetime of the VersArray XP detector or Roper Scientific will at its sole option repair or replace any vacuum chamber components necessary to restore the cooling performance back to the original specifications at no cost to the original purchaser Any failure to cool to spec beyond our Basic 1 year limited warranty from date of shipment due to a non vacuum related component failure e g any components that are electrical electronic is NOT covered and carries NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED Res
199. i click to access Control menu Window Control Boxes Main Display Area Status Bar For Help press F1 D en ee E E E E Figure 5 Main WinSpec 32 window Values labels and alphanumeric data are usually entered from the keyboard Selections and screen control operations are usually done using a mouse or other graphical I O device although keyboard selection shortcuts are provided Mouse selection is typically done by positioning the mouse cursor on the selection item and clicking the left mouse button In some case clicking the right mouse button will bring up a dialog box with additional information or a special menu that allows additional operations to be performed Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup Introduction This chapter provides an overview of the relationships between Setup Options Window the camera the controller and the host computer This ean 3 Detector Temperature overview is followed by a discussion of the Setup Wizard that Virtual Chip runs the first time you select Hardware from the Setup menu pare Figure 6 The remainder of the chapter presents the Hardware EN Setup tab pages so you will be able to make the appropriate C A selections and entries for your system Preferences Load Factory Defaults gt The chapters that follow describe how to configure a spectrograph set up a pulser set up experiment parameters and control array temperature Initial data acquisition is discu
200. ied systems for gated and CW Shutter operation During manufacture a Model IIC 200 is configured 208 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C for operation with a Gen II intensifier or with a Gen III intensifier but not for operation with both types IIC 300 Combined image intensifier power supply and moderate performance gating pulse generator Gated and CW Shutter operation PIV version available During manufacture a Model IIC 300 is configured for operation with a Gen II intensifier or with a Gen IMI intensifier but not for operation with both types Miscellaneous Components OFA An adapter for connecting a fiber optic input to a spectrometer Two versions are available for the best possible f matching see the price list for details CC 100 Closed coolant circulator not a chiller designed for TE TEA or ICCD cameras UV Lens f 1 2 catadioptric lens only for ICCD or PI MAX cameras CCD Array Designators The designators in the following list are often used on camera serial labels to identify the CCD array in the camera B Back illuminated CCD DDA Dual diode array CCD F Front illuminated CCD in many cases no letter is used E CCD made by EEV T CCD made by Thomson K CCD made by Kodak H CCD made by Hamamatsu HS High speed MicroMAX system runs at 5 MHz FT Frame transfer detector M MPP multi pin phasing CCD P Usually CCD offered exclusively by Roper Scientific PDA Photodiode array R Deep de
201. ies non aneian 38 Displaying data as 3D graph 95 Division math operation eee 137 Documentation additional 00 18 E H EB re o ei E 132 Edge Enhancement eee 151 163 Laplacian maskS eee eeeeeeeeeees 153 param ter Sisena in 152 PLOCEUIC s sickest Att nni 153 Sobel edge detection ee 153 Exclusive OR math operation 138 Exponential Data type DG535 Sequential 184 Files of Type text bOX oo eee 70 Filter Matrix tab page CUSTOM TILER s oaeen R 158 Find Peaks effect on displayed peak height 77 in wavelength calibration procedure 77 Fixed Increment type DG535 Sequential 184 Flatfield corrections 0 cee ee eeeeeeeees 133 acquiring a flatfield file 133 AULOMAUIC iaioe 133 FT IMAGE SHIFT signal 36 Full lateral resolution 0 0 0 eee 243 Gate Delay DG535 Sequential 183 Gate Width DG535 Sequential 183 Gluing spectra oo elec eeeeeseeeeeeee 145 existing data files 0 0 eee 145 final resolution eee 146 Glued Data File Name 0 000 00 146 starting ending wavelength values 146 tH OLY oirein sees steteecasts eteaettene 148 GPIB default address setting 0 000 180 Graphics card s s cs04 scott aceili ideestg estes 20 Graphs labeling eee eee eeeeeeeeee 104 Grating MAING e n Ra 47 PALAMCCELS sesio eiiie 46 selecting and MOVING sssseseeeseeeeeeeee 47 TUNES E ir E ER 46 Grouping in
202. ilable whether the data is displayed as Cursor gt an image graph or 3D graph can be accessed by right clicking Zoom gt anywhere in the data display area Brief descriptions of the New gt provided functions follow Colorbar Note Right clicking inside an ROI will open the ROI context ea tad ment v Toolbar Display Layout File Information Figure 85 Data Window Context menu Labeling Graphs and Images For graphs and images the normal context menu right click is as shown in Figure 86 4 Hg argon spe 1025 X 1 X 1 Autoscale Auto 5 95 Cursor Zoom New Info Bar v Toolbar Display Layout File Information Figure 86 Normal Context menu This menu was changed for ROIs If there is an ROI and if the mouse is right clicked in the ROI the context menu changes to that shown in Figure 87 Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 105 g argon spe 1025 X 1 X 1 3 PIIIEIIIIIIEEIIIEEEIIEE R 4 Autoscale Auto 5 95 Zoom In Label Display Erase Labels Close ROI 4 4 4g 4 4 d 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 g g g g g g g g 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 z 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 H 4 4 4 p cd y ALLELLEELEESEEE SEES EEE Figure 87 ROI Context menu If the mouse is right clicked outside the ROI the normal menu Figure 86 appears The ROI context menu Figure 87 contains the usual actions pertaining to the
203. iming mode available when using the ST 138 Controller Demo Allows the software to be exercised without being connected to a controller This mode is used primarily for demonstration purposes or post processing of acquired data and cannot be used in an actual measurement Interrupt Level The interrupt level for a PCI card is reported but cannot be changed Card Number This field only appears if more than one PCI card has been detected in your computer This field allows you to set up the communications parameters so each card is uniquely addressed O Address The I O Address for a PCI card is reported but cannot be changed VO Address 2 and 3 High Speed PCI only These addresses are reported but cannot be changed address selection is automatic and under computer control With other interfaces these addresses are not displayed 40 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Entering the Cleans Skips Characteristics Caution For most applications the default settings lt Samaes will give the best results We advise Carretera Deal Tataee Cote contacting the factory for guidance before changing these parameters from their T default values Exception With a PI MAX PE E eoo g camera we suggest settings of Cleans 1 and eR ey S Strips per Clean 4 Minimum Block Size 16 ce and Number of Blocks 32 ea The Cleans Skips tab page allows you to EE E change the clean and skip parameters from Vertical Skips the
204. implemented for the first controller and the Setup Wizard is not necessary The wizard leads you through the initial selection of interface controller type and Detector Camera CCD type Once you have finished entering information through the wizard it exits to the Hardware Setup dialog box where you can make the remaining selections and review those made using the wizard The text that follows includes pictures of the dialog boxes you may see and background information about Non Volatile RAM NVRAM interface cards controllers and default selections Wherever possible the text follows the order in which the dialog boxes will appear WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C 1 Optional Disk Optional Configuration Disk x In most cases you will not be getting a I New System Configuration Disk with An Bata ret pee w Systems your system Therefore the default selection is NO If you do have such a New System Configuration Disk disk you would select YES and follow the directions for loading the information from that disk _ ee NO Figure 10 Optional Configuration Disk dialog box 2 PVCAM Supported Camera Yes No Selection WinSpec 32 supports P CAM x Princeton Instruments and Photometrics brand Are you using a PYCAM supported camera detectors as well as the Acton InSpectrum The C Yes No choice of Yes or No determines the sequence of Hardware Wizard dialogs Cancel Help No is the defau
205. in WinX 2 5 X DIEAinetics Kaa ARR Camera to NVRAM Defaults Temperature Lock Status WinX 2 5 x doesn t utilize hardware lock status w e e o Virtual Chip Custom Timing Custom Chip Frames per Interrupt File Information Not all header info is currently available in WinX 2 5 x through PVCAM Table 5 Features Not Supported under USB 2 0 continued on next page 233 234 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C al er with USB 2 0 in eas ee 2 5 X Macro Record Macros recorded for non PVCAM cameras may have to be re recorded to function Table 5 Features Not Supported under USB 2 0 Appendix H Troubleshooting USB 2 0 Introduction The following information is provided for troubleshooting communication errors that may occur when computer controller communication uses the USB 2 0 protocol Data Loss or Serial Violation You may experience either or both of these conditions if the host computer has been set up with Power Saving features enabled This is particularly true for power saving with regard to the hard drive Make sure that Power Saving features are disabled while you are running WinSpec 32 Data Overrun message Because of memory constraints and the way that USB transfers data a Data overrun has occurred message may be displayed during data acquisition If this message is displayed take one or more of the following actions 1 Minimize the number of programs running in the background while y
206. inal Image left and Eroded Image right Figure 141 Morphological Parameters tab page Chapter 15 Post Acquisition Mask Processes 157 k E Figure 144 Original Image left and Opened Image with Three Iterations right Morphological Procedure Use the following procedure to morphologically process an image 1 2 3 Select Morphological from the Process menu Enter the Input Image and Output Image names On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed If you want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values Select the desired Mask Type and Mask Operation To set a specialized 3 x 3 mask select User Defined and change the Kernel parameters to their new values Click on Apply to begin processing 158 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Custom Filter Custom Filter x Filter Matrix tab page The Custom Filter Filter Matrix tab page allows you to set the filter matrix parameter values The filter is applied to the dataset specified via the Input tab page page 151 The processed data is saved in the file specified by the Output tab page page 151 Filtering is accomplished by mask operations defined by parameters entered in the matrix These functions
207. ing is 15 2 Following all intensifier Taara fi Pa ie precautions listed in the hardware a manuals turn on the DG535 and lope Tenniriatisn wait for it to initialize If the C Extemal Festive CHi DG535 isn t turned on the D jentie e booms WinSpec 32 software won t be able to program it 3 Select Setup and then Pulsers to open the Pulsers dialog box OK Cancel Download To DG535 Hel 4 Select DG535 Then click on aneen aaa elp the Setup DG535 button The Figure 170 DG535 dialog box DG535 dialog box will open Chapter 18 10 11 Pulser Operation 181 Click onthe Comm Port tab ESI lt j Figure 171 For the Port Type select GPIB Then set the Port Address to Triggers Gating Comm Port the GPIB address of the Pot Type GPIB DG535 Default setting is 15 a TE Once you have selected the ee i correct port address click on Initialize Port If the software cannot find the pulser on this port such as if the pulser is not turned on or if the address setting incorrect you will get an error message If this happens check the address check the cable connections OK Cancel Download To DG535 Help and check that the pulser is powered Figure 171 DG535 Comm Port tab page Click on the Triggers tab Me Figure 172 Triggers Gating Comm Port Select the Trigger mode either Input Trigger Made Internal in which the DG535 i Intemal F ii ji
208. ing ry Use Defaut Fie Name can occur without warning Experiment File Name _PD W Notify When File Has Been Saved nane A The file is saved at the end of the data acquisition run You will be notified that this has occurred if this box is Cancel checked Use Default File Name If checked Figure 178 sequence Kaes Tile i dialog box sequence value file name will be experiment file name but with the extension PDW If unchecked you must enter the name in the Name field Name If not using the default name for the sequence value file enter the file name in the provided field The button at the end of the box opens a browser to facilitate assigning the file location Software Accumulations Sets the number of exposures to be taken for each Shot Note that the number of Accumulations set here must be the same as the value set on the Experiment Setup Main tab page for proper operation 15 After you have finished setting up the parameters click on Download to DG535 This writes all of the parameter values to the DG535 16 Click on OK to close the window Note The DG535 can also be controlled interactively as data is being collected Chapter 18 Pulser Operation 187 Timing Generator Interactive Trigger Setup The Fe button on the Custom Toolbar allows Timing Generator Interactive Trigger Setup x you to select the PTG or DG535 trigger mode Frequency poo Hz Internal or External while acquiring data ss
209. ings dialog box as Stop Bits 1 7 shown in Figure 24 mT Use Flow Control 5 Set the connection preferences G Hardware RTS CTS according to the requirements C Software ZON ZOFA of your spectrograph For Acton Spectrographs use the i Cancel Help settings shown in Figure 25 6 Click on OK to close the Figure 24 Comm Settings dialog box Comm Settings dialog box All parameters will be stored and automatically restored whenever WinSpec 32 is booted Notes 1 Set the COM parameters separately for each COM port that has an installed spectrograph 2 Only one spectrograph at a time can be active at each COM port However multiple spectrographs can be installed for each COM port If you plan to install more than one spectrograph for a COM port it would be a good idea to make sure that the connection preferences are the same for all of the spectrographs assigned to that port 46 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Specifying the Active Spectrograph If you have installed more than one spectrograph you need to define the Active controlled Spectrograph If there is only one spectrograph that one is the active one If there is more than one than you must designate the active one This can be done via the Define Spectrograph Main tab page the Move Gratings tab page to access click on Move in the Spectrograph menu and via the Calibrate Spectrograph dialog box to access click on Calibrate in the Spectrograph
210. inting a Screen Capture soe ener aee irar Aye e pi ete ty pee Rens 172 Saving as TIF a d Printing sninenencniernenernnn e eee eee ee ais 172 Chapter 16 Pulser Operation ssiscicsccaeesscsieecsiccssccsseaiacnsccaescsssassensenasacessnasentesevs 173 Introductions ire e leeds alias EEE lies dees eee es dnt hans diel onde 173 PG200 Programmable Pulse Generator 0 0 eee eeeceseeeneeeneeensecaeceaecnseenseeeseeeseeseneeeaes 173 Programmable Timing Generator PTG cee cee ceecesceseceseeeeeeeeneeeseeeaeeeaaecaecaecaeeenaes 177 DG535 Digital Delay Pulse Generator eee eee eseceeseeeseeeeeceecaecesecnseesseeeseeeseeeeneesaes 180 Timing Generator Interactive Trigger Setup cece eseeeseeeeeeseeeeseeseeeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeenaes 187 Chapter 19 Custom Toolbar SettingS ccssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 189 WNtrOMUCHIONS 2is35 eerste sais sete es eee ees eee A 189 Displaying the Custom Toolbar eeeesesseeseeeseecssecsseceseccaecaecsaecnseenseeeseeeseeeeeeeenes 189 Customizing the Toolbar c ssccsiseitn ea thn ete tests ten eines een als 189 Individual Dialog Item Descriptions ee eeeeesecsecsseeeeecnseceaecesecnseenseeeneeeneesneeesaes 190 Chapter 20 Software Options eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 193 Introduction eeen tetee niae eir EE E E EEE E rO O ET E a ated OE EEES 193 Custom Chip WX CsStEhP Opt n isini eere eea in e i i E e a a ia 193 Custom Timing WXC st TINL
211. ion Sequence eee 86 changing Cleans and Skips settings 40 running different versions 231 WinSpec 32 and WinView 32 in same CiLOCtOTY oien e ia 22 23 CCD Blemish removal eee 134 Circuit spe displayed 0 eee 108 Clean cy cles inniinn iii 119 CLEANING signal eee ee eeeeeeereees 36 Cleans Skips tab page cies 40 Cleansiie chested needa teehee aver 40 Minimum Block Size sessen 42 Number of Blocks 00 eerie 42 Number of Cleans 00 0 eee eee 40 Number of Strips per Clean 00 000 40 Use Continuous Cleans Instruction 41 Cleans Skips tab page parameters Clean Modes sosirea 41 Vertical Skips i c sceeesveiteitedieseeseescsiee 42 Clipping and Threshold procedure 164 Closing a data file ee eee eeeeeeeneees 73 Color axes labels graphs background and SUITACES itarar anai auni 114 Communication Error with Spectrograph 84 Compatibility WinSpec 16 and WinSpec 32 231 Complement math operation 138 Computer requirement eee 19 Contact information eee 248 Continuous cleans 120 Continuous Cleans Instruction 41 122 Correction techniques cece 131 Cosmic Ray removal ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 134 Cross Sections post processing 165 Cross sections procedure eee 165 Cursor CURVE filets ais titers fo 102 Cursor functions data displayed as graph or image 100 Custom
212. ip tab pafen roneo ae arinena eet nee eet ween eee 193 Custom Timing tab page erosioaren ieii a i a 194 PIES dialog Dox c isean anr Gate Ge Sn eta han i 195 Macro Record dialog DX cee ceeseceseceseceseceseeeseeeseeeeaeeeaeecsaeeaaecnaecaeeenaes 195 Install Remove Spectrographs dialog DOX ce ceeeescesseceseceeeceeeeeseeeeeeees 196 Virtual Chip Functional diagram 0 ce eeseseeeseecsecsseceseceseceseeesecesaeenseen 197 Virtual Chip dialog DOK passeieren e aee a et nae ERRE 197 Wavelength Calibration Spectrum eeseseeseeseeeeeseseresrrsresresrrsresresrresresrese 212 Relationships of amp and B in terms of W and Y sssssssssssssesesesesisesssessssesesese 224 Relationship between and the focal length detector angle and the distance f A fromimage planen phasi na a daa santa a E T A is ate 225 Figure 188 WinSpec WinView or WinXTest Selection dialog bOX eee 229 Figure 189 Maintenance dialog DOX 0 ce ceecesceseceseceseeeseeeeneesneesseesaeecaaeceaeeeaeeenaeenaes 230 Figure 190 Media Password dialog DOX ese ceecceseceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeecaeeeaeecaecaecnaaeenaes 230 Figure 191 Select Components dialog DOX eee eeseceseceseecsseceseceseceseenseeeseceseeeeneesaes 230 Figure 192 Hardware Wizard Interface dialog DOX cece ceseceseceseceseeeeeeeseeeeeeeenee 236 Figure 193 RSConfig dialog DOR sarrerei eea Eea eaa Aa E Geet 236 Figure 194 Hardware Wizard PVCAM dialog bOX sseeesseee
213. ir default values or to reload the default Minimum Block Size j H values Figure 18 shows all of the fields Number of Blocks f and checkboxes that exist on the Cleans Skips tab page WinSpec 32 will display and hide features based on the controller version All of the features shown are described in the text that follows i ae to rae 9 Cleaning for Figure 18 Cleans Skips tab page additional information Load Default Values Reloads the factory defaults from the NVRAM Cleans Cleans are applied to the entire CCD array and remove charge that has accumulated on the array while waiting for data acquisition to begin The charge on the CCD chip is transferred to the shift register and discarded to prevent charge buildup from occurring On completion of a setup successive clean cycles occur normally The Number of Cleans and Number of Strips per Clean parameters allow you to program additional clean cycles that will be performed after initiating the run but before any data is taken Number of Cleans For most applications the default value should be used Clicking on the Load Default Values button and then selecting Yes will install the default value Values other than the default can be directly entered in the field or selected via the spin buttons Number of Strips per Clean Sets the number of CCD data strips to be transferred and discarded during each clean The maximum valid setting is limited by the chip size The default value will gene
214. ition of Array Sizes HDRNAMEMAX 120 USERINFOMAX 1000 COMMENTMAX 80 LABELMAX 16 FILEVERMAX 16 DATEMAX 10 ROIMAX 10 TIMEMAX 7 3978 4018 4094 4096 4098 special Intensity scaling string empty block to reach 4100 bytes avalanche gain was used avalanche gain value Always the LAST value in the header Max char str length for file name User information space User comment string max length 5 comments Label string max length File version string max length String length of file creation date string as ddmmmyyyy 0 Max size of roi array of structures Max time store as hhmmss 0 221 222 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Start of Data The data follows the header beginning at offset 4100 In WinView WinSpec the data is always stored exactly as it is collected The order of the data depends on the placement of the shift register In the diagram below the shift register is on the RIGHT SIDE of the chip Each COLUMN of data is first shifted RIGHT into the shift register and then DOWN The data is read and stored in this order First column read XnYm XnYm 1 XnY2 XnY1 Last column read X1Ym X1Ym 1 X1Y2 X1Y1 X1Y1 X2Y1 XnYl s X1Y2 X2Y2 xny2 H ee X1Ym 1 X2Ym 1 Xnym 1 F v X1Ym X2Ym Xnym T In the diagram below the shift register is on the BOTTOM of the chip Each ROW of data is first shifted DOWN into the shift register and then RIGHT The
215. itor while the Interactive a Tee Camera dialog box is oe aa mesccat Focus the system optics and set the Interactive Camera dialog box Exposure Lancel He Time RS170 Scaling and Offset adjustments for the best viewed image In addition to the Exposure Time Intensity Scaling and Offset parameters the Pattern parameters determine which CCD pixels will be displayed on the video monitor Note that in Focus mode the images will not appear at the computer but only at the video monitor If the number of pixels on the CCD is very much larger than the number of video pixels you can use the Pan function to select any one of nine different subsets to display The Zoom function gives additional control One to one mapping from the selected region to the screen occurs with 2x selected You may additionally have the option of selecting Binning in which a wider view is achieved by combining adjacent pixels or Decimation in which pixels are discarded according to an algorithm C Decimation Figure 49 MicroMAX or ST 133 Interactive Camera dialog box The exposure time will be the same as that set via the Experiment Setup Main tab page The two exposure settings track Changing it at either location should update the other setting automatically The Intensity Scaling together with the Offset determines how the image data is mapped to the 256 gray scale levels Begin with the Intensity Scaling set to 1 to 4096 slide
216. ixel has some wavelength coverage and is not just a wavelength point When WinSpec reports the wavelength of a pixel it is actually the wavelength at the center of the pixel Since WinSpec uses a polynomial wavelength calibration the wavelength at the center of a pixel x is n Wavelength center Ao A X A X and the wavelengths at the edges are given by Wavelength edges Ay AX 2 A x 12 where the is for one edge and the for the other The intermediate and output file data points also have a finite wavelength coverage given by the Final Resolution item on the Step and Glue or Post Process Glue dialog For example with a Starting Value of 400 nm Ending Value of 700 nm and Final Resolution of 1 nm the Output File will have 301 data points each with a coverage of 1 nm The file itself will actually cover the range from 399 5 nm to 700 5 nm The data point at 500 nm will have a wavelength coverage from 499 5 nm to 500 5 nm The wavelength calibration of the Output File will be linear and the wavelength at point x given by Wavelength center of point x Starting Value Final Resolution x 1 For each point in the Intermediate File the conversion routine sums in values from all pixels whose wavelength range overlaps the wavelength range of the data point If the pixel lies entirely within the range of the data point then 100 of its value is added if a pixel partial
217. izard will only present the choice Demo in the Interface dialog box Figure 196 Clicking on Next presents an Error Creating Controller Error 129 message clicking on OK presents The Wizard Can Not Continue Without a Valid Selection message clicking on OK presents the Interface dialog box again Interface x Select the type of interface your system has oms e Figure 196 Hardware Wizard Interface dialog box At this point you will need to exit WinSpec and run the RSConfig exe program which creates a file called PVCAM INI This file contains information required to identify the interface camera and is referenced by the Hardware Wizard when you are setting up WinSpec 32 with USB for the first time 1 2 3 If you have not already done so close WinSpec 32 Make sure the ST 133A is connected to the host computer and that it is turned on Run RSConfig from the Windows Start Programs Roper Scientific menu or from the directory where you installed WinSpec When the RSConfig dialog box Figure 197 appears you can change the camera name to one that is more specific or you can keep the default name Camera When you have finished click on the Done button RSConfig 2 6 xi Names q Style Camerat Princeton Style USB2 Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Camera 8 Figure 197 RSConfig dialog box You should now be able to open WinSpec and
218. l cursor from strip to strip Shift End strip Shift Home moves it to the last moves to first strip Displaying the Data Large cross rays extend to edges of data set with projections through the cross section profiles if displayed Both mouse and arrow keys can place cursor at any pixel on image Home and End keys move Same as Small Cursor and Graph combination 101 Shift End to last Strips may all be from same frame or each may be from a different frame Same as Small Cursor and 3D Graph except that cursor ray projections through the cross section profiles are provided These will not necessarily be visually aligned with the cursor cursor to end points on strip Shift Home moves cursor to first strip Shift End moves it to the last strip Strip Selection As described above when displaying data as a graph the up down arrow keys can be used to select a higher or lower numbered strip This is true if displaying multiple strips or a single strip For additional utility where a large change is required Shift Home can be used to move the selection to the first strip and Shift End to move it to the last one Four of the Custom Toolbar buttons similarly allow the selected strip to be changed when data is displayed as a graph x Selects the first strip Selects the last strip gt Selects the next strip Selects the previous strip These buttons have no effect on the strip s
219. lOn dieszscseibssoekcetise se hae eke eae gaa Lawes Wad oad a ee 119 Clean Cycles rnn i i te et he Ree ee IRE aa ER 119 Continuous Cleans a ads Aiea Racha So Asa ah pea doa adeeb eae hes 120 Continuous Cleans Instruction cccccccceeesesssssesssssssssssssssssssseseseseseseessesssseessseeeseseseeees 122 ROIs anid Cleaning snissesis ess detent Sache nes ak ee einen 122 Kin tics and Cleanic end ae i ee a ee a eh tele ees 122 Table of Contents v Chapter 10 ROI Definition amp Binning ccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 123 OS aA LA AAEE EEA EE EE 123 Binning Group and Height parameters essseeeseeeseseesesressesrrssesrrssresirsresresressrssresrs 124 Defining ROIS ar eaer ne nen erea Steeda ean teat DES eR kame 126 Defining an ROI via Easy Biho eneren areri iiie a ieis 128 Defining ROIs by Keyboard entry sssesssseseessessssesresrrsresresressesrrssreseesrenresressesreesrs 129 Defining ROIs by Mouse Input seneraran es 130 Chapter 11 Correction Techniques ssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 131 Introduction gt 22 t c2s ste a aes peeve dyed Gen dn hans tiled one ie 131 Background Subtraction ssectsc scte reni lees eels guise A R E aS 131 Flatfield Correction erenn eet tel E A ae A A a de 133 CCD Blemishes ennen or e eed hate eee A A ees Geet oes 134 Cosmic R y Removal ssisccsccicscctesssscstogistvosdtstestiteceauserdgeeeesd soeseedesyesetlsasebeste
220. laser wavenumber for relativ WN reserved If set to 200 valid label below Calibration label NULL term d Calibration Expansion area Start of Y Calibration Structure double offset double factor char current unit char reserved1 char string 40 char reserved2 40 char calib valid char input_unit char polynom unit char polynom order char calib count double pixel _position 10 double calib value 10 double polynom coeff 6 double laser_position char reserved3 unsigned char new calib flag char calib label 81 char expansion 87 3489 3497 3505 3506 3507 3547 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3672 3752 3800 3808 3809 3810 3891 offset for absolute data scaling factor for absolute data scaling selected scaling unit reserved special string for scaling reserved flag if calibration is valid current input units for calib value linear UNIT and used in the polynom coeff ORDER of calibration POLYNOM valid calibration data pairs pixel pos of calibration data calibration VALUE at above pos polynom COEFFICIENTS laser wavenumber for relativ WN reserved If set to 200 valid label below Calibration label NULL term d Calibration Expansion area End of Calibration Structures Char Istring 40 Char Spare 6 76 SHORT AvGainUsed SHORT AvGain SHORT lastvalue Defin
221. ld enter 1 for the slow decay amplitude and 5 for the fast decay amplitude Keep in mind that it is the ratio that is being expressed For example there is no difference between entering slow and fast amplitude values of 1 and 5 and entering fast and slow amplitude values of 10 and 50 186 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C View Width Delay Sequence Opens a dialog box listing the currently programmed sequence of gate width and gate delay Width usec Delay usec 5 000000000000 1 000000000000 values 5 000000000000 6 000000000000 5 000000000000 11 000000000000 Save Sequence Values to File When this ee pests box is checked the sequence values will be 5 000000000000 26 000000000000 saved on completion of the run The values 5 000000000000 31 000000000000 5 000000000000 36 000000000000 saved are those actually used to take the 0 data The file could be recalled later and used for data normalization or other purposes 500000000000 41 000000000000 F nnoannnnnnnann 46 noannnnanoann al d Setup File Opens the Sequence Values File dialog box Figure 178 which enables the following Figure 177 Gate Width Delay Sequence dialog box Sequence Yalues File x M Ask Before Overwriting Ask Before Overwriting If checked you will be queried before a new sequence value file overwrites an I Notify When File Has Been Saved existing one If unchecked overwrit
222. ld not be displayed 2 Change the axis label for both axes Then click on OK The displayed axes will no longer be named Pixel and Strip but rather the new labels 3 Try selecting different fonts to see the effect Only True type or Type 1 Postscript fonts will work correctly Open the Fonts dialog box change the various font choices and click on OK twice To return to the original font choices select 10 pt Arial Regular 4 Reopen the Axes tab page and change the axis labels back to their original designations Pixel for horizontal Strip for vertical WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Display Layout Circuit spe 268 X 248 X 1 General Range Color Axes 30 Layout Image Layout Cursor IV Horizontal Axis Calibration On C Off M Label Units ida E Wavelength nm V Vertical Axis M Label s trip Save as Default Cancel Help Figure 105 Axes tab page Font Font Font style Size rial Regular fi 0 8 A O Arial Black fitaic Cancel O Arial Narrow Bold AvantGarde Bold Italic BakerSignet T BankGothic Lt BT 14 T BankGothicMdBT gt 16 E Effects Sample T Strikeout T Underline a Color HM Black v Script Westem z Figure 106 Fonts dialog box vee the Color of the Axes and Labels Open the Color tab page Note that there is a button for each item to which a color can be assigned and that the current color for each ite
223. lease the mouse button Because the data is displayed the moment you depress the mouse button and then updated as you drag the cursor you can see the effects of dragging the axis while moving it When working with a high density data set every nth line will be suppressed during the adjustment so the process remains fast When the data is displayed as desired releasing the mouse button will cause the entire data set to be displayed with the new orientation TIP Since you can move the cursor outside the data window reducing the data window size before adjusting the Z axis will give you greater range of motion while dragging the axis 2 Click on OK The data should be redisplayed as shown in Figure 84 with the hidden surface clearly visible s4 Hid lamp spe 701 X 40 X 1 Pixel 328 Intensity 469253 00 point 328 strip 19 frame 1 Figure 84 3D Plot with Hidden Surfaces 3 If the hidden surfaces aren t clearly delineated you may need to change their color Use the Normal Hidden Surface button on the Display Layout Color tab page to choose a different hidden surface color Note that the Marker Hidden Surface button allows you to set the color of the marker curves in hidden surface regions 104 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Data Window Context menu For your convenience the essential data window functions Autoscale have been gathered into a single menu illustrated in Figure 85 Auto 5 95 This menu which is ava
224. lish the Experiment Setup parameters for acquiring the data on which the Y T analysis is to be performed 2 Select Y T Analysis on the Acquisition menu This will open the Y T Area and Equation Setup dialog box Figure 129 141 142 W Sl Gy A WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Define the Areas and Equations for the Y T analysis A detailed discussion of the Y T Area and Equation Setup dialog box and the process of setting Areas and Equations is available in the online Help Click OK in the Y T Area and Equation Setup dialog box to close the dialog box Select Experiment Setup on the Acquisition menu Select the Processes tab page Figure 130 Click the On Line Y T checkbox to activate the Y T Setup button Checking the box turns on Y T analysis It will take place during any data acquisition run initiated with this box checked YT Area amp Equation Setup Experiment Setup Bonnen e2braner Wom Gras pil es F g I Is j El alaa esene Gorection Equation bi itharvien Wor thar fae Figure 129 Y T Area and Equation Setup Figure 130 Processes tab page dialog box Chapter 13 10 11 Y T Analysis 143 Click on Y T Setup to open the Y T Setup dialog box F igure 13 1 Aquisition Parameters 3 Horai Run Time Computed SampleTime Set the T Acquisition mode ps0 z eee jo PA Focus Snapshot or Average and E r TR set the Y T Analysis parameters A ps io a
225. ll offset This offset assures that small signals won t be missed This offset can be subtracted after the signal is acquired to prevent it from having any influence on the data Background subtraction allows you to automatically subtract any constant background in your signal This includes both constant offsets caused by the amplifier system in the controller as well as time dependent but constant for a fixed integration time buildup of dark charge Some users collect background spectra with the shutter open including ambient light in their background data The background subtract equation is Raw image data Background Corrected image data When background and flatfield operations are both performed background subtraction is always performed first The equation is the following Raw image data Background Flatfield Corrected image data Below are instructions for collecting and using background data files Acquiring Background Files This operation is similar to normal data acquisition 1 Use exactly the same temperature setting as will be used in data collection Wait at least 30 minutes after the detector has reached operating temperature to ensure stability 2 Set the same binning parameters ROI and Exposure 3 Select Acquire Background from the Acquisition menu This will immediately acquire a background file using the Experiment Setup parameters only the shutter will remain closed for most applications To
226. ll only be used for post processing data If you plan to collect data and the card is not installed in your computer you will need to install it and add the hardware after WinSpec 32 is installed e If installing under Windows NT 2000 or XP make sure that you are logged on as administrator of the Workstation Otherwise the installation will fail because changes cannot be made to the Windows Registry e Check to see if WinView 32 has been installed on your system If it has note the directory name so you won t accidentally install WinSpec 32 in the same directory e Determine how you will be installing the software WinSpec 32 is provided on a CD shipped with the system or it can be installed from the Roper Scientific FTP site During the installation process you will be given the choice of AUTO PCI or Custom installation Click on Custom if you are using a SPEX spectrograph AUTO PCI Installs the WinSpec 32 application and DLLs the help files the INF file if required and the interface drivers sample data diagnostic programs Acton spectrograph support pulser support ASCII and Move Snap Ins PI Screen Saver PI SPE Shell Extension Visual Basic Interface and the Imaging option Custom By default installs the WinSpec 32 application and DLLs the help files documentation Acton spectrograph support pulser support selected Snap Ins PI Screen Saver PI SPE Shell Extension and the Imaging option However you can change the
227. lt selection This is the appropriate choice if you have a Princeton Instruments detector that uses the TAXI protocol PCI interface After you click on Next the wizard looks for a Princeton Instruments brand compatible PCI card and opens the Interface dialog box Figure 11 PVCAM dialog box Yes is the appropriate choice if you have a Photometrics camera or an Acton InSpectrum or if the Princeton Instruments detector communication interface is USB 2 0 After you click on Next the wizard will create the PVCAM controller and will open the Controller Type dialog box 3 Interface Selection This dialog is skipped if you have a PVCAM supported detector Select the type of interface your system has If you are using a Princeton High Speed PCI Instruments brand detector with the RS PCI interface and a compatible PCI card is found the choices will be cca __ Hee _ PCI Timer High Speed PCI and Demo The default will Figure 12 Interface dialog box be PCI Timer data transfer mode in which data transfer is controlled by a polling timer High Speed PCI is a data transfer mode in which data transfer is interrupt driven Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 33 Demo provides limited access to WinSpec functions and allows you to display previously acquired data and to use post processing techniques to analyze it After you have selected the interface click on Next to open the Controller Type dialog box 4
228. lumn 10 you would Figure 126 Blemish File have 9 lines of Os a 1 in the tenth row and Os in the remaining 1014 lines 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 4 5 When you have finished entering the Os and 1s save the file with a BLE extension Files with this extension are recognized by WinSpec as blemish files TIP If you have a long array use a spreadsheet that can save data to TXT files The numbered rows will help you keep track of where you are When you have finished with the data entry save the data to a text file TXT extension and then change the file extension to BLE Cosmic Ray Removal Causes highly localized spikes such as would be caused by cosmic rays interacting with the silicon of the CCD to be removed from the data after it is acquired but before it is stored Two different techniques in addition to OFF can be selected The Temporal technique compares a series of spectra and requires no user parameters The Spatial technique compares the data with the set threshold level If Spatial is selected the Sensitivity setting determines how large a data spike must be to be identified as a cosmic ray effect essentially the Sensitivity is a gain setting on the thresholding algorithm A value of 0 will find 0 cosmics while a setting of 100 will be most sensitive A setting of 50 will give good results in most situations Cosmic ray data is replaced by interpolated before and after data Chapter 12 Spectra Math Int
229. ly lies in the data point s range then the percentage of its value that is added is equal to the percentage of the pixel s wavelength range lying in the data point range In the above example if an input file pixel had a value of 1234 and a wavelength range of 498 9 nm to 499 6 nm then the amount summed into the 500 nm point 499 5 500 5 would be 499 6 499 5 499 6 498 8 1234 154 25 where 499 6 499 5 is the amount of pixel in data point range 499 6 498 8 is the coverage of the pixel and 1234 the pixel s value This algorithm unlike a simple interpolation or curve fitting followed by interpolation maintains both the general spectral shape and the intensity content of the original files Interpolation could totally remove a peak if it were between two adjacent output data point wavelengths The algorithm is general and doesn t depend on the input files having the same wavelength resolution or the same number of pixels Chapter 14 Gluing Spectra 149 In the second stage of the operation the intermediate file is glued into the output file The gluing is done in increasing wavelength point by point based on the wavelength value of the point Initially the output file contains all zeroes Files are glued into the output using several rules as follows For cases with no overlap between data in the intermediate file and the output file the intermediate file is just copied to the output file point by point
230. m Timing Default Timing From 1MH2 Z tab page to the dialog box The EIE Custom Timing selections are shown in Figure 183 The default timing parameter values have been determined to give the fastest possible performance without r Vertical F Horizontal compromising data acquisition p 8 q Phase fe a Phase fe performance Clock Rate usec 3 2 Clock Rate nsec 50 Roper Scientific does not Current Clock Current Clock encourage users to change these 2 Hes 4S 200 parameter settings For most applications the default settings will give the best results We strongly advise contacting the factory for guidance before customizing the chip timing parameters Figure 183 Custom Timing tab page FITS FITS exe FITS Flexible Image Transport System is the data format most widely used within astronomy for transporting analyzing and archiving scientific data files FITS is primarily designed to store scientific data sets consisting of multidimensional arrays images and 2 dimensional tables organized into rows and columns of information The FITS option allows you to acquire and save WinSpec 32 data in the FITS format This option also provides a file conversion function that allows you to convert existing WinSpec 32 SPE data files into the FITS format F1 help is included with the option Acquiring data in the FITS format starts with setting up the experiment parameters in WinSpec 32 With
231. m is indicated in a color swatch to the right of the button The default for the Axis is yellow 2 Click on Axis The color palette will open as shown in Figure 107 Default Display Layout x General Range Color Axes 3D Layout Image Layout Cursor Normal Graphs E Active 3D Graph Cursor Marker Graphs ey Background Normal Hidden Suttace aa Axis EA Marker Hidden Surface Ej V Save as Default Cancel Help Figure 107 Color tab page Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 115 Select a different color by clicking on the swatch of the desired color Then click on OK to close the Color dialog box and on OK again to close the Display Layout dialog my box The axes and colors will now appear with Bf the new color Basic colors Repeating the process open the Color dialog box again and restore the default color Again click on OK to close the Color dialog box and on OK again to close the Display Layout dialog box The axes and labels will now be displayed in the original color Custom colors BEE EEE if i i ip _ ip ip ip Define Custom Colors gt gt Coral Figure 108 Display Layout Color Palette Specifying a New ROI and Intensity Range 1 Open the Range tab page Note that you can change the displayed intensity range as well as the X Y range 2 Try entering more restricted ranges and note how the displayed image changes Changing the X Y range by ente
232. mSec detailed discussion of the Y T Acquisition modes and parameters is Aquisition Mode Average Snapshot C Focus available in the online Help Click on OK to close the box m Display Parameters Initiate data acquisition As the data is acquired Y T points will be computed and stored as described in the online Help for the Y T Setup dialog box If multiple equations were defined they 4 gt would be computed in order and there would be a separate Y T curve for each Selecting 3D Graph on the Display Layout Main page would allow all five De a to be viewed simultaneously If the Figure 131 Y T Setup dialog box selection is Graph only one would be visible The keyboard cursor up down arrow keys can be used to select the Y T curve to be viewed and the Info box shows which strip is being displayed 144 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C This page intentionally left blank Chapter 14 Gluing Spectra Introduction There are two ways to glue together multiple exposures into a single contiguous spectrum The first is to take existing spectra that have already been calibrated and have the WinSpec 32 software connect the spectra at the appropriate points The second method requires spectrometer control With correctly calibrated spectrometer control the WinSpec 32 software can collect spectra and move the spectrometer automating the process of collecting a spectrum whose wavelength range can extend the full s
233. mask select User Defined and change the Kernel parameters to their new values 7 Click on Apply to begin processing Chapter 15 Post Acquisition Mask Processes 155 Smoothing Functions Parameters tab page Smoothing is also accomplished by mask operations in this case parameters entered on the Smoothing Parameters tab page Figure 140 These masks Input Parameters Output Operation sometimes called low pass filters attenuate regions 7 Veer denned with high contrast while leaving pixels in regions of C Low Pass 1 low contrast almost unchanged Figure 139 illustrates eu the smoothing filter effect EE Kernel E a a 0 1 0 2 0 1 Mouse Apply Close Help k E Figure 139 Original Image left and Smoothed Image Figure 140 Smoothing Parameters right tab page Smoothing Procedure Use the following procedure to smooth an image 1 Select Smoothing from the Process menu 2 Enter the Input Image and Output Image names 3 On the Input tab page select the data frame containing the data on which the operation is to be performed 4 If you want to process only part of the Input Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values 5 Select one of the Operations Since image features vary widely it is best to simply try the different operations to
234. mation such as e commonly used system controller type and camera type terminology provided in Appendix A e Hg Ar Ne calibration spectrum data and graph provided in Appendix B and e data structure information provided in Appendix C Also included are appendices that address repair and maintenance of the WinSpec 32 software and installation work arounds for situations where the CD ROM doesn t support long file names A software hardware setup wizard guides you through the critical hardware selections the first time you select Setup Hardware To properly respond to the wizard s queries you may have to refer to your ordering information such as exact detector model A D converters etc Keep this information handy Even though the wizard will assist you in getting started it will still be necessary to read through this manual to familiarize yourself with the many data collection and analysis options available Note Throughout the manual references are made to the PI MAX camera detector This camera detector was previously called the I MAX and the ICCD MAX Summary of Chapter Information Part 1 Getting Started Introduction describes the contents of this manual as well as other information sources including online Help and other documentation files Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 lists system requirements and describes how to install the WinSpec 32 software Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup provides detail
235. may be installed These cucu mE parameters are specified on the Gratings tab page Figure 25 of the Define Spectrograph dialog box In the case of Grating Movement Mode Slew Faster 7 automated Acton spectrographs the grating Cancel Help information is automatically supplied Figure 25 Gratings tab page Setting the grating parameters Main Gratings Siits Mirors Connect Gratings Tl Display Warning On Grating Change 1 If there are two or more turrets enter the number of the turrets 2 Then from the Current Turret field select the turret whose grating parameters will be defined Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 47 If entries are missing or incorrect select the correct grooves mm value for each grating Make sure that the gratings are listed in the proper order Grating 1 listed first etc You can also enter a Name for each grating This option is required if you are using two gratings with the same groove density If for example you have two gratings with 300 grooves mm one blazed at 300 and one blazed at 500 you could enter BLZ300 and BLZ500 in the Name boxes as identifiers These are the Acton default names Then when you subsequently go to the Move Spectrograph dialog box to select the active grating they would then be listed as 300 BLZ300 and 300 BLZ500 and there would be no possibility of confusing them If significant backlash occurs when moving the selected gratin
236. menu On the Define Spectrograph Main page the selection is called Active Spectrograph on the Move Gratings tab page it is called Spectrograph to Move and in the Calibrate dialog box it is called Spectrograph to Calibrate In all three locations the function is simply to specify the active spectrograph and changing the selection in one location is equivalent to changing it in all three If only one spectrograph has been installed the box won t appear in the Move or Calibrate dialog boxes but the spectrograph model will be reported Entering Grating Information Once you have installed a spectrograph you may need to enter the grating information for the spectrograph if the spectrograph can t supply them automatically This is information that WinSpec 32 needs to move and calibrate the spectrograph correctly Grating information is supplied automatically for automated Acton spectrographs as stored in the spectrograph s electronics Grating Parameters The grating values are required for the dispersion calculation and for the Number of Turrets Current Turret selection of the active grating 2 hf Some spectrographs have interchangeable grating 1 2 3 turrets each able to mount up Grooves 300 jo F fizo0 to 3 gratings Where this is the n x Nam i i i case the grating information Sep crating 1 Grating 2 Grating 3 may have to be separately Steps nm 167 fic 5 fic 5 specified for each turret that epectlect
237. mera CCD Selection Note The Detector Camera CCD for a PVCAM supported camera is Select the type of detector or camera that your controller is running automatically determined from the camera entry in the PVCAM INI file The Detector Camera CCD dialog is displayed after you ier er select the controller type Only the detector camera or CCD types associated with the selected controller will be available for selection If your system has NVRAM the correct selection will be automatically made Otherwise you will need to choose from the list After you click on Finish the Hardware Setup dialog box will be displayed so you can begin entering other hardware information Figure 14 Detector Camera CCD Setup dialog box 34 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Entering Controller and Detector Characteristics The Controller Detector tab page may also be named Controller CCD Display Interface Cleans Skips Controller Camera or I Use PYCAM Controller Number Controller CCD depending on the hardware selections is used to enter and update Controller Controller Type Controller Version Type Detector Camera or CCD xxx EE y depending on the system Type Camera Type and some of the Controller xxx z Detector type parameters such as Shutter Type and Readout Mode The Controller and Detector TE Readout Mode LOGIC OUT Output Type selections are perhaps the Frame Transfer Not Scan 7 y Shu
238. mov Transparent Opaque Help whether the labels are to run vertically or horizontally The opaque background works well with images where the label can get lost inside the image The simplest way to label a display would be to place the ROI where the label should appear the origin starts at the top left corner of the ROI box right click inside the ROI box type the label text and click OK Figure 90 Label text entry box Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 107 s Hg argon spe 1025 X 1 X 1 This is the label Hg Argon Figure 91 Data with Finished Label Figure 90 shows a label as entered in the label text entry box Figure 91 shows the same label as it will appear with the data after clicking on OK Generally it is advisable to save the label in a comment field otherwise once the label is printed and the display is closed the label will be lost In fact once the label is on the display it cannot be edited However if it has been saved it can be edited as follows Erase labels Call up the display label menu Load the label Edit the label in the edit box Check the Save Label box to save the changes 6 Click OK to print the corrected label Oe Poe oS Labels are printed with the same font as is used for the axes To change fonts use the Display Layout Axes dialog and select Fonts this works even if axes are not displayed To reposition the label move or resize the ROI and Edit
239. mpted to enter the directory path either by keyboard entry or by using the browse function If you selected AUTO PCI WinSpec 32 automatically put the required INF file into the Windows INF directory and put the PCI card driver file in the Windows System32 Drivers directory Windows PCI INF Filename PCI Device Driver Name Version Located in Windows INF Located in Windows System32 Drivers directory directory Windows 2000 rspi inf in WINNT INF for rspipci sys in WINNT System32 Drivers and XP example for example Windows NT N A pi_pci sys Windows 95 98 pii inf pivxdpci vxd and Windows ME The INF directory may be hidden Table 1 PCI Driver Files and Locations Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 25 Installing the USB 2 0 Card Driver Administrator privileges are required under Windows NT 2000 and XP to install software and hardware Before installing the Roper Scientific USB2 Interface we recommend that you defragment the host computer s hard disk This operation reduces the time the computer spends locating files Typically the defrag utility Disk Defragmenter can be accessed from the Windows Start menu and can usually accessed from the Programs Accessories System Tools subdirectory After defragmenting the hard disk turn off the computer and make the USB cable connections between the host computer and the ST 133A Then turn the ST 133A on before turning
240. n 1 Input levels below Imin are mapped to the value of Ofirst and input levels above Imax are mapped to the value of Olast Imin Imax Imin Imax represents inclusive input range to be remapped Ofirst Ofirst is the output value for Imin or I1 02 O2 is the output value for I2 03 O3 is the output value for I3 04 O4 is the output value for 14 Olast Olast is the output value for Imax Example The following example is for a one to one mapping As stated previously the entries after Imin and Imax are output levels Based on the Imin and Imax values there are 5 output values 7 3 1 In this example every input intensity less than 3 Imin gets mapped to 20 3 Imin is mapped to 20 7 Imax is mapped to 10 and every input intensity greater than 7 Imax is mapped to 10 Olast Input intensities 4 5 and 6 are mapped to 22 23 and 26 respectively 3 7 20 22 23 26 10 Chapter 15 Post Acquisition Mask Processes 161 Format 2 This format is not a one to one mapping in that input intensities between Imin and Imax inclusive can be omitted from the list of In Out pairs Imin and Imax the minimum and maximum input levels inclusive are supplied in the first line with a comma delimiter This format expects an arbitrary number of entries in the form of In Out and the In Out pairs may be listed in any order The In value must be between Imin and Imax inclusive Anything less than Imin is mapped to the first Input mapping Anythin
241. naeen 71 Figure 54 Data File Save As dialog Dox cee eeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeseecaecaecnaecsaeeneeeeeeeneeens 72 Fisure 55 Sav As Data Ty pesin civledesinia aara etae aa Ero iaei Ge einai 72 Figure 56 Data Pil tab page mones scents setecintedeen seetcdelie et ae settee eteey cect tienda 73 Figure 57 Right click File Operations menu 0 ees eeeeseeseeceseceeeeeeeaecaecnseenseeeseeees 74 Figure 58 Calibration Usage dialog Dox cee eeeeeseeeseeeneeeseeeeecaaeceseeeaaecsaecaecsaeenaeens 75 Fisure 59 Calibration Menu irona eee eae a sii ieee E eg a aiae 76 Figure 60 Hg Argon Spectrum eie a er E iE EE ES E E 77 Figure 61 Calibration Setup dialog box after running Find Peaks routine on Hg Argon SPOCUUIMN tevssns seeasetisceousenesidia E E T EE NE E S EEE EEY 77 Figure 62 Spectrum after running Find Peaks routine eee eeseceseceseceneeeseeeseeenaeens 78 Figure 63 Setup Calibration screen after selecting peaks and entering calibration Wavelengths ER E chr ease ieee as ee eee T te ee 79 Figure 64 Spectrum after Calibration eessseeseesseeeesseseesresresresressesrrsseeressrentestesesreeeeeses 79 Figure 65 Spectrograph Calibration dialog DOX essseseesessessessessesrresesrieseesreseesresressesees 85 Figure 660 Offset dialogs DOX siriene E dean esse heater date 86 Fig re 67 Peak Finder Examples assosieer iat etae eiar ea sues ae i 87 Table of Contents Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72
242. nal Resolution in Nm PulserType 94 O None PG200 1 PTG 2 DG535 3 CustomChipFlag 96 T F Custom Chip Used XPrePixels 98 Pre Pixels in X direction XPostPixels 100 Post Pixels in X direction YPrePixels 102 Pre Pixels in Y direction YPostPixels 104 Post Pixels in Y direction asynen 106 asynchronous enable flag 0 off datatype 108 experiment datatype 0 FLOATING POINT 1 LONG INTEGER 2 INTEGER 3 UNSIGNED INTEGER PulserMode 110 Repetitive Sequential PulserOnChipAccums 112 Num PTG On Chip Accums PulserRepeatExp 114 Num Exp Repeats Pulser SW Accum PulseRepWidth 118 Width Value for Repetitive pulse usec PulseRepDelay 122 Width Value for Repetitive pulse usec PulseSeqStartWidth 126 Start Width for Sequential pulse usec PulseSeqEndWidth 130 End Width for Sequential pulse usec PulseSeqStartDelay 134 Start Delay for Sequential pulse usec PulseSeqEndDelay 138 End Delay for Sequential pulse usec PulseSeqIncMode 142 Increments 1 Fixed 2 Exponential PImaxUsed 144 PI Max type controller flag PImaxMode 146 PI Max mode PImaxGain 148 PI Max Gain BackGrndApplied 150 1 if background subtraction done PImax2nsBrdUsed 152 T F PI Max 2ns Board Used minblk 154 min of strips per skips numminblk 156 of min blocks before geo skps SpecMirrorLocation 2 158 Spectro Mirror Location O Not Present SpecSlitLocation 4 162 Spectro Slit Location O Not Present CustomTimingFlag 170 T F Custom Timing Used Experiment TimeLocal TIMEMAX Experim
243. nally installed will remain as will any files it contains that were not placed there during the original installation 2 The Data directory created during the original installation may also be deleted Any data files you want to save should be copied to a safe location before uninstalling 3 The Version and User identification will be removed from the registry However the registry also contains much information that was placed there in the course of setting up and operating the software That information will remain and will be available for use if WinSpec 32 is later reinstalled 4 Follow the instructions on the dialog boxes To later reinstall the software follow the Installing WinSpec 32 instructions provided earlier in this chapter Use the original installation CD and any options disks purchased separately Appendix G USB 2 0 Limitations The following information covers the currently known limitations associated with operating under the USB 2 0 interface Maximum cable length is 5 meters 16 4 feet 1 MHz is currently the upper digitization rate limit for the ST 133A Controller Large data sets and or long acquisition times may be subject to data overrun because of host computer interrupts during data acquisition USB 2 0 is not supported by the Roper Scientific PC Interface Library Easy DLLS Some WinView WinSpec 2 5 X features are not fully supported with USB 2 0 See the table below Supported with USB 2 0
244. nd the image will be displayed on the video monitor Note that the image will not be displayed on the computer monitor while the Interactive Operation dialog box is open 5 Focus the system optics and if necessary adjust the Exposure Time in the Interactive Camera dialog box for the best viewed image The exposure time will be the same as that set via the Experiment Setup Main tab page The two exposure settings track Changing it at either location should update the other setting automatically 6 When no further improvement in the observed image can be obtained click on Stop in the Interactive Operation dialog box to halt focus mode operation 7 Click on Close to close the Interactive Operation dialog box and return to the Experiment Setup dialog box 68 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Data Collection 1 Click on Focus to begin collecting data Data collection can be initiated by means of the Focus button in the Experiment Setup dialog box by selecting Focus from the Acquisition Menu or by clicking on the Focus button of the Custom Toolbar Images will be continuously acquired and displayed on the computer screen To store the most recent image click Start Storage on the Acquisition menu or click on the Start Store button on the Custom Toolbar Data acquisition will halt and the most recent image will be stored in a file having the name specified on the Data File tab page If you want to initiate data acquisition selec
245. nding allows a smooth transition for files with broad spectra 150 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Calibration and ROI Offsets In an ideal world when a CCD camera was attached to a spectrograph the center of the CCD array would coincide with the center of the spectrograph exit plane In the real world they can be separated by several pixels so that when the spectrograph goes to 0 nm the peak can show up 5 pixels to the right of the array center for example It is the function of the Calibration Offset is to compensate for this It is a wavelength which when sent to the Acton will cause the zero order to land in the center of the array This offset is then added to every wavelength sent to the Acton This offset does not depend on the scan pattern of the ROI used A second kind of Offset is used when x ROIs are programmed into the CCD The program is designed to keep the requested wavelength in the center of the ROI pattern in the center of a full x axis display If a full x axis is scanned or if the ROI is symmetrical just ignore the first and last 10 pixels e g then this ROI Offset is zero In the case of a very asymmetrical ROI where the first 512 pixels of a 1024 pixel array are skipped the center of the array is pixel 1 1024 2 512 5 and the center of the ROI is 513 1024 2 768 5 If the requested wavelength went to the center of the array rather than the center of the ROI it would be just outside the scanned pixels T
246. nect the Camera Controller cable to the Detector connector on the rear of the Controller and to the Detector connector at the rear of the camera Tighten down the locking screws 198 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C 5 If it has not been installed already connect a line cord from the Power Input module on the back of the Controller to a suitable AC power source 6 Turn on the Controller 7 Turn on the host computer and select the WinSpec 32 icon 8 From the Setup menu select Hardware and enter the following settings Controller CCD tab card Controller PentaMax MicroMAX ST 133 Controller Version 5 CCD Type appropriate frame transfer array EEV 512x512FT for this procedure Shutter Type None LOGIC OUT Output Shutter Readout Mode Frame Transfer Interface tab card Type the appropriate interface card For this procedure the selection is High Speed PCI Cleans Skips tab card Number of Cleans 1 Number of Strips per Clean 512 Minimum Block Size 2 Number of Blocks 5 9 From the Acquisition menu select Experiment Setup and enter the following settings Main tab card Exposure Time Enter a value The exposure time can either be greater than the readout time or it can be equal to the readout time If you want an exposure time gt readout time enter a value larger than the readout time calculated when the virtual chip definition was downloaded If you want an exposure time readout time enter 000 sec Number of Images
247. neki nna aen ea hk ee 97 Hid lamp spe 3D graph with region selected for viewing 98 Hide lamp spe 3D graph expanded to show defined region ee eeeeeeees 98 Graphical Display with Information bOX ee eeeessecsseceeceseceeeeseeeneeeeaeens 99 Single Strip displayed graphically ee eeeceeecsseeseneesseeeseeeeecaeenseceeeenaes 100 3D Display with Cursor curve and Marker Curves eseese 102 3D Plot with Hidden Surtaces s sccccsctesceecsissstbescesecenssensesestesesesossesttootece 103 Data Window Context Menu ow cee ee eescsseesseeeseeeseeeseeeaeceseceaecnseesseeees 104 Normal Context menu nesie oten nds e ntaso igen e eeta DT aE 104 ROL Context menssen ea a a e a ien iE 105 Label Display AGton astenne nesre en a haa aieia eee ke 106 Label Options subdialog bOX seeessseeeeseeseesssressesrrssersrssesstssrenresresseesresessee 106 Label text entry Doki jsices nen no e E hatin aan R i 106 Data with Finished Label 0 0 0 cee ceecesceseceseceeeeeseeeeseeeseeenaecaecaeenseesseeees 107 Edit box with line wrapped label and finished label with same line wraps 107 ROI resized to correct Line wrapping eeeeeeesceeseeseecseeceseceseeeseeesaeeeaeee 108 Display after changing Font Selection eeeseeeseceseceseceseceseeeseeeeneeeaes 108 Open dialogs DOK eis ices cecice dates neste a sere cee qh ieee ede eee Sa ETE i 109 Circuit spe Image ails a tiene ae 109 Brightness Contrast dialog DOX eeseeseeseessecssecsse
248. ng This procedure applies for a PentaMAX system that includes a video monitor connected to the Video port BNC of the PentaMAX If your system doesn t include a video monitor go to the Data Collection All Controllers section which begins on page 68 1 Select Video from the Acquisition menu This will allow live data to be displayed on your video monitor Interactive Operation 4 Hardware LUT j z Set LUT Exposure Control fo ooo sec h pu Focus Control RUN STOP Cancel Help Interactive Camera Operation x Exposure Time 000 Seconds h Cancel Help Paten Zoom Pan dx 2x 48 COCO ecc et Ooo Gar Binning Decimation r Hardware LUT Gamma x Set LUT stor RUN Figure 50 PentaMAX Interactive Operation dialog box 2 Select Video Focus from the Acquisition Menu The Interactive Operation dialog box that will be displayed depends on the PentaMAX version Version 5 and higher will display the righthand dialog box shown in Figure 50 Earlier versions display the lefthand dialog box 3 Note the Hardware LUT field This selection sets the scaling of the video display only Unless the signal is very weak the best LUT choice will be Gamma 4 Click on the RUN button in the Interactive Operation dialog box Data acquisition at the fastest possible rate will commence immediately a
249. ng the Cleans Skips Characteristics cccescesseeseeseeseeeeeeeseecseecaecsaecnseesseesseeess 40 Setting up a Spectrograph si isc sssececkessh essen elev oes GEE E stews E TET 43 Entering Grating Information 00 cee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeaeeeaeecsaecsaecaeceaeceaeesseeeseeeneeen 46 Entering Information for Software Controlled Slits and or Mirrors 0 ceseeeeeeeeeeeeee 48 Entering Laser Excitation Information ccceecescceseeseeeeeeeseeeseeeaeecseecaeceaecsaeenseenseeees 49 Chapter 3 Initial Spectroscopic Data Collection ssseeeeeessesseseeeees 51 INTrODUCTION nen he AEN ENE E gets se ee die eager R ERE E R tee ees 51 Pemiperature Control sss ccccisicecetassidete neeo eee a a O ea Ea EA N Oane 52 Cleans and SKIPS rea e a e econ ceeds e a e a Noel aden tates e eee e 52 Spectrograph ssrissesareeigecaccertesaeMesaccePaasdeguetes E EAEE n area Oe Eea aE AeA nea eOk eaa et 53 Experiment Setup Procedure riec eiee e a a a a a aedade E ieies 53 Data Collection ennerien i neee RE EEE EEE AEE AEEA EEE EEEE EEEE 57 Chapter 4 Initial Imaging Data Collection sssunsssnunsenunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne 59 IntrOdUCtiONn j2i 0seke cues neh Sata es Rene eee 59 Temp rature Control ou aoee pa a E E E E E EE S ETE 60 Cleansand SKIPS inienn a Mat REL ee Gee ee 60 Experiment Setup Procedure all controllers cee eeeeseesseceseeeseecneeceseceseceseeeeceseeeeeeens 61 Data Collection Proce
250. ng the displayed data adjust the system optics for the best possible spectrum lines as high and narrow as possible Figure 39 shows a typical mercury argon spectrum Your results could appear different depending on the spectrograph grating used 58 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C wy mM ARGON SPE mM 1X1 Figure 39 Typical Mercury Argon Spectrum 4 To store the most recent data set select Start Storage from the Acquisition menu or click on the Start Store button on the Custom Toolbar Data acquisition will halt and the most recent image will be stored in a file having the name specified on the Data File tab page 5 For a PI MAX system switch the Camera State back to Safe mode on the Acquisition Experiment Setup Main tab page This completes the initial spectroscopy data acquisition routine that should work with any Princeton Instruments brand Controller Chapter 4 Initial Imaging Data Collection Introduction ATTENTION The procedure in this chapter will enable you to begin collecting real image data promptly Minimum requirements are assumed If your system is more complex e g requiring consideration of complex timing and synchronization issues you will have to carefully study the other chapters of this manual as well as the manuals provided for the system hardware components before data acquisition that addresses those needs will be possible Nevertheless it is a good idea to begin with the simplest possible
251. ngs tab page verify that the O indicated active spectrograph is the correct SR 4 me one Cancel Help Select the grating to be moved The available gratings were previously entered on the Figure 26 Move Spectrograph Gratings Define Spectrograph Gratings tab page tab page Enter the new position in nm in the Move to field Enter any speed settings and click on OK to execute the selections The grating will come to rest with the selected wavelength at the center of the CCD array Note There may well be some finite error in the final position This error can be measured and compensated for using the Spectrograph Calibrate procedure 48 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Entering Information for Software Controlled Slits and or Mirrors Some spectrometers allow you to control the slit width and or i Main Gratings Slits Mirrors Connect do mirror selection under M Controllable Slits software control Where this is Enabled Width Speed the case the Slits Mirrors tab Front Axial Entrance W 0 06350 mm fr0000 Steps sec page Figure 27 in the Define Side Lateral Entrance V 0 06350 mm fioo Steps sec Spectrograph dialog box is used Front Axial Exit 0 06350 mm fioooo Steps sec to specify the controllable slits f and selectable mirrors Actually Side Lateral Exit V 0 06350 mm 10000 Steps sec setting the slit width and a i Slit Steps Unit
252. not contain non volatile RAM NVRAM which is programmed with information about the controller and the camera PVCAM the program under which the Roper Scientific USB works retrieves the information stored in NVRAM so it can enter specific camera characteristics into WinSpec 32 Check the serial label on underside of your controller If the first five characters are D1200 December 2000 or earlier JO797 or July 1997 for example contact Customer Support to find out about an NVRAM controller upgrade OrangeUSB USB 2 0 Driver Update This procedure is highly recommended when a laptop computer will be used to communicate with the ST 133A We recommend the SHG Inc USB 2 0 PC Card Model US2246 if USB 2 0 is not native to the laptop s motherboard To reduce the instances of data overruns and serial violations the OrangeUSB USB 2 0 Host Controller installed for the SIIG card should be replaced by the appropriate Microsoft driver Windows 2000 or Windows XP depending on the laptop s operating system Note This procedure may also be performed for desktop computers that use the Orange Micro 70USB90011 USB2 0 PCL 1 Go to http www devicedriver com usb2drivers htm 2 Follow the instructions there and download the correct Microsoft USB Driver to your computer Window 2000 or Windows XP Note where the downloaded file was saved Go to the download directory and unzip the CAB file From the Windows Start menu select Settings Control Pan
253. nstallation faulty or inadequate maintenance or failure to follow instructions furnished by us e had serial numbers removed altered defaced or rendered illegible e been subjected to improper or unauthorized repair or e been damaged due to fire flood radiation or other acts of God or other contingencies beyond the control of Roper Scientific After the warranty period has expired you may contact the Roper Scientific factory or a Roper Scientific authorized representative for repair information and or extended warranty plans Physically damaged units or units that have been modified are not acceptable for repair in or out of warranty and will be returned as received 248 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C 10 All warranties implied by state law or non U S laws including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are expressly limited to the duration of the limited warranties set forth above With the exception of any warranties implied by state law or non U S laws as hereby limited the forgoing warranty is exclusive and in lieu of all other warranties guarantees agreements and similar obligations of manufacturer or seller with respect to the repair or replacement of any parts In no event shall Roper Scientific s liability exceed the cost of the repair or replacement of the defective product or part 11 This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have ot
254. ntroller type be specified first Shutter Type There are five selections None Small Large Remote and Electronic None If the camera has no shutter frame transfer or interline CCD array and is not an Intensified camera select None Small A small shutter is one that is typically 25 mm or smaller in diameter This setting represents a shutter compensation time of approximately 8 msec Large A large shutter is one that is typically 35 mm and larger In the case of a camera having a very large CCD such as the Kodak 2k x 2k a large shutter may have been installed This setting represents a shutter compensation time of approximately 16 msec Remote Remote is primarily intended for spectroscopy applications where an external shutter would be placed ahead of the entrance slit Electronic Electronic only applies to operation with an intensified camera which would normally not be equipped with a mechanical shutter This selection would apply to both the Gate and Shutter CW modes of the IIC 100 ItC 200 HC 300 MCP 100 and PI MAX Readout Mode The readout mode is determined by the characteristics of the CCD array and the controller The possible choices are Full Frame The entire chip can be read out Frame Transfer Only the unmasked area of the chip can be read out Frame transfer is only available if the camera has a frame transfer chip such as the EEV 512 x 1024 Vertical Shift Determines the speed of the image transfer fr
255. nu it is necessary that e the system is a PentaMAX a MicroMAX 1 MHz or 5 MHz or an ST 133 e the camera has a frame transfer chip such as the EEV 512 x 512 FT e the Frame Transfer readout mode is selected and e the file WXvchip opt is present in the same directory as the executable WinSpec 32 program The virtual chip method of data acquisition requires that the chip be masked as shown in Figure 187 Masking can be achieved by applying a mechanical or optical mask or by positioning a bright image at the ROI against a dark background on the remainder of the array In operation images are continually piped down the CCD at extraordinarily high frames per second FPS The mini frame transfer region is defined by an ROI as illustrated in Figure 187 The charge from this ROI is shifted under the frame transfer mask followed by a readout cycle of an ROI sized region under the mask Since the ROI is far from the serial register the stored image is just shifted repeatedly with the readout and the first few images collected will not contain useful data After the readout period the next frame is shifted under the mask and another ROI sized frame is read out The net result is a series of images separated by spacer regions streaming up the CCD under the mask Chapter 20 Software Options 197 Virtual Chip x f Normal Mode Enabled Shift Register eE eeri Chip Y Dimension 237 v Chip X Dimension fi 0
256. o all subsequent acquired data unless a new calibration is performed If Save as Default is unselected and you click on OK the calibration in effect i e in the Calibration Setup dialog box will apply to the active data file only Calibration Display and User Units The default Calibration Units are nanometers nm These units can be changed with the change taking effect immediately Calibration units to choose from are nm nanometers cm l wavenumbers rel cm 1 relative wavenumbers and user units units other than above For relative wavenumbers only the wavelength of the excitation laser must be entered in the Laser Wavelength box in nm Display unit choices are the same with the additional selection of pixels The Display Units selection can be different from the Calibration units except in the case of User Units Under Display Units the choices are pixels nm nanometers cm 1 wavenumbers and rel cm 1 relative Raman shift wavenumbers Theses units are the ones shown on the X axis whenever calibrated spectra are displayed To display files without calibration even files collected with a specific calibration select the pixel option under Display Units User Units allow the operator to scale the spectra to any arbitrary unit Chapter 6 Wavelength Calibration 81 Calibration Method A calibration requires at least two points defined by pixel and by units Naturally the more points used the more accurate the calibra
257. o are upgrading from a 16 bit version of WinSpec to WinSpec 32 to transfer their previous operating settings to the new software However there is a constraint if there are settings in the registry i e WinSpec 32 has been operated at least once the software wor t read PIHWDEF INI or SESSION DAT unless the file date is newer than the date of the stored registry settings This problem can be avoided by simply copying PIHWDEF INI or SESSION DAT to the WinSpec 32 directory before operating it the first time If that opportunity is lost a newer SESSION DAT can be created by booting the 16 bit WinSpec 232 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C software and then exiting the program in the usual manner Similarly a text editor could be used to open edit a copy of PIHWDEF INI and then save it so that it has the current date Uninstalling and Reinstalling If you suspect any of the WinSpec 32 files have become corrupt you should first delete all WinSpec 32 files then reinstall the software from the CD or the FTP site Follow the steps below to remove WinSpec 32 Note that some files may remain They will have to be removed manually To reinstall follow the procedure as described beginning on page 19 To uninstall WinSpec 32 from your computer 1 Open the Windows Control Panel 2 Double click on Add Remove Programs 3 Highlight the WinSpec 32 version to uninstall and click on Add Remove Notes 1 The directory in which WinSpec 32 was origi
258. ocus Cancel Help Figure 56 Data File tab page Closing a Data File An open data window can be closed by clicking on the XI box at the upper right of the window or by clicking on Close in the File menu An open data window can be removed from view by clicking on the 1 box at the upper right of the window The file will be reduced to an icon on the task bar but the data will remain loaded in RAM There may be situations where you would want to do this to reduce desktop clutter Unless you intend to expand the file for display again it is ordinarily better to actually close the file so that the RAM it is using will be freed for other use If the file hasn t been saved you will be prompted There are several ways of closing an open data window Each is described below e The XI box at the upper right of the data window will close that window only e The box at the upper right of the window will also remove the data window from view by reducing it to an icon on the task bar There may be situations where you would want to do this to reduce desktop clutter However the data will remain loaded in RAM reducing the memory available for data collection Unless you intend to expand the file for display again it is ordinarily better to actually close the file so that the RAM it is using will be freed for other use e Close in the File menu closes all windows using the data set displayed in the active data window This may be impor
259. om the exposed area of a frame transfer chip to the masked area Also sets the speed of image transfer when operating in the Kinetics mode Setting a lower value increases the shift speed A higher value gives a slower shift If the shift is too fast not all of the charge will be transferred If too slow image smearing will be increased due to the exposure that takes place while the transfer is in progress The default value gives good results in most measurements Interline Provides 100 duty cycle operation Interline is only available with a camera having an interline chip such as the PI 1300 x 1030 Kinetics Kinetics is a special type of operation in which most of the CCD is mechanically or optically masked leaving a small section open to light This section is then read out very quickly See the System or Controller manual for more details on the CCD aspects of this readout mode Window Size Determines the height of the window for Kinetics mode This value must be 1 or greater WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C DIF MicroMAX Interline only Dual Image Feature DIF is a special feature that allows images to be taken in pairs with very short exposure times as small as 1 us This feature is only available for factory modified MicroMAX controller Interline camera systems Operating in this readout mode provides three timing modes unique to DIF systems IEC Internal Exposure Control EEC External Exposure Control and ESABI Electroni
260. on and the movement of the spectrometer The software will take an exposure and while the shutter is closed will move the spectrometer to the next position Unlike a monochromator with a single point detector the wavelength calibration will not depend on the speed and timing of the stepper motor only on its final position In this case you must set the amount of overlap you would like the spectra to have The overlapping data will be averaged for a smooth transition from one exposure to the next In addition to the glued data file the numbered series of individual exposures remain in the computer for later processing 1 Make sure that you have a spectrometer already installed and properly calibrated This stepping and gluing procedure depends on having correct spectrometer calibration Click on Calibration on the menu bar and then on Usage to open the Usage dialog box Select Auto Spectro in the Usage dialog box Then select the Calibration units nm cm or rel cm Be sure the Save as Default button is clicked ON Then click on OK to close the Usage dialog box From the Acquisition menu select Step and Glue The Step and Glue dialog box Figure 133 will appear For more information see the online Help for this dialog box Note Again you must have Auto Spectro and either nm cm or rel cm selected as the Calibration Units on the Usage dialog box Calibration menu in order for the Step and Glue dialog box to open F
261. ong peak of a doublet For example if using the 579 066 nm mercury line in doing the Dispersion Calibration you need to take care to check that the peak finder hasn t selected the 576 96 nm line instead If it does it is a simple matter to move the manually move the cursor to the correct peak Note that the zoom function can also be controlled using the data window icons If it is difficult to see the precise cursor position simply press the keyboard Insert key to expand the display about the cursor position The key may have to be pressed several times to achieve the desired resolution Use the Delete key to return to the original display If you do decide to move the cursor note that each time a cursor positioning arrow key is pressed the cursor will move one data point Assuming no horizontal binning is in effect one data point will correspond to one pixel on the array As a final comment even if you should move the cursor when it wasn t necessary repeating the Calibration Offset cycle a few times will still achieve an optimum offset adjustment 88 Adjust WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C 9 Untitled 1340 X 1300 X 1 d oi xy Q A jaj Figure 68 Offset Spectrum for Zero order Measurement 6 Note the reported Error value in the Offset dialog box The value is reported in nm Transposed to pixels it should be less than one pixel The number of nm represented by one pixel will depend of course on the dispersion of
262. ontroller message This message may be displayed if you are using the USB 2 0 interface and have not run the RSConfig exe program see previous topic if the PYCAM_INI file has been corrupted or if the ST 133A was not turned on before you started WinSpec 32 and began running the Hardware Wizard WinSpec 32 INFORMATION E4 fiwWinSpec 32 INFORMATION 4 Error Creating Controller Error 129 Error Creating Controller Error 183 Figure 203 Error Creating Controller dialog box Error 129 Indicates that the problem is with the PVCAM INI file Close WinSpec 32 run RSConfig make sure the ST 133A is on reopen WinSpec and begin running the Hardware Wizard Error 183 Indicates that the ST 133A is off If you are running the Hardware Wizard when this message appears click on OK turn on the ST 133A and on the PVCAM dialog box make sure Yes is selected and then click on Next The Hardware Wizard should continue to the Controller Type dialog box Appendix H Troubleshooting USB 2 0 241 No CCD Named in the Hardware Wizard CCD dialog Select the type of detector or camera that your controller is running E a Cancel Help Figure 204 Hardware Wizard Detector Camera CCD dialog box If you have installed a USB 2 0 Interface Module in your ST 133A a blank field may be displayed in the Detector Camera CCD dialog box Figure 204 if the ST 133 controller was made before January 2001 Earlier versions of the ST 133 did
263. opy Mode radio buttons will not be C Imaging Mode Spectroscopy Mode present m Wavelength Slit i Start fi Start fi 4 TIP Acquire a full chip image before End 1340 S o J adding or editing ROI patterns The existing patterns will be superimposed on the image Group fi 3 Note the Number Stored value This will tell you if how many ROIs have already been Mouse Sat ea Drea Al Store stored Depending on what you want to do you may want click on Clear or Clear All Lance Changes T Use Software Binning to remove stored ROI patterns Acquire Focus OK Cancel Help 4 To add a new pattern click on the spin buttons next to the Number Stored text Figure 123 ROI Setup tab page until the text to the far left is New Pattern Spectroscopy Mode This will not be necessary if there are no patterns stored a Enter the Wavelength X axis Start End and Group values The Group value controls the X axis binning 1 indicates no binning higher values indicate the number of pixels being binned to increase the sensitivity at the expense of resolution e Spectroscopy Mode When multiple ROIs are defined the Wavelength values for the first pattern are applied to the subsequent patterns created e Imaging Mode Multiple ROIs can have different Wavelength values TIP If you re not sure of the chip size open the Main tab page and note the X and Y values there b Enter the Slit Y axis
264. ord and click on Next WinS pec 32 for Windows Setup Select Components Choose the components Setup will install pplicat p Help Files PCI Interface A Documentation 0 Sample SPE Data Files 0 Diagnostic Program H Spectrograph Support MACTON Spectrograph Support 7 Pulser Support ristallstiela Figure 195 Select Components dialog box Appendix F WinSpec 32 Repair and Maintenance 231 5 On the Select Components dialog box put a check in the box for each item you want to install and uncheck the box for each item you want to uninstall 6 Then click on Next and follow the instructions on the dialog boxes 7 Click on the Finish button when the Maintenance Complete dialog box is displayed The WinSpec WinView WinXTest Install dialog box will be displayed after the changes have been made 8 Exit from the installation program or choose another program to install perform maintenance on or uninstall Installing More than One Version of WinSpec 32 You can install more than one version of WinSpec 32 WinView 32 or any combination of the two on a single computer When the Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed simply change the path to a new directory If necessary the install program will automatically create the new directory Caution _ Do not install both the WinSpec 32 and WinView 32 software packages in the same directory Caution Although several different versions of WinSpec 32
265. ort 7 Click on OK to close the Install Remove Spectrographs dialog box 8 If the newly installed spectrograph is the only installed spectrograph the Use for Auto Spectro Calibration box will be checked by default If more than one spectrograph is installed you need to check in the box for the spectrograph that is attached to the active detector The checked status indicates which spectrograph can be automatically calibrated using the Spectrograph Calibration function which requires that the controller take data see Chapter 7 for more information Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 45 Ports and Comm Parameters Main Connect If the spectrograph is not connected to COM2 or if there was an error message during Acton SP300i installation specify the communications parameters and Communications Port then assign a COM port to the X active spectrograph These steps are done as follows 1 On the Main tab page select your spectrograph as the Active Spectrograph Comm Settings 2 Click on the Connect tab Note the COM port named in the Communications Port field If it is not the one you aa e want to use for the active spectrograph select the correct port from the drop Figure 23 Connect tab page down list The choices are m Connection Preferences COM1 through COM8 and Baud Rate 3600 Dermo Data Bits fe x 4 Click on Comm Settings Figure 23 This will open the w Comm Sett
266. ou are acquiring data with WinSpec 32 Run data acquisition in Safe Mode Add memory Use binning Increase the exposure time Close the Detector Temperature dialog box during data acquisition Defragment the hard disk Update the Orange Micro USB2 driver See OrangeUSB USB 2 0 Driver Update page 241 OO ls ION er a Gol a If the problem persists your application may be USB 2 0 bus limited Since the host computer controls the USB 2 0 bus there may be situations where the host computer interrupts the USB 2 0 port In most cases the interrupt will go unnoticed by the user However there are some instances when the data overrun cannot be overcome because USB 2 0 bus limitations combined with long data acquisition times and or large data sets increase the possibility of an interrupt while data is being acquired If your experiment requirements include long data acquisition times and or large data sets your application may not be suitable for the USB 2 0 interface Therefore we recommend replacement of the USB 2 0 interface module with our TAXI interface module and Roper Scientific PCI card If this is not the case and data overruns continue to occur contact Technical Support see page 248 for contact information 235 236 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Demo is only Choice on Hardware Wizard Interface dialog If RSConfig exe has not been run and there is not an installed Roper Scientific high speed PCI card the Hardware W
267. ow H to be performed High fi 4 If you want to process only part of the Input Group 1 Image enter the appropriate X Y range values Alternatively use the mouse to draw an ROI in the active window and click the Mouse button at the bottom of the dialog box to enter those values Apply Close Help 5 On the Parameters tab page select either Figure 153 Postprocessing Histogram Histogram or Cumulative Histogram Parameter tab page whichever is wanted g 6 On the Parameters tab page under Values enter the Low Intensity and High Intensity values These are the Y Max and Y min Then enter the Group Size which is the range of intensity that the software will group together as a single data point In other words if the Group Size is 50 pixels having intensities in the range of 1 50 will be counted and graphed as a single point on the histogram 7 Enter the name of the Output file on the Output tab page In later editions of the software it will additionally be possible to specify an output frame and data range 8 Click on Apply to begin processing Chapter 17 Printing Introduction WinSpec 32 can be used to print images directly Methods are listed below both for direct printing and for using the clipboard to transfer the image to another program for printing Setting up the Printer 1 Open the file you wantto EN 2x print Make sure that p Printer m Properties window is the ac
268. p WinXSystem Fortunately there are a couple of workarounds both involving copying the install files to the customer s hard drive first then installing the software from that location 1 If possible copy the files to the customer s hard drive via another computer that supports long file names If the customer s computer is part of a network then the files can be copied first to the hard drive of a computer that supports long file names then transferred through the network to the customer s hard drive Check the list of files below to make sure that the long filenames remain intact Then install the software from this location on the hard drive Copy the files to the customer s hard drive from the customer s CD ROM then fix the names of the files that were truncated There are only 7 files that are not DOS compatible 8 3 so this at most a 10 minute job Here are their abbreviated and full filenames Not all of these files are used in the standard installation but all are present on the CD e CLSSNA 1 CLS rename to clsSnapIn cls e PIXCMT 1 DLL rename to PXCMTXT32 dll e WINX_R 1 DOC rename to WinX_readme doc e WINX32 1 BAS rename to Winx32Test bas e WINX32 1 DOC rename to Winx32 Automation VB Version doc e WINX32 1 FRM rename to Winx32Test frm e WINX32 1 FRX rename to Winx32Test frx 227 228 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C This page intentionally left blank Appendix F WinSpec 32 Repair and M
269. p and Usage Gee which call the Calibration Setup and Calibration Usage dialog boxes Brief descriptions follow Figure 59 Calibration menu Setup Once a single spectrum has been acquired or loaded the menu item Setup opens the Calibration Setup dialog box A calibration session consists of finding the peaks marking the known peaks to be used for calibration and saving the calibration data as the default or applying it to the active data set only Usage Selects the Calibration mode and Units Once the wavelength calibration has been performed it can be applied by selecting Manual or turned off by selecting Off Selections can either be saved as default power up parameters or be applied to the active data set only For more information see the online Help discussion of the Calibration Usage dialog box Wavelength Calibration Procedure Before a wavelength calibration can be performed it is necessary to either load a spectrum or acquire one For good calibration results the spectrum should have well defined peaks for which you know the wavelength A calibration requires at least two points defined by pixel and by units Naturally the more points used the more accurate the calibration The ideal calibration spectrum would have one peak at the start of the array or region of interest one at the end of the array or region of interest and one midway between the end peaks In real life the ideal spectrum is seldom available but the close
270. pectral range of the detector Gluing Existing Spectra You can glue any series of EEIE x existing data files providing m that they all have been Glued Output Data File Name Raw Input Data File Names properly calibrated in nm The files should overlap some in order to provide Units Of Glued File rm 7 complete spectral data but ce ee this is not required by the aoaea Jo Ei pera aa ee of Gluing Parameters j calibrated single spectrum i l l q gt files can be used to create a lal Gabel f El 4 glued file The only Ending Value fo Remove 2 Add Files Selected requirements are that Final Resolution 0 Files Units Point e The files have been wavelength calibrated Cancel Help either manually or using AutoSpectro Figure 132 Post Process Glue dialog box e The files have the same number of frames and strips it is not necessary that they have the same number of pixels 1 Take the series of data files you would like to glue and use the file manager to rename them as a series such as EXP001 SPE EXP002 SPE etc You do not have to arrange these files in any particular order These data files will not be altered in any way by the following procedure 2 From the Process menu select Glue This will open the Post Process Glue dialog box Figure 132 For more information see the online Help for this dialog box 3 Use the browser to select the files Th
271. peed allowed by the converter If the camera is a PLMAX with a Thomson 512 CCD select FAST ST 130 owners must confirm that the internal hardware jumpers of their controller are properly set for the desired speed See the ST 130 manual for details Type For systems having more than one A D converter both FAST and SLOW will be available Make this selection before selecting the rate or resolution Controller Gain PentaMAX only Set to Gain 3 Resolution Number of bits Choices limited by A D type selection Bit Adjust ST 138 only Set to No Clip ADC Offset 5MHz MicroMAX only Use the default setting Analog Gain ST 133 Medium Note Not all of these parameters are provided for every controller model Ignore parameters that don t apply to your system Experiment Setup Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections ADC Timing Processes Save Load Rate icokHe z Type stow Controller Gain Gans E Resolution i5Bts BitAdust cipis rs ADC Offset 50 i Analog Gain Low 7 Acquire Focus Cancel Help Figure 44 Generic ADC tab page WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C 6 On the ROI tab page Figure 45 select Experiment aou Imaging Mode WinSpec 32 operated in ADC Timing Processes Save Load Imaging Mode always uses the full chip area Man DataFile FQ Setup Data Conections and ROI considerations do not apply ja hana es 7 No Processes tab pa
272. pening the WinSpec 32 software If wavelength direction is reversed you won t be able to calibrate successfully However a warning message will be displayed If this happens open the Hardware Setup dialog box and select the Display tab page If Rotate is selected toggle the Flip box If Rotate is not selected toggle the Reverse box Click on OK and then begin Offset calibration again Calibration Parameters 1 Select Auto Spectro on the Usage dialog box to open select Usage on the Calibration menu If the Use for Auto Spectro Calibration checkbox on the Define Spectrograph Main tab page was used to designate a particular spectrograph as the one to be used for calibration purposes that spectrograph will be automatically selected If the Save as Default button on the Usage dialog box isn t already selected select it now Select Calibrate on the Spectrograph menu This will open the Spectrograph Calibration dialog box Figure 65 Chapter 7 Spectrograph Calibration Be sure the correct Spectrograph to Calibrate is selected If another spectrograph is indicated click on the down arrow at the right of the selection box to display all of the installed spectrographs and make the correct selection If only one spectrograph has been installed the selection box won t appear but the spectrograph model will be reported Be sure the correct Grating to Calibrate is selected Calibration is grating specific If the indicate
273. peration Gate Width The starting and ending gate widths are independently set The first Shot will have the Starting gate width and the last Shot will have the Ending gate width This is true for both the Fixed and Exponential increment type Gate Delay The starting and ending gate delay values are independently set The first Shot will be taken at the Starting delay with respect to To and the last Shot will occur at the Ending delay with respect to To This is true for both the Fixed and Exponential increment type 184 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C ATTENTION Although the To output of the DG535 marks the start of each DG535 timing cycle the precise timing of both the gate and signal at the camera will additionally depend on a number of different delay mechanisms that can significantly affect the experiment These are discussed for the PI MAX camera in some detail in Tips and Tricks chapter of the PI MAX instruction manual Check Gate Width and Delay Min Max Message Displayed If this box is checked and you specify a gate width or delay outside the allowable range a warning message Figure 176 will be displayed Clicking Yes will cause the parameter in question to be set to the limit value Clicking No will cause the parameter setting to be retained but the actual value will still be the applicable minimum or maximum If the box isn t checked the applicable minimum or maximum will be established automatically WinS pec
274. pletion S Usually refers to SITe arrays also see TK TK CCD made by SITe formerly Tektronix sometimes labeled S UV UV to VIS standard lumogen coating for UV response to 195 nm UVAR Permanent UV to NIR A R coating on some SITe CCDs not lumogen metachrome VISAR Permanent VIS to NIR A R coating on some SITe CCDs not lumogen metachrome Y Interline CCD made by Sony Appendix A System and Camera Nomenclature 209 1 grade 1 CCD 2 grade 2 CCD 3 grade 3 CCD 64 array format is 1024 x 64 pixels 100 128 256 400 512 576 768 782 1000 1024 1100 1242 1280 1300 1317 1340 1536 2032 2500 3072 array format is 1340 x 100 pixels array format is 1024 x 128 pixels 256 element linear array array format is 1340 x 400 pixels array format is 512 x 512 pixels or 512 elements for linear arrays array format is 576 x 384 pixels array format is 768 x 512 pixels array format is 782 x 582 pixels array format is 1000 x 800 pixels array format is 1024 x 256 EEV or Hamamatsu or 1024 x 1024 SITe array format is 1100 x 330 pixels array format is 1152 x 1242 pixels array format is 1280 x 1024 pixels array format is 1300 x 1030 pixels Sony or 1300 x 1340 pixels EEV array format is 1317 x 1035 pixels array format is 1340 x 100 400 or 1300 family is exclusive to Roper Scientific array format is 1536 x 1032 pixels array format is 2025 x 2032 pixels array format is 2500 x 600 rectan
275. ponsibility for shipping charges is as described above under our Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty 245 246 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Sealed Chamber Integrity Limited 24 Month Warranty Roper Scientific warrants the sealed chamber integrity of all our products for a period of twenty four 24 months after shipment If at anytime within twenty four 24 months from the date of delivery the detector should experience a sealed chamber failure all parts and labor needed to restore the chamber seal will be covered by us Open chamber products carry NO WARRANTY TO THE CCD IMAGING DEVICE EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED Responsibility for shipping charges is as described above under our Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty Vacuum Integrity Limited 24 Month Warranty Roper Scientific warrants the vacuum integrity of all our products for a period of up to twenty four 24 months from the date of shipment We warrant that the detector head will maintain the factory set operating temperature without the requirement for customer pumping Should the detector experience a Vacuum Integrity failure at anytime within twenty four 24 months from the date of delivery all parts and labor needed to restore the vacuum integrity will be covered by us Responsibility for shipping charges is as described above under our Basic Limited One 1 Year Warranty Image Intensifier Detector Limited One Year Warranty All image intensifier products are inherently susceptibl
276. position 192 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C This page intentionally left blank Chapter 20 Software Options Introduction The WinSpec 32 options described in this chapter can also be purchased from Roper Scientific Contact Roper Scientific Customer Support for order information Custom Chip WXCstChp opt Introduction If this option has been installed selecting User Defined Chip checkbox on the Controller Camera tab page adds the Custom Chip tab page to the dialog box The Custom Chip parameters are shown in Hardware Setup 1133 Controller Camera Display Interface Cleans Skips Custom Chip Custom Timing Default CCD EEV 576x 384 6ph 7 Rows Parallel Figure 182 The default values To Shift Shit Register egister olumns conform to the physical layout Active of the CCD array and are Si optimum for most Pre Dummies f1 a e E measurements TET fa 4 Caution Roper Scientific does not ET Dummies lO a encourage users to change these parameter settings For most applications the default settings will give the best results We strongly advise contacting the factory for guidance before customizing the chip definition OK Cancel Help Figure 182 Custom Chip tab page Normally not all of the pixels in a CCD array are exposed and read out a frame of dummy pixels bounds the active area These dummy pixels are usually masked and are not normally read out Howeve
277. ppen in Synchronous Full Speed operation The following data collection procedures are done in the Focus mode 59 60 WARNING WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C If using an intensified camera note that data collection in the following procedure will be done in the Shutter mode in which the camera can be damaged if exposed to light overload Before powering the controller and camera reduce the room light to reduce the risk of damage Note that intensifiers are particularly at risk in pulsed laser operation where overload spot damage can occur without raising the average current to where the overload detection circuits will be activated It is far better to be careful than sorry Before proceeding take the time to carefully read the manual for your intensified camera Also take particular care that your intensified camera is connected properly for shutter mode operation Cabling and peripheral considerations for intensified cameras are more complex than for unintensified cameras Again read your manual Temperature Control Before continuing the array temperature should be set to some easily achieved value in the operating range and Temperature lock should be established The way this is done depends on the controller Temperature Control for a system using an ST 133 or a MicroMAX 1 Open the WinSpec 32 Setup menu and click on Detector Temperature This will cause A TURAR pe 3 i the Temperature dialog box to appear as
278. r they could be read out by changing the chip definition in software For example in the case of the EEV 576 x 384 chip illustrated in Figure 182 the 576 active rows are preceded by one dummy row and followed by 2 dummy rows In addition there are 12 dummy columns on one side of the active region and 13 dummy columns on the other side By changing the chip definition to increase the active area while decreasing the dummy settings the dummy cells would be read out By doing so one could measure the dark charge with every readout Note that F T Dummies are chip specific and are dummy rows at the boundary of the masked and visible areas of a frame transfer device 193 194 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C It is also possible to increase image acquisition speed by reducing the size of the active area in the definition The result will be faster but lower resolution data acquisition Operating in this mode would ordinarily require that the chip be masked so that only the reduced active area is exposed This will prevent unwanted charge from spilling into the active area or being transferred to the shift register Custom Timing WXCstTim opt Caution Introduction Hardware Setup 7138 If this option has been installed Controller Camera Display Interface Cleans Skips Custom Timing Custom Chip selecting User Defined Timing checkbox on the Controller ADC Type FAST 7 Camera or Controller Detector tab page adds the Custo
279. r all the way to the right Similarly the Offset setting should initially be set to 2 slider all the way to left When no further improvement in the observed image can be obtained click on Stop in the Interactive Camera Operation dialog box to halt focus mode operation Click on Close to close the Interactive Camera Operation dialog box and return to the Experiment Setup dialog box Data Collection 1 Click on Focus to begin collecting data An acquisition can also be started by clicking on Focus on the Acquisition Menu or by clicking on the Focus button on the Custom Toolbar Images will be continuously acquired and displayed on the computer screen and on the video monitor To store the most recent image select Start Storage from the Acquisition menu or click on the Start Store button on the Custom Toolbar Data acquisition will halt and the most recent image will be stored in a file having the name specified on the Data File tab page This completes initial data acquisition with a MicroMAX or an ST 133 Controller Chapter 4 Initial Image Data Collection PentaMAx 67 The procedure that follows for the PentaMAX Controller is in two parts Focusing and Data Collection In focusing images are displayed on the video monitor and no data is collected This allows rapid and easy adjustment of the system optics Once the settings have been optimized focus mode operation should be ended and data collection performed Focusi
280. r n and pixel width x first calculate the angle from equation 4 The grating angle y can be calculated using the known parameters center wavelength A diffraction order m grating grooves per mm 1 d and inclusion angle y from equation 2 Finally the wavelength at pixel n is calculated using equation 3 Appendix D Auto Spectro Wavelength Calibration 225 lt 1x distance from center f nx sind gt Figure 191 Relationship between and the focal length detector angle and the distance of A from image plane WinSpec X Axis Auto Calibration When Calibration Usage is set to Auto Spectro in WinSpec 32 the X Axis calibration is done in the following steps after a wavelength change First the wavelength is calculated at each end of the array using the method above Then these two points plus the third center wavelength point are automatically fit to a 2 order polynomial using the wavelength calibration functions 226 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C This page intentionally left blank Appendix E CD ROM Failure Work Arounds Although not common there are CD drives that are not compatible with the Win 95 long filename convention Attempting to install on such a system causes the filenames to be truncated and the install fails causing a message like An error occurred during the move data process 113 Component Application WinXSystem File Grou
281. r you can come to this ideal the better the calibration results will be Figure 60 shows a mercury argon spectrum that could serve as the basis for a good calibration in many situations Appendix B contains wavelength tables for Argon Neon and Mercury together with a detailed spectrum for Hg Argon Chapter 6 Wavelength Calibration v4 HG ARGON SPE 1025 X 1 X 1 Figure 60 Hg Argon spectrum Once you have the calibration spectrum displayed on the screen as the active data set proceed as follows 1 Click on Setup in the Calibration menu to open the Calibration Setup dialog box If a previous calibration had been saved the calibration values would be listed If no previous calibration had been saved as the default no values would be listed For more information see the online Help for this dialog box Click on Find Peaks An automatic peak finding routine will be performed The maximum number of peaks is equal to one quarter the number of displayed pixels The pixel values for the 10 highest peaks will be shown in the Pixel boxes in the Calibration Setup dialog box as shown in Figure 61 Note that the Find Peaks routine causes a small red Calibration Setup HG ARGON SPE 1025 X 1X 1 Ea Calibration Units m Calibration Method ire FT H za Calibration Points Pixel Value Pixel Value Cpess Cfo D E eo M Meskl WE S e E e 7 Display Units Points Entered 0 Points Needed 2 f Jom
282. rally give good results Clean Mode Photometrics brand cameras Sets when and how charge will be cleared from the array while the camera is waiting to acquire data Clearing removes charge from the CCD by clocking the charge to the serial register then directly to ground This process is much faster than a readout because the charge does not go through the readout node or the amplifier Note that not all clearing modes are available for all cameras Be sure to check availability of a mode before attempting to set it Clear Never Don t ever clear the CCD Useful for performing a readout after an exposure has been aborted Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 41 Clear Pre Exposure Before each exposure clears the CCD the number of times specified by the Number of Cleans entry This mode can be used in a sequence It is most useful when there is a considerable amount of time between exposures Clear Pre Sequence Before each sequence clears the CCD the number of times specified by the Number of Cleans entry If no sequence is set up this mode behaves as if the sequence has one exposure The result is the same as using Clear Pre Exposure Clear Post Sequence Clears continuously after the sequence ends The camera continues clearing until a new exposure is set up or started the abort command is sent the speed entry number is changed or the camera is reset Clear Pre Post Sequence Clears Number of Cleans times before each sequence and cl
283. raphs will change to reflect the profiles at the new location Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 113 v Circuit spe 268 X 248 X 1 Y 1 Z 1 ll 4720 Figure 103 Circuit spe with Axes and Cross sections Information box On the View menu select Info The information box should appear as shown in 3 Figure 104 The ete A D counts is ee ware reported at the pixel and strip position ieee cgp e corresponding to the cursor position Also zoom 2 18 2 18 reported are the Frame number Aspect ratio and X and Y Zoom in effect If a region is defined by dragging the mouse cursor the Figure 104 Information box region coordinates and diagonal length will also be reported Autoranging the Intensity in a ROI 1 Drag the mouse cursor to define a rectangular region of interest on the displayed image 2 Click on y Autoscale The display will autorange to the intensity range in the defined region The effect will be an increase in contrast in the observed image Throughout the image pixels darker or lighter than those in the defined region will be displayed as black or white 3 Click the mouse anywhere in the displayed image and click EA again to restore the original image view 114 Relabeling the Axes 1 Open the Display Layout dialog box and open the Axes tab page Figure 105 Note that Horizontal Axis Vertical Axis and the Label box for each are all checked If unchecked the corresponding axis or label wou
284. rapidly as possible while minimizing risk of the shift register saturation Minimum Block Size Sets the size in rows of the skip blocks that immediately precede the data The default value will generally give good results Number of Blocks Sets the number of binned skip blocks preceding and following the region of interest The default value will generally give good results Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 43 Setting up a Spectrograph WinSpec 32 allows you to control several types of spectrographs More than one spectrograph can be installed in the system at one time The total number of spectrographs is limited only by the number of free communication ports The following spectrograph operations can be performed after you define your spectrograph e Moving a spectrograph grating e Automatic calibration of acquired data according to the spectrograph position e Changing to a different grating for some spectrographs e Changing the entrance slit size and or the selected mirror for some spectrographs The following steps explain how to set up a spectrograph You must correctly install a spectrograph before you can control any of its functions through WinSpec 32 1 Qs 3 Make sure that the spectrograph is correctly connected to a host computer COM port Turn on the host computer and the spectrograph Spectrograph Move Wait for the spectrograph to finish initializing and then boot Define WinSpec 372
285. red As of Version 2 5 this detector will not be supported by WinSpec XTE TE air cooled detector with cooling down to 100 C can be run with ST 133 controllers Pulsers FG 100 Pulser with 5 nsec 3 usec gating Gen II intensifiers only FG 101 Obsolete version of an ICCD unit with internal high voltage power and gating PG 10 Pulser with 200 nsec to 6 msec gating Gen II intensifiers only PG200 Software programmable pulser with 5 nsec to 80 msec gating Highest performance pulser with the most features Gen II intensifiers only PTG Dedicated programmable delay generator board that generates TTL level pulses to control intensifier gating in PIL MAX models It is an option that sits in the third slot of an ST 133 controller High Voltage Power Supplies IIC 100 High voltage power supply for intensified cameras without internal high voltage supplies intensified PentaMAX ITE or lens coupled intensified systems for CW operation only Not necessary for ICCD or PI MAX cameras For gated operation of intensified PentaMAX or ITE cameras buy the board version of the IfC 100 called the MCP 100 built into the pulser During manufacture a Model IIC 100 is configured for operation with a Gen II intensifier or with a Gen II intensifier but not for operation with both types IIC 200 Compact high voltage power supply for intensified cameras without internal high voltage supplies intensified PentaMAX ITE or lens coupled intensif
286. rent hardware types are needed to run different detectors for example liquid nitrogen cooled vs thermoelectrically cooled ST 138 Older controller for TE LN ICCD and ITE units It offers a few special features such as hardware accumulator In general this controller is being phased out Appendix A System and Camera Nomenclature 207 Cameras Detectors HCTE CCD See NTE CCD and NTE 2 ICCD Standard classic intensified camera requires purging has internal high voltage power but requires external high voltage pulses for gating Controlled by ST 133 or ST 138 LN CCD Liquid nitrogen cooled detector 1 5 liter Dewar is standard can be run with ST 138 or ST 133 LN InGaAs Indium gallium arsenide detector controlled by a ST 133 controller MTE 2 Miniature liquid cooled camera designed for in vacuum chamber operation can be run with ST 133 controller Included in a PI MTE system NTE CCD and NTE 2 Stands for new TE head More cube shaped than the TE designed for maximum cooling NTE 2 requires high power version of ST 133 RTE CCD Round thermoelectrically cooled camera can be run with ST 133 controllers TE CCD Water cooled camera can be run with ST 138 or some ST 133 controllers TEA CCD Forced air cooled camera can be run with ST 138 or some ST 133 controllers V ICCD Video intensified detector Always shipped with its own control box produces standard video out so no interface card or software requi
287. rface Glossary includes brief definitions of terms used in relation to WinSpec 32 and the system hardware The WINSPEC HLP online documentation contains e Information that is in this manual e Step by step instructions on how to use WinSpec functions e Reference information about WinSpec and its functions and e Context sensitive help which describes a screen or menu item that is being pointed to or that is active when a Help button is clicked on 18 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Tool Tips and Status Bar Messages Placing the mouse cursor on a button and resting it there for a few seconds causes a brief tool tip message to appear that describes the button s function Tool tips are also provided for the individual panes of the Status Bar at the bottom of the WinSpec 32 window Note that tool tips only appear at the desktop level Tool tips are not provided for the buttons on the individual dialog boxes and tab pages More detailed descriptions for each button at the desktop level are provided at the left side of the Status Bar Status Bar help messages are also provided for the menu selections Additional Documentation Additional documentation can be found in the WinSpec32 Documentation directory on the hard drive where WinSpec 32 was installed Among the files that may be in this directory are WINHEAD TXT This file contains documentation on the header structure for WinSpec 32 or WinView 32 Data Files TXT files can
288. rigger and Auxiliary Trigger Outputs 1 Set the Delay Trigger and Aux Trigger initial delay 2 Set the Delay Trigger output to be synchronized to either the Trigger or the Gate pulse 3 Set the Aux Trigger output to be synchronized to either the Trigger Triggers Gating Comm Pott or the Gate pulse Mode 4 Click on the Gating tab Figure 160 5 Select Repetitive or Sequential and then click on the adjacent Setup button For safety the Gating Mode HV Pulsing selection should be Disabled Note In setting the PG200 gating parameters whether for Repetitive or Sequential operation see your PG200 Apply Changed Settings __ Apel AN Settings Manual for pulse width and delay a Help limitations Note that gate pulses are capacitively coupled in many Princeton Instruments intensified detector heads so high duty cycles and gate widths longer than 1 ms may lead to reduced gating efficiency m Gating Mode HY Pulsing Enabled C Disabled Figure 160 PG200 Gating tab page Repetitive Mode If Repetitive is selected the Repetitive Gate width _ Gate Delay Gating setup dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 161 In the Repetitive E rsec z 1 nsec z gating mode the Gate Width and Gate ona ane enone Delay remain constant over the course Repeat Width Delay for of the measurement Set the Gate Width fi Exposure s and Gate Delay to the desired values and click on O
289. ring new values is functionally equivalent to changing the displayed area by dragging the cursor as previously described Selecting a narrower intensity range results in pixels brighter and darker than the range limits being displayed as white and black respectively The effect is to increase the contrast of the image Each time a change is made click on OK to close the Display Layout dialog box and observe the effect of the change 3 Oncompleting your display experiments restore the defaults Autoscale Intensity and Full Range checked Last close the data file Displaying a Z Slice 1 Open a data file with multiple frames 2 Position the cursor in the data window 3 Click on Z slice button It will cut a section across multiple frames 116 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C This page intentionally left blank Part 2 Advanced Topics Chapter 9 Cleaning 5 ciicassconadsansnimanienrncomuamnainiamanmeigonene 119 Chapter 10 ROI Definition amp Binning 2 0 0 0 ceeeeecreeeeteeeeneeeeeees 123 Chapter 11 Correction Techniques 02 02 cece cccceeeeeeeseneeseeeeeeneeaeeeeaes 131 Chapter 12 Spectra Math 2 00 ccc ceseesceeeeseeecaeeaeseeeeneeaeeeeeeneeaeeeeaes 135 Chapter 13 Y T Analysis sssisctinistaernmntianacmiiiandiaimmannenmnans 141 Chapter 14 Gluing Spectra oo cc cceeseescseeeeeeeeseeaeeeeceeeaeeeceeseeaeeeees 145 Chapter 15 Post Acquisition Mask Processes cccccceseseeeeee 151 Chapter 16 Additional
290. roduction A variety of mathematical operations can be Math 8 8 x performed on WinSpec data files This A B C functionality called Spectra Math is selectable from the Process Menu The four tab pages on the Math dialog box Figure 127 allow you to select the source file s operation and the Inputa destination file for the results of the selected B mathematical operation displayed at the top of the dialog box Additionally you can use the ra mouse to specify an ROI to be processed ol available on tab pages A and B Operation B E x Range b a a Source Data and Destination Selection A rep 3 As many as three data files can be involved in math operations and there is a corresponding tab Datatype page for each of them A B and C A and B are Input Files C is always the Output File Every d operation requires at least one Input File and an Oan File Thus every eet will require Muse awe se o using tab pages A and C In those cases where a second Input File or a constant is required tab page B will also be used see the online Help for detailed descriptions of the individual Math file pages Figure 127 Math dialog box With but a few exceptions the parameters on the three file tab pages are the same Brief descriptions follow Frame If an input file contains multiple frames you can specify the ones to be processed The default is to process all frames Yo
291. rs WinSpec 32 DLLs Snap Ins Macros PVCAM Interface Card Controller a FT Liquid Cooled Air Cooled Cryo Cooled CcD CCD CCD Camera Detector Camera Detector Camera Detector J Coolant Circulator Optional Cables and Hoses User I O _ 5 Taxi Cable memme AC Power Cord 88888 Detector Controller Cable am a a a Shutter Cable Creer re Coolant Hose Figure 7 Possible System Configurations 110 220 Detector Controller o TAXI cable PERSE iiet I Serial Com 1 Inle oe ee i Shutter L 110 220 Erei lOutlet etector l I Le I I I es i Detector Serial 110 220 eal Fee Controller ae Spectrometer Computer Tee a i Figure 8 Liquid or Air Cooled System Diagram Chapter 2 Hardware Basic Hardware Setup 31 TAXI cable Serial Com Detector Controller Shutter CoS Detector 110 22 Detector Serial 110 22 Shutter Controller EXPERIMENT Spectrometer ee Vly N a vy zO ff al ing Figure 9 Cryo Cooled System Diagram Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard runs the first time you select Setup Hardware after WinSpec 32 has been installed on the host computer for the first time or when you are setting up a new controller for running in multi controller mode If a PIHWDEF INI file has been copied to your WinSpec 32 directory the selections specified in the PIHWDEF INI will be
292. rsor is on the correct peak and manually move it if it is not After all four reference points are taken WinSpec 32 begins an iterative process to find the best values This process is initiated by clicking on the Calculate Results button You will see the parameters change as WinSpec 32 performs the calculations The program stops when the best parameters are displayed in the Dispersion dialog box If satisfied with the calibration simply click on OK to make the save the final dispersion parameters as part of the calibration data for the grating Click on Cancel to revert back 92 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C to previously saved parameters Note that you can also change the parameters manually and click on OK to save them Having completed the calibration for one grating select the next grating and repeat the procedure Continue until all available gratings have been calibrated Chapter 8 Displaying the Data Introduction WinSpec 32 can display data as an image as a two dimensional graph or as a 3D Graph multiple strips from the same graph or the same strip from multiple frames You can choose to allow the software control how the data will be displayed or make the selection yourself To have WinSpec 32 control the data display mode simply select the Auto Select checkbox provided on the File Open dialog box and also on the Display Layout dialog box The Auto Select algorithm makes the selection depending on the number of data
293. ry a different Comm port 8 Click on the Triggers tab Figure 158 PG200 Comm Port tab page Figure 159 9 Select the Trigger mode either Triggers Gating Comm Pott Internal in which the PG200 So E free TUNS i External Hz Intemal External which it is triggered from an external source i m Delay Tigger _ p Delayed Trigger Sync Mode 10 If operating in the Internal 20 fusec el Tigger Gate trigger mode set the Trigger Bie rod P a Consult the Ausilliary Tigger r Auilliary Trigger Sync Mode anual to determine T Z 20 Jusec 7 e fe the maximum Trigger Nl Trigger cas Frequency for a given set of conditions The PG200 Delay Trigger and Auxiliary Trigger outputs are h Apply All Settings programmed from the Triggers tab page They produce trigger outputs Cancel Help that are synchronized to and delayed from the trigger Trigger Figure 159 PG200 Triggers tab page Sync mode or from the trailing edge of the gate pulse Gate Sync mode In the Gate Sync mode as the gate pulse changes its position and width the trigger outputs remain synchronized with the gate moving with it In the Trigger Sync mode the trigger outputs do not sweep with the gate but maintain their initial position The Delayed Trigger and Auxiliary Trigger outputs are independently programmable Chapter 18 Pulser Operation 175 Programming the Delayed T
294. s dialog box also allows you to open a file and save it with a different name Saving Temporary Data Files The WinSpec 32 software allows you to work with temporary files files with names like lt untitled 1 gt To save these files or to save any file to a new filename perform the following steps 1 Select Save As from the File Save As 2 x menu The Data File Save As swen a na dengam dialog Figure 54 appears yA three strip SPE yA 2strip SPE yA Bkne CIRCUIT SPE yd 1035strip SPE yA 3001 SPE WABlue 2 Open the directory where you Foot1 spe yA 1Omorestrip SPE yA 3strip SPE y CAM want the file saved Clicking on HG ARGON SPE y 10strip SPE WA 4trames 512sq SPE y Cel5 the button at the right of the HID LAMP SPE y 16strip SPE Z adjust SPE WNT Save i eld opensa browser MOON4 SPE WA Istrip SPE WABack SPE yA Cels p yA 256strip SPE yA Bkand SPE y Cels function that will allow you to quickly and easily select the Ej target directory File name 5 3 Type in a name for the file Save as type wir Data spe z Cancel 9 Windows 95 long file name convention applies It is not Figure 54 Data File Save As dialog box necessary to add the spe automatically according to the specified file type extension It will be added Save as type Indicates the file type The at ctl tes data types currently supported are listed in 8 bit Geli Te Figure 55 If AIl Files is selected you will
295. s is performed Haiwan Satun eas on the Hardware Setup Cleans Skips tab page e ane2 Dist Infe Dankie Figure 110 When you set up the detector for the first time default values are automatically ae inserted into these fields These will give the best NumberofClans P results for most applications Even so it is a good a a ao idea to know what these entries mean with regard EEA to cleaning Clear Pre Exposure E I Use Continuous Cleans Instruction Let s begin with Number of Strips per Clean This parameter sets the number of rows that will be shifted and discarded per clean cycle While a large number such as the number of rows in the array may result in the best cleaning of the array the tradeoff is that there may be a significant delay between the receipt of a start exposure signal NOTSCAN signal at the SCAN BNC goes high and the beginning of the actual Figure 110 Cleans Skips tab page exposure This delay occurs because the current clean cycle must be completed before a start exposure signal received during the cycle will be implemented Typically the default setting is much smaller and in time critical experiments the setting should be 1 or 2 m Vertical Skips Minimum Block Size 2 E Number of Blocks 288 The Number of Cleans value is usually set to zero 0 These are additional clean cycles that can be required after a start exposure signal is received and the current clean cycle
296. s order is absolutely necessary for correct calibration Theoretically if you were to move your spectrograph to the zero order peak or any other known peak the peak would fall exactly on the center of the array In the real world the mechanical tolerances of the mounting will probably result in the peak being a few pixels off The Offset procedure that follows allows you to correct for this small offset error 1 Select Info on the View menu The Info dialog Offset 83 hlu Xr box should be visible This will help indicate the Selected Grating 1200 status of spectrograph movement and data Ref collection Wavelength f Offset Val fo 2 Inthe Spectrograph Calibration dialog box click is a a on the Offset button This will open the Offset ror oosaosts a dialog box Figure 66 7 Instructions 3 The dialog box that appears has a Reference Wavelength entry box This is the wavelength Make sure that Cursor is on top of Peak N move if necessary then where the spectrograph is set for the offset Click OK if Error is acceptable or measurement All Acton spectrographs use the Pe eS AG ee cree eS zero order that is a setting of 0 M essa ges 4 Click on the Start Offset Procedure button mar Be The spectrograph should now move to the reference wavelength and data acquisition will OK Cancel Help commence Then a peak find will be performed and the resulting data will be displaye
297. s position as required to read true for the selected strip e If Image is selected all data points will be plotted as a function of the strip and pixel number e If3D Graph is selected multiple data strips will be plotted as a function of intensity versus pixel number the actual number of data strips plotted depending on the 3D Layout display parameter settings All of the strips could come from the same frame or in the case of a file containing multiple frames the same numbered strip could come from each frame e If Graph is selected the selected data strip only will be plotted as a function of intensity versus pixel number 4 Note the Files of Type field which allows you to select files for listing according to their type If WinXData spe is selected only files of type spe will be listed This is the native WinSpec 32 format If TIFF or 8 bit TIFF File eps is selected only files of the type eps will be listed If All Files is selected all files in the folder will be listed WinSpec 32 can open either spe files or eps files 8 bit or 16 bit Select type 8 bit TIFF File to open an 8 bit TIFF file Select type TIFF File to open a 16 bit TIFF file The open display default selection can be changed and saved from the Display Layout window Chapter 5 Opening Closing and Saving Data Files 71 5 Either double clickon METTJE EJ the name of the file you want to open or single click on the name and th
298. s whether a calibration is temporary or permanent until changed Once a calibration has been saved as the default it will be automatically applied to subsequently acquired data It will not be applied to data files recalled from disk Note The default state of the button not only with respect to the button setting but also with respect to whether it is disabled grayed out and not user settable depends on the situation as follows No Data If you open the Calibration Setup menu and there is no data Save as Default will be pressed and disabled that is it will be locked in the Save as Default state Should you then click on OK no calibration values will be written to the Windows Registry Not Live Data If there is data in the active window when you open the Calibration Setup menu but the data isn t live such as would be the case if it were recalled from disk Save as Default is under user control with not pressed as the default state Note that if the opened data file was saved in a calibrated state that calibration will be in effect when the file is opened the calibration values will be loaded in the calibration setup and the data displayed Live Data If the active window is displaying live data Save as Default will be under user control but in the selected or pressed state If Save as Default is selected and you click on OK the calibration will be stored in the Windows Registry and will be automatically applied t
299. screen refresh rate as rapid as possible the focusing operation may be much easier to perform than it would be with a slow refresh rate To obtain the fastest possible refresh rate simply operate with the axes and cross sections both switched off View menu and with the Zoom factor set to 1 1 Note that the Zoom 1 1 button on the Data Window toolbar is only present when viewing an image To check the refresh rate click on the Status bar bottom of screen Collection Status pane which is immediately to the left of the Timer pane right end of Status bar The refresh rate will be displayed in the Collection Status pane Do not confuse the screen refresh rate with the data collection rate Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 95 Data Displayed as a 3D Graph Data files can be opened as 3D graphs from the Open dialog box Figure 75 shows a 3D graph with five data strips Figure 74 on the previous page shows a 3D graph with two data strips Both examples illustrate the behavior of the Auto Select algorithm as discussed on page 93 The following paragraphs contain procedures for opening and displaying data in graphical format s4 five strip SPE 1340 X 5X 1 5 O Figure 75 3D graph with five data strips Displaying Hid lamp spe The data file used in this exercise is Hid lamp spe one of the data files supplied with your WinSpec 32 software 1 From the File menu select Open 21x Open The Open dialog box L kna denam Figur
300. scribes the Custom Toolbar and explains how to add remove the available buttons Software Options describes WinSpec 32 options that can also be purchased from Roper Scientific Part 3 Reference Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G Appendix H Appendix Online Help System and Camera Nomenclature provides a cross reference table for systems controllers and cameras CCD arrays It also provides brief descriptions of systems and system components CCD array related abbreviations are also included Calibration Lines contains wavelength tables and a detailed spectrum for Mercury Argon Data Structure contains descriptions of the data structure for both WinView WinSpec 1 43 and for 1 6 The data structure for WinView 32 and WinSpec 32 is the same as that for WinView WinSpec 1 6 Auto Spectro Wavelength Calibration discusses the WinSpec 32 wavelength calibration algorithm CD Failure Work Arounds provides advice on how to successfully complete the installation in situations where the CD ROM doesn t support long file names WinSpec 32 Repair and Maintenance provides information on how to repair reinstall and uninstall WinSpec 32 components USB 2 0 Limitations covers the currently known limitations associated with operating under the USB 2 0 interface Troubleshooting USB 2 0 provides solutions to communication problems that may occur when operating under the USB 2 0 inte
301. se ratio in that they don t degrade the resolution As stated earlier Y axis binning is the key factor that distinguishes spectroscopy readout from imaging readout In spectroscopy all pixels in each column of an ROI the entire chip or a specified subregion are automatically binned The effect is to generate a single strip of data that is then displayed as one spectrum In WinSpec the ROI definition and binning parameters for spectroscopy are grouped under the headings of Wavelength and Slit The Wavelength X axis parameters determine the start point and length of a data strip and the amount of X axis binning By default the Group value is 1 no binning but can be increased to indicate the number of pixels being binned to increase the sensitivity at the expense of resolution The Slit Y axis parameters determine the vertical location and height of the Y axis columns When multiple ROIs are defined all of the ROIs will have the same Wavelength values multiple data strips will be generated and multiple spectra will be displayed The Slit values however may vary from ROI to ROI as long as the Slits do not overlap Imaging Mode Imaging mode allows you to define rectangular groups of pixels of any size that will be binned together to create an image rather than a spectrum Separate Group parameter values can be entered in the X and Y directions for every defined parameter to give you the greatest possible flexibility in controlling t
302. seeeeeeees 248 Temperature how done with each controller type 52 60 Temperature control eee eee 52 60 HFF fil S a esun a annienta ais 172 Timing Generator Interactive Trigger Setup 187 Tool UPS seis ccvdia cd echuitin aaa anie 18 Turrets annann eiee 46 Uninstalling WinSpec 32 0 eee 232 USB 2 0 data OVELTUN 2 00 eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 235 installation seys iuist 25 Use for Auto Spectro Calibration checkbox 44 User Unsen a ee ah 80 Vertical SKIpSiinecnsieirneaiian 42 122 View Width Delay Sequence 186 W Z Warn When Crossing Laser Line selection49 Warnings Crossing Laser Line warning to guarantee Of protection ssesseessseserseerersrrrrreresee 49 intensified cameras sesseeseeeeeeeeeeee eee 60 susceptibility of intensified cameras to light overload damage eee 52 60 Warranties image intensifier detector 246 normal wear item disclaimer 245 ONE VOI aii sisteg eves Sipe diast Gs 245 one year on refurbished discontinued PLOGUCIS Po veces tivesptestens Sees e 245 Version 2 5 C Warranties cont owner s manual and troubleshooting 247 sealed chamber eee eset 246 SOLWALE 5 cu AEE EE EEE 246 VACUUM integrity 246 VersArray XP vacuum chamber 245 x ray detector oo eee eee eseeseeeseeeees 246 your responsibility eeeeseeeeseeees 247 Wavelength calibration eee 75 display UNItS oe eee iiis 80 effect of any optical adjustment
303. seseeeseeresresrrsreeresressessresres 237 Figure 195 Hardware Wizard Interface dialog bOX eee ee eeseceseceseceeeceeeeeeeeeeneeenes 237 Figure 196 RSConfig dialog box Two Camera Styles 2 0 0 0 cecesceseceseeeseeeseeeeeeeenes 238 Figure 197 Hardware Wizard PVCAM dialog bX eeeeeseeseeeseeeneecnsecnsecnaeeenaes 238 Figure 198 RSConfig dialog box Two Camera Styles cc ceeeesceseceseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 239 Figure 199 Error Creating Controller dialog bOX eee eeeeseceseceseceeceeeeeeeeeseeeeneeenes 240 Figure 200 Hardware Wizard Detector Camera CCD dialog bOX eee eeeeeeeeeeee 241 Table 1 PCI Driver Files and Locations ee eeeesesseeeseeeseeeeecnseceaeceaeesseecsaesnaeenaeens 24 Table 2 USB Driver Files and Locations ee eeeeeseeseeeseeeseecnsecesecnaecnseecaecnaeenaeens 25 Table 3 Cursor Appearance and Behavior for Images and Graphs eeeseeeeeeeeee 100 Table 4 Wavelength Calibration Lines in nanometerS cccccecsseceeeceeeteeeeneceeenees 211 Table 5 Features Not Supported under USB 2 0 oo eee esseceseceeceeceseeeseceeeeeeneeeaes 233 xii WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C This page intentionally left blank Part 1 Getting Started INEFOGUGCHION isanne aei EN E E EEE 15 Chapter 1 Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 oo ee eeeeteeeeees 19 Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 00 00 00 ccccsceseeeescneeseeeeeeeeseeecseneeaeeeenes 29 Chapter 3 Initial Spectroscopic Data Collection
304. spectroscopy eeeeeee 124 Plard disk scciuiiSe coset Secedss nanona 19 Hardware setup Custom Chip tab page eee 193 Custom Timing tab page 194 Display tab page nsss 38 Interface tab page n 39 OVELVIC We otelin aa ieie 29 requirements 0 0 elec eects eeteeeeeeees 19 251 Hardware setup cont User Defined Chip 0 0 0 ee 193 User Defined Timing 194 Hid lamp spe sensn inrano 95 High speed PCI interface eee 39 Histograms cumulati Vessassa 168 POSt processing s seseeseererrerrrrerrereee 168 proced re nisinsin is 168 standardise iea nee y 168 l K WOraddtess terinin e eR 39 VO Address 2 amp 3 ceisisiniiiiasuniron 39 IEEE 488 GPIB port ssseseesseeeesrererreenee 180 Image Graph and 3D Graph selection 94 Images labelit ginei e 104 Imaging data collection Initial 59 Experiment Setup procedure steps common to all controller types 61 MicroMAX or ST 133 leese 65 data collection eseseseeeeeeeeseeeseeees 66 focusing saiten aae 65 PentaMAX prere ian e aer 67 data collection 68 procedure for all controllers 68 Skips and Cleans 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeees 60 temperature control eee 60 Imaging mode eee eeeeeeseeseeeneeeees 123 Information box as active window 99 Install Remove Spectrographs dialog box 44 Installation ADONE nonae E rE E EaR 23 from FTE SIE ee urA e aiea EES 23 multiple versions of WinSpec 32 2
305. ssed Figure 6 Setup menu in Chapters 3 and 4 Diagnostics gt Advanced functions such as Post Processing User Defined Chip and User Defined Timing are discussed in Part 2 of this manual Basic Hardware Overview The basic components of a Roper Scientific system are a camera or detector a controller interconnecting cables a computer interface card and the application software in this case WinSpec 32 Note that other components such as a computer coolant circulator and pulser can also be ordered ST 133A Controler The interface card installed in the host computer permits communication between the host computer and the controller often an ST 133 The controller accepts input from the host computer and WinSpec 32 and converts it to the appropriate control signals for the camera These signals allow you to specify the readout rate binning parameters regions of interest gain and array temperature After data is acquired in the camera it is transmitted to the controller where it is processed transmitted to the host computer displayed in the WinSpec 32 window and can be stored to disk Figure 7 illustrates possible system 29 30 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C configurations spectrometers and pulsers are not shown Figure 8 and Figure 9 show the interconnections for a Roper Scientific system as well as interconnections to an optional coolant circulator an optional shutter and spectromete
306. st Val fo Mercury Next click the Start Adjust z Si 4 Procedure button aes The spectrograph will move to the reference wavelength and collect a spectrum It will also Instructions perform a peak find operation and display the acquired data The reference peak should appear Select Reference Wavelength then click Start Procedure button somewhere near the center of the display and the cursor should be on the peak at or near the Messages highest point Figure 70 illustrates a typical Adjust data acquisition The reference peak should appear near Cancel Help the center of the display and the cursor should be near or on the highest point of the peak Figure 69 Adjust dialog box As was the case for the Offset adjustment before going on you have to make a judgment regarding the location of the cursor on the peak Take particular care that the proper peak has been found If for example the peak finder places the cursor on the 576 peak manually move the cursor to the 579 peak For additional information refer to the earlier discussion of how the peak finder works in the Calibration Offset procedure v4 WinSpec 32 Untitled 1340 X 1 X 1 Figure 70 Calibration Adjust Spectrum Note the reported Error value in the Adjust dialog box The value is reported in nm Transposed to pixels it should be less than one pixel The number of nm represented by one pixel will depend of course on the dispersion of
307. strip from multiple frames You can choose to allow the software control how the data will be displayed or make the selection yourself To have WinSpec 32 control the data display mode simply check the Auto Select checkbox provided in the File Open dialog box and also in the Display Layout dialog box The Auto Select algorithm makes the selection depending on the number of data strips as described on page 93 Displaying circuit spe The image used in this exercise is circuit spe one of the images supplied with your WinSpec 32 software Once you become comfortable working with this image you should have little difficulty in working with images from actual measurement data Chapter 8 Displaying the Data 109 1 From the File menu select iS 2 x Open The Open dialog box teeki a0 SY Figure 95 allows you to j WA 256strip SPE select the image to be _ 1035strip SPE L 2stiip SPE opened The Look In field 1Omorestrip SPE WA 200i SPE provides a browser function 10strip SPE oe 16strip SPE adjust SPE so you can easily find the stip SPE Aai directory where the images By default the data gt l directory is a subdirectory fenm of the directory where WinSpec 32 was installed ls 9f bpe Wir Data spe z _ ca Subdirectory names and the Open Display As filenames of all files of the T Aut Oj Display Layout specified type the Image Graph C 3D Graph mer WinSpec 32 data type is
308. strips as follows If there are eleven or more strips of data they will be displayed as a normal image such as that shown in Figure 72 s4 256strip SPE 1024 X 256 X 1 2 Q B14 250 1 l 40 Figure 72 Image display of 256 data strips If there are at least three data strips but less than eleven the data will be plotted as a 3D Graph as shown in Figure 73 v4 10strip SPE 1024 X 10 X 1 AJRA x 519 11 Y 1 Z 1 Figure 73 3D Image display of 10 data strips 93 94 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C e If there are only two strips of data they will be displayed as graphs stacked in a two dimensional plot the same as for a 3D Graph of two strips v4 2strip SPE 1024 X 2 X 1 35 Ae Q Z K 1 M1 1 5 Figure 74 3D graph with two data strips A single strip will always be plotted as a simple graph Note that from two to ten strips the intensity Y axis scale shifts position as required to read true for the selected strip The file Open dialog box and Display Layout dialog box both contain the three display mode select radio buttons Image Graph and 3D Graph If you want to control the data display mode yourself simply leave Auto Select unchecked and the display mode will correspond to whichever of the three radio buttons is selected Screen Refresh Rate The Screen Refresh Rate is an important but often overlooked display performance parameter At times such as when focusing by making the
309. sts of filling the aperture from a broad light source and adjusting the focusing mirror for the sharpest image narrowest possible symmetrical peak on the CCD Focusing can also be accomplished by moving the detector in and out Different detectors and or spectrographs will have different means for doing this In addition it may be necessary to rotate the detector so that the spectral line is perfectly vertical on the CCD 2 The Offset Adjust and Dispersion parameter values for WinSpec 32 will not be the same as they were with earlier versions of WinSpec This is true even if the same spectrograph is used You cannot simply enter values you may have recorded when using the earlier 16 bit WinSpec versions If you do very large calibration errors will be introduced The calibration must be performed using the following procedure Preparation 1 Install the spectrograph mounting it to the detector per the instructions in the Detector manual and turn it on You may have to restart the WinSpec 32 software after turning on the spectrograph 2 Mount a suitable light source mercury lamp preferred near the entrance slit of the spectrograph so that the light passes through the spectrograph onto the detector 3 Review the Define Spectrograph selections and settings to be sure they are correct for the calibration to be performed 83 84 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C The Experiment Setup parameters must be set so that a spectrum can
310. t ROIs that are smaller than the full chip This feature allows you to bin and quickly traverse the rows that precede and follow the ROI The rows to be processed and discarded are binned into blocks each containing a number of rows with the Number of Blocks parameter determining how many blocks there will be before and after the ROI Shift Register lt H SKIPS binned vertically E E EE E E E ese REE ER EEE E E eRe E EER E EE eRe E E EEE EA LL ROI 0 Figure 19 Vertical Skips The block size determines how quickly the region preceding and following the ROI will be traversed If the blocks are large the region will be traversed quickly but there is the possibility of overloading the shift register and causing blooming With small blocks the risk of blooming will be minimized but the time to traverse will be large WinSpec 32 uses an exponential algorithm to simultaneously achieve rapid traversing with minimal risk of blooming The first block specified in rows is as large as possible Each successive block is a factor of two smaller than the one preceding until the minimum block size is reached All remaining blocks are the minimum block size By making the first block as large as possible and subsequent blocks increasingly smaller the region preceding and following the region of interest is traversed as
311. t SHORT float float float float SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHO RT SHORT SHORT USHORT DWORD float float float float float float SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHO RT SHORT WORD WORD SHO SHO RT RT SHORT char char WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C AmpHiCapLowNoise 4 Amp Switching Mode xDimDet 6 Detector x dimension of chip mode 8 timing mode exp _sec 10 alternative exposure in sec vChipXdim 14 Virtual Chip X dim vCchipYdim 16 Virtual Chip Y dim yDimDet 18 y dimension of CCD or detector date DATEMAX 20 date VirtualChipFlag 30 On Off Spare_1 2 32 noscan 34 Old number of scans should always be sI DetTemperature 36 Detector Temperature Set DetType 40 CCD DiodeArray type xdim 42 actual of pixels on x axis stdiode 44 trigger diode DelayTime 46 Used with Async Mode ShutterControl 50 Normal Disabled Open Disabled Closed AbsorbLive 52 On Off AbsorbMode 54 Reference Strip or File CanDoVirtualChipFlag 56 T F Cont Chip able to do Virtual Chip ThresholdMinLive 58 On Off ThresholdMinVal 60 Threshold Minimum Value ThresholdMaxLive 64 On Off ThresholdMaxVal 66 Threshold Maximum Value SpecAutoSpectroMode 70 T F Spectrograph Used SpecCenterWw1Nm 72 Center Wavelength in Nm SpecGlueFlag 76 T F File is Glued SpecGlueStartwW1lNm 78 Starting Wavelength in Nm SpecGlueEndwW1Nm 82 Starting Wavelength in Nm SpecGlueMinOvrlpNm 86 Minimum Overlap in Nm SpecGlueFinalResNm 90 Fi
312. t Focus again To store the new data to disk again click Start Storage on the Acquisition menu or click on the Start Store button This completes initial data acquisition with a PentaMAX Controller Data Collection All Controllers The following data collection procedure works for all controllers However it doesn t exercise some of the special features such as video monitor support available on certain controller models 1 Click on Focus to begin collecting data Data collection can be initiated by means of the Focus button in the Experiment Setup dialog box by clicking on Focus on the Acquisition Menu or by clicking on the Focus button of the Custom Toolbar Images will be continuously acquired and displayed Observe the displayed data and adjust the system optics for the best possible image It may be necessary to readjust the Exposure Time Experiment Setup Main page To store the most recent image click Start Storage on the Acquisition menu or click on the Start Store button on the Custom Toolbar Data acquisition will halt and the most recent image will be stored in a file having the name specified on the Data File tab page Figure 51 Typical Data Acquisition Image For a PI MAX system switch the Camera State back to Safe mode on the Acquisition Experiment Setup Main tab page This completes the initial data acquisition routine which should work with any Princeton Instruments brand Controller
313. t Layout on the Display menu The Display Layout i General Range Color Axes 3D Layout Image Layout Cursor dialog box will open as shown in Figure 77 Display Type m Axes Cross Sections g I Auto Select M Horizontal IT Horizontal Check and if necessary set Cr I Vertical T Vertical C Image the following parameter e Tous selections on each tab page Graph Pi aia aaa 3d Graph I Keep Window Placement General tab page Display As 3d Graph Auto Select unchecked Axes both boxes checked Cross Sections both ee Cancel Hep boxes checked Keep Window Placement unchecked Range tab page Initial Autoscale checked Set to Full Range checked Frame 1 Figure 77 Display Layout dialog box Color tab page no changes Axes tab page Horizontal axis checked Horizontal label checked Horizontal label string Pixel Vertical axis checked Vertical label checked Vertical label string Intensity 3D Layout 3D Mode Multi strip same frame selected 3D Properties Remove Hidden Line checked other two boxes unchecked Z Axis Endpoint X set to 20 Y set to 40 3D Marker curves Marker Curves unchecked Curve set to 5 Click on OK The Display Layout dialog box will close and the data display exclusive of the intensity profiles should appear as shown in Figure 78 Each strip is displayed as a plot of intensity vs pixel number The first strip is at the front and the last strip is at th
314. tab page Edge enhancement is accomplished by mask Input Parameters l Output operations defined by parameters entered on the Parameters tab page These functions can enhance Operation edges sharpen or smooth features or erode or User defined dilate an image How these images are processed Laplacian 1 Laplacian 2 is briefly described below A mask is an n X n matrix n is 3 for all WinSpec 32 operations that is placed over every n x n subsection of the image Each parameter in the mask is multiplied by the corresponding value of the image The results are summed and placed in the central position in the output file An example will help illustrate the process The following is the Laplacian 1 mask used to enhance edges Figure 136 Edge Enhancement Parameters tab page 1 1 1 1 8 1 1 1 1 Here is an example of a 3 x 3 subsection of an image The middle pixel has the coordinates 100 100 20 20 19 20 21 20 20 19 20 Multiply each pair of corresponding numbers and sum the products 1 x 20 1 x 20 1 x 19 1 x 20 8 x 21 1 x 20 1 x 20 1 x 19 1 x 20 10 The result is placed at position 100 100 in the output image file The mask is now placed over the 9 pixels centered at 101 100 and the procedure is repeated Chapter 15 Post Acquisition Mask Processes 153 Laplacian Masks The
315. tant if New in the Window menu or in the Data Window Context menu has been used to open additional windows with the same data Simply clicking on Close in the File menu will close all windows containing the same data regardless of how it is displayed e Close in the Control menu accessed by clicking on the WinSpec 32 icon at the left end of the Title bar closes WinSpec 32 as does double clicking on the WinSpec 32 icon Similarly the key combination ALT F4 also closes WinSpec 32 e Close All in the Window menu closes all open data files e The key combination Ctrl F4 closes the active window only 74 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Deleting Data Files You can delete data files directly from within WinSpec 32 without having to close WinSpec 32 and without having to use the Windows 95 Explorer or another file utility This is achieved using the File Operations menu accessed by right clicking on the file name in the Open dialog box as explained below 1 Select Open from the File menu Select Only files with the selected data type Sevein Open j i Print spe or eps will be listed 1G 2stiip SPE i Bkne Scan for Viruses A 300i SPE VA Blue 4 Open With 2 Position the mouse cursor on the name eee p 2d asin sPe nd cam 2 Stuffit gt y rames512sq SPE y Cel5 of the file you want to delete and click HID LAl aS toZip WG adiust SPE z yT MOONE amp Add to ARGON zip WABack SPE yA C
316. tatype FLOAT Mouse Apply Close Help Mouse Apply Close Help Figure 147 Input tab page Figure 148 Output tab page Output tab page The Output tab page Figure 135 allows you to name the output file It additionally allows you to select whether the modified data is to be displayed and to select the data type The frame and X Y range are reported information only 163 164 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Threshold and Clipping Clipping an image causes pixels outside the Threshold and Clipping X specified range to be changed When Clip High is selected all pixels with values greater than the Clip High value will be changed to the Clip High value When Clip Low is selected p Operation all pixels with values less than the Clip Low Input Parameters Dutput value will be changed to the Clip Low value 2 ee Selecting Clip Both will use both Clip High A psa ae and Clip low values during the same processing step A D y Yalues The Threshold function converts an image to Threshold Value binary black and white All intensity values below the threshold setting are zero black All LowCip those above become ones white High Clip oc Procedure 1 Select Clipping Threshold from the Process menu Mouse Apply Close Help 2 On the Input tab page if the correct input e ena je Bea image do
317. that the shift register is parallel to the X axis and that the data is shifted to the shift register in the Y direction See Figure 115 below lt Shift Register Wavelength 1 1 lt __ X Axis 256 1 v4 Hg Argon SPE 1024 X 256 X 1 og 5 lt D gri Q Aja 1 1024 256 1024 X 577 14 Y 218 Z 1 I 39 1024 x 256 CCD Figure 115 Assumed CCD Array Orientation 123 124 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Spectroscopy Mode In Spectroscopy Mode the default if the Imaging option has not been installed all pixels in a column are automatically binned The effect is to produce a single strip of data that is then displayed as a spectrum If Use Full Chip is selected data acquisition will result in as many data strips as there are pixel strips on the chip allowing a full frame image to be acquired If Use Region of Interest is selected data acquisition will result in as many data strips spectra as there are defined ROIs Imaging Mode In Imaging Mode available only if the option has been installed you have the ability to acquire full frame or ROI specific images If the Imaging option has not been installed images can only be acquired through the Use Full Chip function on the Experiment Setup Main tab page When this is selected data acquisition will result in as many data strips as there are pixel strips on the chip allowing a full fram
318. the grating 7 Press Continue to initiate another offset computation cycle The reported error should decrease Repeat the cycle two or three times until no further reduction in the error can be achieved The final error value achieved may wander a bit with each cycle repetition reflecting the noise content of the spectrum 8 Click on OK to close the Offset dialog box and return to the Spectrograph Calibrate dialog box Once you have adjusted the Offset for a reference wavelength or for the zero order peak other wavelengths may still be improperly calibrated To see why this is so think of the calibration in terms of the linear general equation y mx b Although this is a simplified model it suffices to show the basic relationships The b term can be thought of as the offset which is adjusted to place the reference at precisely the center of the array The location of points away from the offset reference will be determined by the m or slope term as well as b and the Adjust procedure allows m to be set so that adjusting the spectrograph to other wavelengths will result in this wavelength falling on the center of the array Chapter 7 Spectrograph Calibration 89 Click on the Adjust button to open the Adjust EE 8 86 ClxI dialog box Figure 69 Selected Grating 6 70131e 150 Enter as the Reference Wavelength a known line staat 579 066 in the observed spectrum such as 579 066 for Adju
319. the new controller and detector Controller Number This field will only appear if you have more than one Princeton Instruments brand PCI interface card installed If you have a controller connected to each PCI card you would select the number of the controller that you want to use Controller Type The currently selected Controller Type is displayed in this field If you change the controller that is being used in the system choose the correct controller name from the selection list displayed by clicking on the button at the end of the field Appendix A provides a cross reference table for systems controllers and CCD arrays Note After you have selected the Controller Type you can load the default settings for your controller camera and CCD array by clicking on Load Defaults From Controller if this button is present Chapter 2 Basic Hardware Setup 35 Controller Version In the case of the ST 133 MicroMAX SpectroMAX and PentaMAX controllers different versions have been released having different capabilities The available software selections will correctly reflect these differences when the proper version number is specified in this box Camera Type The selected Camera Detector CCD Type is displayed in this field Clicking on the button at the end of the box drops the selection list so that the selected type can be changed if necessary Note that the listed camera types depend on the controller selection requiring that the co
320. time of 200 ns the software would automatically set the Anticipator time to 300 ns For Burst operation in which each trigger initiates a burst of gate pulses select Burst Mode ON and set the number of pulses in the burst and their period Note If bracket pulsing and Burst Mode are both selected the entire burst will be bracketed but not the individual pulses within a burst Chapter 18 Pulser Operation 179 11 Select Repetitive or Sequential and then click on the adjacent Setup button Repetitive Mode If Repetitive is selected the Gate Width Gate Delay Repetitive Gating setup dialog From TO Out box will appear as shown in Ed Insec xf 15625 H hn nsec m nsec Figure 167 In the Repetitive a gating mode the Gate Width m On CCD Accumulations Software Accumulations and Gate Delay remain Gates Per Exposure Repeat Width Delay for constant over the course of fi fi Exposure s the measurement If operating in the Repetitive Gating mode simply set the Gate Width and Gate Delay to the desired values and click on OK The Repetitive Gating Setup dialog box will close and you will return to the PTG dialog box Sequential Gating Setup x Cancel Help Figure 167 Repetitive Gating Setup Gate Width Gate Delay Number of z Spectra Start 15 nsec x Start 1 5625 a nsec a End E nsec x End 1201 a nsec x IV Check Gate Width and Delay
321. ting y a y y 2 and B y y 2 Thus the grating equation can be written as m d sin y y 2 sin y y 2 2 sin y cos 2 and the grating angle is given by yw asin m 2d cos y 2 2 223 224 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Collimating Focusing Mirror Mirror K A te ae y Siit Focal Image Plane a R Relationships of and B interms of Y and Y Figure 190 Relationships of aand p in terms of yand y Note that the wavelength at the center of the exit plane does not depend on the focal length f However the wavelength at points off center depends on both the focal length and the detector angle 6 the angle of the image plane relative to the plane perpendicular to the spectrograph focal axis at the center of the image plane see Figure 191 For some wavelength X relatively close to A at the same grating angle X d m sin o sin B d m sin o sin B d m sin y y 2 sin y y 2 6 3 The angle depends on the focal length f the detector angle 4 and the distance of X from the center of the image plane nx where n is the number of pixels from the center and x is the pixel width the relationship is given by tan amp nx cos f nx sin 5 as shown in Figure 191 4 When the image plane is perpendicular 6 0 and this reduces to tan nx f Using the known parameters of focal length f detector angle 6 number of pixels from cente
322. tion The points must always be defined by pixel number but nanometers can be changed to another unit if desired Two mathematical models can be used to fit the calibration to the data The first Least Square calculates a linear approximation of the fit by minimizing the sum of the squares of the errors between the fit and the calibration points Linear approximation is generally sufficient The Polynomial method uses a higher order function of the form a bx cx2 where the order of the polynomial is the highest power of x used The general rule is Cal Peaks 1 Order maximum order 5 If four peaks are active in the Calibrate dialog the order of the polynomial can be 2 or 3 Even if ten peaks are used the maximum order of the Polynomial is 5 up to x gt As a general guide we advise calibrating using the Linear calibration method with widely separated peaks as previous described If the available peaks are clustered a Polynomial fit using the smallest order possible may give a good fit in the region of the calibration peaks but have increasing large deviation the further you get from them In an extreme case there may even be two values for the same pixel a clearly impossible condition that will result in an error message With the Linear calibration method at least two peaks are required to calibrate For a Polynomial calibration the number of peaks must be at least one higher than the order of the polynomial
323. tive one From the File menu open the Print Setup dialog box Name Status Ready Type HP LaserJet 5Si 5Si MX PS Figure 154 Where PISE LJSSI 2 The Print Setup dialog box Comment HPLJ5SSI Software 192 168 44 217 is similar to that found in Paper Orientation many Windows programs eee hOt S Portrait You can use the default printer or select a specific Source Automatically Select 7 C Landscape printer from the list of installed devices For encore OK canes information on installing EE E printer drivers consult the Windows documentation The Options button shows more features of the selected printer driver again a standard Windows feature Figure 154 Print Setup dialog box 3 Select the Paper Size and Source The Landscape format where the paper is wider than it is tall is probably the best way to print out data 4 Click on OK to execute the printer setup selections or Cancel to exit the dialog leaving the original settings unchanged 169 170 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Printing Directly from Bo KEI H m Printer n S pec 32 Name Properties This procedure assumes you Satis Head have already set up the printer Type HP Laserlet SSi 5Si MX PS you will be using Where PISE LI5SI Comment HPLJSSI Software 192 168 44 217 wrth 1 From the File menu open the mmen aioe Tes Print dialog box Figure 155 Print range m
324. ton Microsoft compatible serial mouse or Logitech three button serial bus mouse Operating System Requirements TAXI Protocol Windows 95 Windows 98SE Windows ME Windows NT ver 4 0 or higher Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system WinSpec 32 is not supported under OS 2 Nor will it run under Windows 3 1 or 3 11 USB 2 Protocol Windows 2000 with Service Pack 3 Windows XP with Service Pack 1 or later operating system Your System Components Take a few minutes and enter the information in the table below Various pieces of this information will be required when you install WinSpec 32 when the Setup Wizard see Hardware Setup Wizard page 31 runs and when you begin entering component information on the dialog boxes and tab pages associated with Hardware Setup Spectrograph Setup and Pulser Setup Other information such as software version and hardware serial numbers may be useful if you ever need to contact Technical Support Installing and Starting WinSpec 32 21 System Component Your System Notes Application Software and Version WinSpec Version 2 5 Found on the installation CD or via the WinSpec Help menu Software Options Options purchased separately from WinSpec such as Macro Record or Virtual Chip PVCAME Driver Yes No PVCAM driver is used to run Photometrics cameras Princeton Instruments cameras with USB 2 and the Acton InSpectrum Interfac
325. tored until Start Storage is selected This mode is particularly convenient for familiarization and setting up For ease in focusing the screen refresh rate should be as rapid as possible achieved by operating with axes and cross sections off e In Acquire mode every frame of data collected is stored This mode would ordinarily be selected during actual data collection One limitation of Acquire mode operation is that if data acquisition continues at too fast a rate for it to be stored data overflow will eventually occur This could only happen in Synchronous Full Speed operation The following data collection procedures are done in the Focus mode 51 52 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C WARNING If using an intensified camera note that data collection in the following procedure will be done in the Shutter mode in which the camera can be damaged if exposed to light overload Before powering the controller and camera reduce the room light to reduce the risk of damage Note that intensifiers are particularly at risk in pulsed laser operation where overload spot damage can occur without raising the average current to where the overload detection circuits will be activated It is far better to be careful than sorry Before proceeding take the time to carefully read the manual for your intensified camera Also take particular care that your intensified camera is connected properly for shutter mode operation Cabling and peripheral
326. ts are assumed If your system is more complex e g requiring consideration of complex timing and synchronization issues you will have to carefully study the other chapters of this manual as well as the manuals provided for the system hardware components before data acquisition that addresses those needs will be possible Nevertheless it is a good idea to begin with the simplest possible operating mode This approach will give you operating experience and familiarity that will prove very valuable when you go to make more complex measurements For additional information about the various menus and dialog boxes refer to the online Help topics Note that controllers and cameras ordinarily used for imaging are not discussed in this chapter but rather in the next chapter Initial Imaging Data Collection Underlying assumptions for the following procedure are that the hardware installation including mounting the camera to the spectrograph has been completed A further assumption is that the hardware and spectrograph setups as discussed in Chapter 2 have been completed The last assumption is that a suitable spectrographic source is available The mercury lines produced by ordinary fluorescent lights can be used However it will be better to begin with a low pressure gas discharge lamp such as neon mercury or mercury argon if one is available There are two data collection modes Focus and Acquire e InFocus mode operation no frames of data are s
327. tter Comp Time Pre most fundamental and important 7 j EZ Vertical Shift Time us 12 2 of all hardware selection pr 5 Shutter Comp Time Post i caf decisions and directly influence fo Vertical Shit 4 H os the appearance of many other aoe Window Size 1 WinSpec 32 screens and the ntsc M MPP selections provided on them As e e E a result setting up the software EE US cs 8 up T User Defined Timing I Anti Blooming for use in any system should always begin with the Controller selection Figure 15 Controller Camera tab page Figure 15 shows all of the fields and checkboxes that exist on the Controller Detector tab page WinSpec 32 will display and hide features based on the controller detector and readout mode selected All of the features are described in the text that follows Use PVCAM This box will only appear if you have an installed Tucson PCI interface card or have an installed USB 2 0 interface for a Princeton Instruments detector or the Acton Research InSpectrum This box is automatically checked when you indicate during installation that you are using a PVCAM supported camera Note When you change the check status of this box a warning message Changing This Value Will Cause All Current Controllers To Be Destroyed Do You Want To Continue appears This message means that the current Hardware settings will be deleted and the Hardware Wizard will be displayed so you can characterize
328. u additionally have the option of choosing not to write all of the frames processed to the Output File X and Y Range You can specify the input file pixels to be processed The default is to process all pixels You additionally have the option of restricting the X and Y pixel range data written to the Output File An alternative way to specify a region is to use the mouse to define the region on the active data display of the input file and then click on Mouse Input Output Filename All three tab pages have a field for entering the filename In each case there is a button at the end of the box which when pressed opens a browser to make selecting and specifying filenames and locations as simple as possible In the case of the B tab page there is 135 136 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C additionally a field for entering a constant Radio buttons are provided that activate one or the other of the two fields Either a constant value or a filename can be entered but not both Data Type For the A and B tab pages the data type is reported only and cannot be changed In the case of the C output tab page you can specify the data type Data types include Byte 8 bits only the eight least significant data bits levels 0 to 255 will be saved Unint Unsigned integer 16 bits 0 to 65535 Int Signed integer 16 bits 32768 to 32767 Long Signed integer 32 bits 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Float Floating point 32 bits
329. umentation directory when you install the option Note As part of the Macro option installation the Macro menu is added to the WinSpec 32 menu bar A Macrol of x Option Explicit Sub Main Dim WinX Set WinX CreateObject WinkX32 WinX3Z2app Dim ExpVB Set ExpVB CreateObject WinX32 ExpSetup Dim Docs Set Docs CreateObject Winx32 DocFiles Dim Winds Set Winds CreateObject Wink32 DocWindows Dim SpectroObjMgr Set SpectroObjMgr CreateObject Wink32 SpectroObj Mgr Do Not Edit Above This Line ln 3 Col82 NUM Figure 185 Macro Record dialog box 196 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Spex Spectrograph Control WSSpex opt This option adds spectrograph support for the Spex 270M ISA TRIAX 180 ISA TRIAX 190 ISA Installed Spectrographs TRIAX 320 and the Spex Spex232 Retrofit older Spex that have been retrofitted for RS 232 communication Acton InSpectrum Spex 270M ISA TRIAX 180 ISA TRIAX 190 ISA TRIAX 320 Spex Spex232 Retrofit v Communications Port auto 7 Install Selected Spectrograph Cancel Help Figure 186 Install Remove Spectrographs dialog box Virtual Chip WXvchip opt Introduction This option is used to set the parameters for Virtual Chip operation a special fast acquisition technique that allows frame rates in excess of 100 fps to be obtained For the Virtual Chip selection be available on the WinSpec 32 Setup me
330. upling Termination trigger mode specify the Extemal Positive we C High Threshold Slope Coupling Negative DC 500hms and Impedance appropriate for the trigger source Gate Delay From Ext TriggerlIn C T00ut Click on the Gating tab Figure 166 Figure 165 PTG Triggers tab page Select Bracket Pulsing On or off Triggers Gating Aux Trig Out Note Bracket pulsing is only pilates oA useful in low duty factor gated DS i Sc gdi i Setup measurements in the UV with aani EE the PI MAX camera See your Ham PI MAX system manual for Burst Mode a 3 AA BUTSt detailed information ONTE OFE canes Number of Gates j u Fisies If you select Bracket Pulsing ais a C Anticipator ON next select Anticipator ON Ferion teru uses ee Le or OFF If ON is selected then l i A set the Anticipator time Note The Anticipator allows Bracket Pulsing with repetitive external trigger sources The a Help Anticipator measures the trigger period and then turns on the Figure 166 PTG Gating tab page bracketing pulse timed to lead the photocathode gate pulse by the set interval For proper operation the bracketing pulse must begin at least 500 ns before the gate pulse The minimum Anticipator Time is 500 ns or the minimum PI MAX bracket lead time from EEPROM minus the minimum Gate Delay time For example with a minimum Gate Delay
331. ursor is positioned will be displayed id lamp spe 701 X 40 X 1 C Pixel 310 Intensity 540243 00 point 310 strip 28 frame 1 Figure 82 Single Strip displayed graphically 3 Try operating the cursor positioning keys to demonstrate their effect The left right arrow keys move the cursor along the strip and the up down keys move it from strip to strip The Home and End keys move the cursor to the strip ends and Shift Home and Shift End move it the first strip and last strip respectively The Insert and Delete keys expand or contract the data about the cursor position 4 Restore the 3D display by selecting 3D Graph on the Display Layout General tab page Cursor The cursor s appearance and behavior are a bit different with graphical plots than with image plots as detailed in the following table Table 3 Cursor Appearance and Behavior for Images and Graphs Selection ImagePlot Graph 3D Graph None NoCusor NoCursor NoCusor Small cross both Small cross left right Small cross left right mouse and arrow keys arrow keys select pixel arrow keys change can place cursor at any on strip up down selected pixel on strip pixel on image Home arrow keys select strip Home key moves to and End keys move to be displayed first pixel End key to cursor to end points on Home key moves to last pixel Up down strip Shift Home first pixel End key to arrow keys move moves cursor to first last pixe
332. uter before running the software Instructions for installing the interface board are provided in your Princeton Instruments hardware manuals Note If your computer and system were purchased together from Roper Scientific the Interface card will have been installed at the factory System Requirements The following information lists the system hardware and software requirements Hardware Requirements e Roper Scientific camera and if required by the camera a Princeton Instruments ST series controller with either a TAXI or USB 2 0 Interface Control module for communication between controller and host computer e Host Computer TAXI Protocol e Minimum is AT compatible computer with 80486 or higher processor 50 MHz or faster Pentium or better recommended e Princeton Instruments RS PCI or Photometrics high speed PCI serial card Computers purchased from Roper Scientific are shipped with the card installed e Minimum of 32 Mbyte total RAM for CCDs up to 1 4 million pixels Collecting larger images at full frame or at high speed may require 128 Mbytes or more of RAM e Hard disk with a minimum of 80 Mbytes available A complete installation of the program files takes about 17 Mbytes and the remainder is required for data storage Collection of large images may require additional hard disk storage depending on the number of spectra collected and their size Disk level compression programs are not recommended 19 20 ATT
333. uttons z TG Trigger TG Pulse Viv Setup Pulser nove PI Max To Gate nove Pl Max To Shutter pope Pl Max To Safe Figure 181 Customize Toolbar dialog box 189 190 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C Adding an Available Button 1 3 Open the Customize Toolbar dialog by clicking on Custom Toolbar in the Setup menu Referring to Figure 181 note that the buttons available for placement on the Custom Toolbar are listed on the left Buttons already on the toolbar are on the right To add an available button to the Custom Toolbar first select it from the left hand list You may have to scroll through the list of available buttons to find the one you want You can choose where to place the button by selecting a button on the right side which will then be highlighted The new button will be placed before the highlighted one Click on the Add button The button will disappear from the list of Available buttons and will be added to the list of Toolbar buttons Click on Close to close the dialog box Removing a Button 1 Open the Customize Toolbar dialog by clicking on Customize Toolbar in the Setup menu Referring to Figure 181 note that buttons already on the toolbar are listed on the right Available but unused buttons are listed on the left To remove an available button from the Custom Toolbar first select it from the right hand list You may have to scroll through the listed buttons to find the one
334. ve your intended results and for the use and results obtained from the software In addition during the one 1 year limited warranty The original purchaser is entitled to receive free version upgrades Version upgrades supplied free of charge will be in the form of a download from the Internet Those customers who do not have access to the Internet may obtain the version upgrades on a CD ROM from our factory for an incidental shipping and handling charge See Item 12 in the following section of this warranty Your Responsibility for more information Warranty amp Service 247 Owner s Manual and Troubleshooting You should read the owner s manual thoroughly before operating this product In the unlikely event that you should encounter difficulty operating this product the owner s manual should be consulted before contacting the Roper Scientific technical support staff or authorized service representative for assistance If you have consulted the owner s manual and the problem still persists please contact the Roper Scientific technical support staff or our authorized service representative See Item 12 in the following section of this warranty Your Responsibility for more information Your Responsibility The above Limited Warranties are subject to the following terms and conditions 1 2 You must retain your bill of sale invoice and present it upon request for service and repairs or provide other proof of purchase satis
335. vided if the WinSpec 32 Imaging option has been installed If this choice isn t present the default state is Spectroscopy No Processes tab page functions should be selected On the Data File tab page make the following selections Auto Increment File Name Enable should be OFF Overwrite Append Existing Files Select Overwrite data file will overwrite an existing file having the same name Overwrite Confirmation Check this box so that you will be warned that the specified file name is already in use If not checked the old data file will be overwritten by the new one No warning is provided Data Type AutoSelect Should be selected Auto save and prompts Select Don t auto save or ask to save With this selection you won t receive a prompt when a file is closed as a result of starting a data collection A prompt will still be issued if you close the file explicitly and it has not been saved since being collected Use a New Window for each run Leave unchecked Experiment Setup Version 2 5 C ADC Timing Processes Save Load Main Data File ROI Setup Data Corrections C Imaging Mode New Pattern fi 3 Number Stored 0 Spectroscopy Mode Wavelength r Start 1 End fi 340 a Group fi a Slit Start fi Height fi 00 Mouse Clear Clear All STORE Cancel Changes I Use Software Binning Acquire Focus OK Cancel Help
336. way to get rid of the signal that accumulates on the array during that interval Chapter 9 Cleaning 121 Shutter Normal Open Close Open Close Open Close l l Shutter Preopen Open Close Open Close Open Close I l l l l l l l l I I l l l l I l l l l NOTSCAN i Read Read Read l l l l l l External Sync fe l l Il l I negative polarity shown Io i i i twi texp Ite tR i l l l i 1 First wait Data Second wait Data Third wait Data and exposure stored and exposure stored and exposure stored Figure 112 External Sync Timing Diagram Shutter Normal Open Close Open Close Open Close l I Shutter Preopen Open Close Open Close Open Close NoTscan Sevan foe Read g Read Ps Read I External Sync negative polarity shown ol l l l tw texp te tR i i i First wait Data Second wait Data _ Third wait Data i and exposure stored and exposure stored and exposure stored Figure 113 External Sync with Continuous Cleans Timing Diagram Figure 113 shows the same timing diagram with the addition of continuous cleans indicated by the shaded areas labeled CC Continuous cleans are additional clean cycles and defined by the same parameter values as the standard clean cycles When the External Sync trigger arrives during continuous cleaning the current clean cycle must be completed before the exposure will
337. y for course of the measurement 7 Ti Exposure s If operating in the Repetitive Gating mode simply set the Gate Width Cancel Help and Gate Delay to the desired values and click on OK The Figure 174 Repetitive Gating Setup Repetitive Gating Setup dialog box will close and you will return to the DG535 dialog box Chapter 18 183 Pulser Operation ATTENTION Sequential Mode If Sequential is selected the Sequential Gating Setup dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 175 In the Sequential Gating mode the Gate Width and Gate Delay do not remain constant but change either linearly or exponentially as the measurement progresses Linear is suited to sweeping over a time interval to locate and recover and event that takes place at the same time with each iteration Exponential is well suited to fluorescence decay experiments Sequential Gating Setup x Gate Width Gate Delay Number of Spectra Start 500 a nsec x Start 1000 nsec x zi fi End 10000 nsec x End 100000 nsec z I Check Gate Width and Delay Min Max Message Displayed ith Increment F fisec Delay Increment f0 nsec Fast Decay Slow Decay ie Constant 1 fusec pa Increment Type C Fixed Time Constant 10 E usec z Amplitude 0 Amplitude J10 View Width Delay Sequence IV Save Sequence Values To File Setup File Software Accumulations Repeat Wi
338. y spanned by its area The value of each area can be the sum of the total intensities defined with respect to the baseline or the values can be baseline corrected in which case the value of each area is the sum of the intensities with respect to an imaginary line joining the first and last pixels of the area This latter method is more accurate with a sloping baseline After areas have been defined they can then be mathematically operated on as specified in user entered equations These equations allow you to can add subtract multiply divide or otherwise manipulate up to eight areas You can also include constants or even other equations The Y T analysis modes provided give you control over when the equation calculations will be performed how many will be performed and on which acquired data they will be performed Each time equation calculations are performed one Y T analysis value is produced for each equation For example in a one hour experiment with one Y T equation and a Y T sample time of one minute at the end of the hour a Y T analysis curve sixty points in length would have been taken and stored If two equations had been defined for the same experiment at the end of the hour there would be two Y T curves each sixty points in length An additional Y T curve for the time will always be provided as well Y T curves are stored and can be displayed printed or processed the same as any other data Y T Analysis Procedure 1 Estab
339. you want Click on the Remove button The button will disappear from the list of Toolbar buttons and will be added to the list of Available buttons Click on Close to close the dialog box Individual Dialog Item Descriptions Available Buttons You can select the button you wish to add to the Custom Toolbar from this section Many buttons each with its own preassigned function as described below are available Toolbar Buttons These are the buttons that will actually appear on the Custom Toolbar Add Causes the selected button on the Available buttons list to be transferred to the Toolbar buttons list before the selected button Remove Causes the selected button on the Toolbar list to be transferred to the Available Buttons list Close This button closes the Custom Toolbar Assignment dialog box and implements changes made to the Custom Toolbar Reset Restores the default Custom Toolbar configuration Help Opens the context sensitive help for the Custom Toolbar Chapter 19 Custom Toolbar Settings 191 Move Up Together with Move Down Move Up determines the position of a given button on the Custom Toolbar Each time this button is clicked the selected button on the Toolbar buttons list moves up one position Move Down Together with Move Up Move Down determines the position of a given button on the Custom Toolbar Each time this button is clicked the selected button on the Toolbar buttons list moves down one
340. z Save Find Default Peaks Cancel Help Figure 61 Calibration Setup dialog box after nm z Linear Polynomial running Find Peaks routine on Hg Argon spectrum arrow to be displayed above each peak found in the spectrum together with a notation indicating the peak location in pixels Figure 62 Note Each time the Find Peaks routine is initiated the displayed peak heights will decrease Clicking on the data window Autoscale button will restore their original displayed height 78 WinSpec 32 Manual Version 2 5 C HG ARGON SPE 1025 X 1 X 1 2 HG ARGON Biles st AQ IQIG Figure 62 Spectrum after running Find Peaks routine Select the calibration points For the example being considered the peaks at 182 90 301 00 485 27 and 931 20 would be good choices The decimal point locations are based on the calculated center of peak and not necessarily the largest intensity Position Select the Calibration Units if not nanometers and select the Display Units Both the Calibration Units and the Display Units are nm the default in the example Manually enter the wavelength of the selected peaks Appendix B contains wavelength tables and a detailed spectrum for Hg Argon In our example the wavelengths for the selected peaks would be Peak Location Peak Location Pixels Wavelength in nm 182 90 365 02 485 27 546 07 931 20 811 53 301 00 435 83 Chapter 6 Wavelength Calibration 79

WinSpec/32 User Manual - R

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents